DrayTek UG Vigor3910 V1.0 01

Vigor3910 Series
Multi-WAN Security Router
User’s Guide
Version: 1.0
Firmware Version: V3.9.1.2
(For future update, please visit DrayTek web site)
Date: December 18, 2019
ii
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide
Copyrights
© All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without
written permission from the copyright holders.
Trademarks
The following trademarks are used in this document:
 Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
 Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 10 and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
 Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
 Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
Safety Instructions
 Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.
 The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel.
Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.
 Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.
 The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.
 Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components
may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.
 Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.
 Keep the package out of reach of children.
 When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.
Warranty
 We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship
or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your
purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon
proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials,
we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either
parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition.
Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and
will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused,
tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does
not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the
usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and
online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to
notify any person of such revision or changes.
Be a Registered Owner
 Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.DrayTek.com.
Firmware & Tools Updates
 Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult
the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.
http://www.DrayTek.com
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide iii

Table of Contents
Part I Installation ................................................................................................................1
I-1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 2
I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors .................................................................................................. 3
I-2 Hardware Installation .................................................................................................................... 5
I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router ......................................................................................................... 5
I-2-2 Rack-Mounted Installation ................................................................................................... 6
I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router ................................................................................. 7
I-3 Accessing Web Page .................................................................................................................. 14
I-4 Changing Password.................................................................................................................... 16
I-5 Dashboard................................................................................................................................... 18
I-5-1 Virtual Panel ...................................................................................................................... 19
I-5-2 Quick Access for Common Used Menu ............................................................................ 20
I-5-3 GUI Map ............................................................................................................................ 21
I-5-4 Web Console ..................................................................................................................... 23
I-5-5 Config Backup ................................................................................................................... 23
I-5-6 Manual Download.............................................................................................................. 24
I-5-7 Logout................................................................................................................................ 24
I-5-8 Online Status ..................................................................................................................... 25
I-5-8-1 Physical Connection ......................................................................25
I-5-8-2 Virtual WAN ...............................................................................27
I-6 Registering Vigor Router............................................................................................................. 28
Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................31

II-1 Port Setup .................................................................................................................................. 32
II-2 WAN ........................................................................................................................................... 33
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................... 35
II-2-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 35
II-2-2 Internet Access................................................................................................................. 38
II-2-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in Etherenet WAN ...........................................40
II-2-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in Etherenet WAN..........................42
II-2-2-3 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in Ethernet WAN....................................46
II-2-2-4 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in Ethernet WAN ........................................46
II-2-2-5 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in Etherenet WAN.....................................47
II-2-2-6 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in Ethernet WAN.....................................49
II-2-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in Ethernet WAN...........................51
II-2-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in Ethernet WAN ...............................52
II-2-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in Ethernet WAN ......................53
II-2-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in Ethernet WAN.......................................55
II-2-3 Multi-VLAN ....................................................................................................................... 57
II-3 LAN ............................................................................................................................................ 60
II-3-1 General Setup .................................................................................................................. 62
II-3-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup ........................63
iv
II-3-1-2 Details Page for LAN1 – IPv6 Setup....................................................66
II-3-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet ....................................................71
II-3-1-4 DHCP Server Option .....................................................................72
II-3-2 VLAN ................................................................................................................................ 74
II-3-3 Bind IP to MAC ................................................................................................................. 76
II-3-4 PPPoE Server .................................................................................................................. 78
II-4 NAT ............................................................................................................................................ 79
II-4-1 Port Redirection................................................................................................................ 80
II-4-2 DMZ Host ......................................................................................................................... 84
II-4-3 Open Ports ....................................................................................................................... 87
II-4-4 Port Triggering.................................................................................................................. 89
II-4-5 ALG................................................................................................................................... 92
II-5 Applications ................................................................................................................................ 93
II-5-1 Dynamic DNS ................................................................................................................... 95
II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding .......................................................................................... 100
II-5-3 DNS Security .................................................................................................................. 103
II-5-3-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 103
II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose ....................................................................... 104
II-5-4 Schedule......................................................................................................................... 105
II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+ ........................................................................................................ 108
II-5-5-1 External RADIUS ........................................................................ 108
II-5-5-2 Internal RADIUS ........................................................................ 110
II-5-5-3 External TACACS+...................................................................... 112
II-5-6 Active Directory/ LDAP ................................................................................................... 113
II-5-7 IGMP............................................................................................................................... 116
II-5-7-1 General Setting ........................................................................ 116
II-5-7-2 Working Group ......................................................................... 117
II-5-8 Wake on LAN ................................................................................................................. 118
II-5-9 SMS / Mail Alert Service................................................................................................. 119
II-5-10 Bonjour ......................................................................................................................... 121
II-5-11 High Availability ............................................................................................................ 124
II-5-11-1 General Setup ......................................................................... 124
II-5-11-2 Config Sync ............................................................................ 126
Application Notes ..................................................................................................................... 128
A-1 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management? ......... 128
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS? ..................................................................... 130
II-6 Routing..................................................................................................................................... 135
Web User Interface .................................................................................................................. 136
II-6-1 Static Route .................................................................................................................... 136
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy ........................................................................................... 140
II-6-2-1 General Setup .......................................................................... 140
II-6-2-2 Diagnose for Route Policy ............................................................ 146
II-6-3 OSPF .............................................................................................................................. 148
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide v

II-6-4 BGP ................................................................................................................................ 150
II-6-4-1 Basic Settings ........................................................................... 151
II-6-4-2 Static Network ......................................................................... 152
A-1 How to Customize a Secure Route between VPN Router and Remote Router by Using
Route Policy ...................................................................................... 153
Part III VPN .....................................................................................................................157

III-1 VPN and Remote Access........................................................................................................ 158
III-1-1 Remote Access Control................................................................................................. 159
III-1-2 PPP General Setup ....................................................................................................... 160
III-1-3 IPsec General Setup ..................................................................................................... 162
III-1-4 IPsec Peer Identity ........................................................................................................ 164
III-1-5 OpenVPN ...................................................................................................................... 166
III-1-5-1 General Setup ......................................................................... 166
III-1-5-2 Client Config ........................................................................... 167
III-1-6 Remote Dial-in User ...................................................................................................... 168
III-1-7 LAN to LAN.................................................................................................................... 171
III-1-8 VPN Trunk Management............................................................................................... 182
III-1-9 Connection Management .............................................................................................. 191
A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Remote Office and Headquarter via IPsec
Tunnel (Main Mode) ............................................................................. 193
III-2 SSL VPN ................................................................................................................................. 198
III-2-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 199
III-2-2 User Account ................................................................................................................. 200
III-3 Certificate Management.......................................................................................................... 204
III-3-1 Local Certificate............................................................................................................. 205
III-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate ................................................................................................... 209
III-3-3 Certificate Backup ......................................................................................................... 211
III-3-4 Self-Signed Certificate................................................................................................... 212
Part IV Security ..............................................................................................................213

IV-1 Firewall.................................................................................................................................... 214
IV-1-1 General Setup ............................................................................................................... 216
IV-1-2 Filter Setup.................................................................................................................... 221
IV-1-3 Defense Setup .............................................................................................................. 230
IV-1-3-1 DoS Defense ............................................................................ 230
IV-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense...................................................................... 233
IV-1-4 Diagnose ....................................................................................................................... 233
vi
A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet ........................ 236
IV-2 CSM (Central Security Management)..................................................................................... 239
IV-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile .............................................................................................. 240
IV-2-2 URL Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 242
IV-2-3 Web Content Filter Profile ............................................................................................. 246
IV-2-4 DNS Filter Profile .......................................................................................................... 250
A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor ................................................. 252
A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content Filter / URL
Content Filter .................................................................................... 257
A-3 How to use APP Enforcement to block application like Facebook, YouTube or
TeamViewer? ..................................................................................... 262
Part V Management .......................................................................................................267

V-1 System Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 268
V-1-1 System Status ................................................................................................................ 269
V-1-2 TR-069 ........................................................................................................................... 271
V-1-2-1 ACS and CPE Settings.................................................................. 271
V-1-2-2 Reporting Configuration .............................................................. 273
V-1-2-3 Export Parameters..................................................................... 274
V-1-3 Administrator Password ................................................................................................. 275
V-1-4 User Password............................................................................................................... 278
V-1-5 Login Page Greeting ...................................................................................................... 281
V-1-6 Configuration Backup..................................................................................................... 283
V-1-7 Configuration Export ...................................................................................................... 285
V-1-8 Syslog/Mail Alert ............................................................................................................ 286
V-1-9 Time and Date................................................................................................................ 289
V-1-10 SNMP........................................................................................................................... 290
V-1-11 Management ................................................................................................................ 293
V-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate ................................................................................................. 297
V-1-13 Reboot System............................................................................................................. 299
V-1-14 Firmware Upgrade ....................................................................................................... 300
V-1-15 Activation...................................................................................................................... 301
V-1-16 Internal Service User List............................................................................................. 302
V-1-17 Dashboard Control ....................................................................................................... 303
V-2 Bandwidth Management .......................................................................................................... 304
V-2-1 Sessions Limit ................................................................................................................ 306
V-2-2 Bandwidth Limit.............................................................................................................. 308
V-2-3 Quality of Service ........................................................................................................... 310
V-3 User Management ................................................................................................................... 317
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide vii

V-3-1 General Setup ................................................................................................................ 318
V-3-2 User Profile .................................................................................................................... 320
V-3-3 User Group..................................................................................................................... 324
V-3-4 User Online Status ......................................................................................................... 326
V-3-5 PPPoE User Online Status ............................................................................................ 327
A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management ................................... 328
A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature ....................................................... 337
V-4 Hotspot Web Portal.................................................................................................................. 341
V-4-1 Profile Setup................................................................................................................... 342
V-4-1-1 Login Method ........................................................................... 342
V-4-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile........................................ 344
V-4-2 Quota Management ....................................................................................................... 360
A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts (e.g.,
Facebook & Google) ............................................................................. 363
A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS?........................ 371
Part VI Others.................................................................................................................379
VI-1 Objects Settings...................................................................................................................... 380
VI-1-1 IP Object ....................................................................................................................... 381
VI-1-2 IP Group........................................................................................................................ 385
VI-1-3 IPv6 Object.................................................................................................................... 386
VI-1-4 IPv6 Group .................................................................................................................... 388
VI-1-5 Service Type Object...................................................................................................... 389
VI-1-6 Service Type Group ...................................................................................................... 391
VI-1-7 Keyword Object............................................................................................................. 393
VI-1-8 Keyword Group ............................................................................................................. 395
VI-1-9 File Extension Object .................................................................................................... 396
VI-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object ............................................................................................ 398
VI-1-11 Notification Object ....................................................................................................... 403
VI-1-12 String Object ............................................................................................................... 405
VI-1-13 Country Object ............................................................................................................ 406
A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in WAN
Disconnection .................................................................................... 408
Part VII Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................413

VII-1Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................. 414
VII-1-1 Dial-out Triggering........................................................................................................ 415
viii
VII-1-2 Routing Table............................................................................................................... 416
VII-1-3 ARP Cache Table ........................................................................................................ 417
VII-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table .................................................................................................. 418
VII-1-5 DHCP Table ................................................................................................................. 419
VII-1-6 NAT Sessions Table .................................................................................................... 420
VII-1-7 DNS Cache Table ........................................................................................................ 421
VII-1-8 Ping Diagnosis ............................................................................................................. 422
VII-1-9 Data Flow Monitor ........................................................................................................ 424
VII-1-10 Traffic Graph .............................................................................................................. 426
VII-1-11 Trace Route ............................................................................................................... 427
VII-1-13 Syslog Explorer .......................................................................................................... 428
VII-1-14 IPv6 TSPC Status ...................................................................................................... 429
VII-1-15 High Availability Status .............................................................................................. 430
VII-1-16 Authentication Information ......................................................................................... 432
VII-1-17 DoS Flood Table ........................................................................................................ 433
VII-1-18 Route Policy Diagnosis .............................................................................................. 434
VII-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not ...................................................................... 436
VII-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not.................... 437
VII-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer ............................................................................... 440
VII-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not........................................................................... 442
VII-6 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary ................................................................... 443
VII-7 Contacting DrayTek ............................................................................................................... 444
Part VIII DrayTek Tools ..................................................................................................445

VIII-1 SmartVPN Client................................................................................................................... 446
VIII-1-1 DrayTek Android-based SmartVPN APP for the establishment of SSL VPN connection
................................................................................................................................................. 446
VIII-1-2 How to Use SmartVPN Android APP to Establish SSL VPN Tunnel?........................ 447
Part IX Telnet Commands..............................................................................................451

Accessing Telnet of Vigor3910 ....................................................................................................... 452
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide ix

Part I Installation
This part will introduce Vigor router and guide to
install the device in hardware and software.
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 1

I-1 Introduction
This is a generic International version of the user guide. Specification,

compatibility and features vary by region. For specific user guides
suitable for your region or product, please contact local distributor.
Vigor3910 Series, a broadband router, integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth

management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.
By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware encryption of AES/DES/3DES, the
router increases the performance of VPN greatly and offers several protocols (such as
IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with up to 100 VPN tunnels.
The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set
firewall policy easily. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and
management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By
the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside
and control inside.
Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe.
2 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

I-1-1 Indicators and Connectors
Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and
connectors first.
LED Status Explanation

PWR On The router is powered on.
Off The router is powered off.
ACT Blinking The system is active.
Off The system is hanged.
USB On The USB device is installed and ready.
Off No USB device is installed.
SFP+ On The fiber connection is established.
Blinking The data is transmitting.
Off No fiber connection is established or the system is
hanged.
On (Left) The Ethernet link is established on corresponding port.
Off (Left) No Ethernet link is established.
Blinking (L) The data is transmitting.
P3~P12 On (Right) The Ethernet link is established on corresponding port
with 1G Mbps or above.
Off (Right) The Ethernet link is established on corresponding port
with less than 1G Mbps.
LED on Connector
DMZ Left On The port is connected.
LED Off The port is disconnected.
(Green) Blinking The data is transmitting.
Right On The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
LED Off The port is connected with 10/100Mbps.
(Green)
Left On The port is connected.
LAN LED Off The port is disconnected.
Blinking The data is transmitting.
LED Off The port is connected with 10/100Mbps
Left On The port is connected.
WAN1~ LED Off The port is disconnected.
WAN4 Blinking The data is transmitting.
LED Off The port is connected with 10/100Mbps

Interface Description
USB1 / USB2 Connecter for the USB device.
Console Provided for technician use.
SFP+ Connecter for SFP module with the rate of 10G/1G bps.
(P1~P2)
2.5GBase-T Connector for remote network devices or local network devices
(P3~P4) (WAN/LAN) with the rate of 2.5G/1G/100M/10M bps.
GbE P5~P8 Connectors for remote network devices or local network devices
(WAN/LAN) with the rate of 1G/100M/10M bps.
GbE P9~P12 Connecter for local network devices (LAN) with the rate of
1G/100M/10M bps.
The Factory Reset button is used to restore the default settings. Turn
on the router (ACT LED is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more
than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than
usual, release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory
default configuration.
Connecter for a power cord.

ON/OFF - Power switch.

I-2 Hardware Installation
I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router

Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly.
1. Connect a modem to any WAN port of Vigor3910 with Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to access
Internet.
2. Connect the other end of the cable (RJ-45) to the Ethernet port on your computer (that
device also can connect to other computers to form a small area network). The LAN LED
for that port on the front panel will light up.
3. Connect a server/router (depends on your requirement) to any WAN port of Vigor3910
with Ethernet cable (RJ-45). The WAN LED will light up.
4. Connect the power cord to Vigor3910’s power port on the rear panel, and the other side
into a wall outlet.
5. Power on the device by pressing down the power switch on the rear panel. The PWR LED
should be ON.
6. The system starts to initiate. After completing the system test, the ACT LED will light up
and start blinking.
Below shows an outline of the hardware installation for your reference.

I-2-2 Rack-Mounted Installation
The Vigor3910 Series can be mounted on the wall by using standard brackets shown below.
Attach the brackets to the chassis of a rack. The second bracket attaches the other side of the
chassis.
After the bracket installation, the Vigor3910 Series chassis can be installed in a rack by using
four screws for each side of the rack.
Desktop Type Installation

Rubber pads are included with the Vigor3910 Series. These rubber pads improve the air
circulation and decrease unnecessary rubbing on the desktop.

I-2-3 Installing USB Printer to Vigor Router
You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router
can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows 7.
For other Windows system, please visit www.DrayTek.com.
Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers
(or wireless clients).
1. Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port.
2. Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Devices and Printers.
3. Click Add a printer.

4. A dialog will appear. Click Add a local printer and click Next.
5. In this dialog, choose Create a new port. In the field of Type of port, use the drop down
list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Then, click Next.

6. In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router’s LAN IP) in the field of Hostname or
IP Address and type 192.168.1.1 as the Port name. Then, click Next.
7. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.

8. Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto
the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the
selection, click Next.
9. Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.

10. Choose Do not share this printer and click Next.
11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.

12. The new printer has been added and displayed under Printers and Faxes. Click the new
printer icon and click Printer server properties.
13. Edit the property of the new printer you have added by clicking Configure Port.

14. Select "LPR" on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next
please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name.

I-3 Accessing Web Page
1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.

You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set
up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of
Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later
section - Trouble Shooting of the guide.
2. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. The following window
will be open to ask for username and password.
3. Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.
Info If you fail to access to the web configuration, please go to “Trouble Shooting” for
detecting and solving your problem.

4. Now, the Main Screen will appear.
Info The home page will be different slightly in accordance with the type of the
router you have.
5. The web page can be logged out according to the chosen condition. The default setting
is Auto Logout, which means the web configuration system will logout after 5 minutes
without any operation. Change the setting for your necessity.

I-4 Changing Password
Please change the password for the original security of the router.
1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will
open to ask for username and password.
2. Please type “admin/admin” as Username/Password for accessing into the web user
interface with admin mode.
3. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.
4. Enter the login password (the default is “admin”) on the field of Old Password. Type
New Password and Confirm Password. Then click OK to continue.
Info The maximum length of the password you can set is 23 characters.
5. Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the
Web user interface for this router.

Info Even the password is changed, the Username for logging onto the web user interface
is still “admin”.

I-5 Dashboard
Dashboard shows the connection status including System Information, IPv4 Internet Access,
IPv6 Internet Access, Interface (physical connection), Security and Quick Access.
Click Dashboard from the main menu on the left side of the main page.
A web page with default selections will be displayed on the screen. Refer to the following
figure:

I-5-1 Virtual Panel
On the top of the Dashboard, a virtual panel (simulating the physical panel of the router)
displays the physical interface connection. It will be refreshed every five seconds. When you
move and click the mouse cursor on LAN, or WAN, related web setting page will be open for
you to configure if required.
Port Color Description

LAN Black LAN port is disconnected.
Orange LAN port is connected at 10/100 Mbps.
Green LAN port is connected at 1 Gbps.
WAN Black WAN port is disconnected.
Orange WAN port is connected at 10/100 Mbps.
Green WAN port is connected at 1 Gbps.
For detailed information about the LED display, refer to I-1-1 LED Indicators and
Connectors.

I-5-2 Quick Access for Common Used Menu
All the menu items can be accessed and arranged orderly on the left side of the main page for
your request. However, some important and common used menu items which can be
accessed in a quick way just for convenience.
Look at the right side of the Dashboard. You will find a group of common used functions
grouped under Quick Access.
The function links of System Status, Dynamic DDNS, TR-069, User Management, IM/P2P Block,
Schedule, Syslog/Mail Alert, LDAP, RADIUS, Firewall Object Setting and Data Flow Monitor are
displayed here. Move your mouse cursor on any one of the items and click on it. The
corresponding setting page will be open immediately.
Besides, LAN, IP Routed Subnet, WAN interfaces, VPN security settings such as Remote Dial-in
User and LAN to LAN also can be accessed on this page easily. Scroll down the page to find
them and move your mouse cursor on the item to open the configuration web page.

Note that there is a plus ( ) icon located on the left side of VPN/LAN. Click it to review the
LAN connection(s) used presently.
All of the hosts (including wireless clients) displayed with Host ID, IP Address and MAC address
indicates that the traffic would be transmitted through LAN port(s) and then the WAN port.
The purpose is to perform the traffic monitor of the host(s).
I-5-3 GUI Map
All the functions the router supports are listed with table clearly in this page. Users can click
the function link to access into the setting page of the function for detailed configuration.
Click the icon on the top of the main screen to display all the functions.

I-5-4 Web Console
It is not necessary to use the telnet command via DOS prompt. The changes made by using
web console have the same effects as modified through web user interface. The
functions/settings modified under Web Console also can be reviewed on the web user
interface.
Click the Web Console icon on the top of the main screen to open the following screen.
I-5-5 Config Backup
There is one way to store current used settings quickly by clicking the Config Backup icon. It
allows you to backup current settings as a file. Such configuration file can be restored by
using System Maintenance>>Configuration Backup.
Simply click the icon on the top of the main screen.

I-5-6 Manual Download
Click this icon to open online user’s guide of Vigor router. This document offers detailed
information for the settings on web user interface.
I-5-7 Logout
Click this icon to exit the web user interface.

I-5-8 Online Status
I-5-8-1 Physical Connection

Such page displays the physical connection status such as LAN connection status, WAN
connection status, ADSL information, and so on.
Physical Connection for IPv4 Protocol

Physical Connection for IPv6 Protocol
Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:
Item Description
LAN Status Primary DNS-Displays the primary DNS server address for
WAN interface.
Secondary DNS -Displays the secondary DNS server address
for WAN interface.
IP Address-Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the
LAN interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
WAN1 to WAN8 Status Enable – Yes in red means such interface is available but
not enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled.
Line – Displays the physical connection (VDSL, ADSL,
Ethernet, or USB) of this interface.
Name – Display the name of the router.

Item Description
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
GW IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
TX Packets - Displays the total transmitted packets at the
WAN interface.
TX Rate - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
WAN interface.
RX Packets - Displays the total number of received packets
at the WAN interface.
RX Rate - Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN
interface.
Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:
Item Description
LAN Status IP Address- Displays the IPv6 address of the LAN interface..
TX Packets-Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN
interface.
RX Packets-Displays the total received packets at the LAN
interface.
TX Bytes - Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the
LAN interface.
RX Bytes - Displays the speed of received octets at the LAN
interface.
WAN1 to WAN8 IPv6 Status Enable – No in red means such interface is available but not
enabled. Yes in green means such interface is enabled. No in
red means such interface is not available.
Mode - Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., TSPC).
Up Time - Displays the total uptime of the interface.
IP - Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
Gateway IP - Displays the IP address of the default gateway.
Info The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface is ready for
accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface
is not ready for accessing Internet.
I-5-8-2 Virtual WAN

Such page displays the virtual WAN connection information.
Virtual WAN are used by TR-069 management, VoIP service and so on.
The field of Application will list i-9the purpose of such WAN connection.

I-6 Registering Vigor Router
You have finished the configuration of Quick Start Wizard and you can surf the Internet at any
time. Now it is the time to register your Vigor router to MyVigor website for getting more
service. Please follow the steps below to finish the router registration.
1 Please login the web configuration interface of Vigor router by typing “admin/admin” as
User Name / Password.
2 Click Support Area>>Production Registration from the home page.
3 A Login page will be shown on the screen. Please type the account and password that
you created previously. And click Login.

Info If you haven’t an accessing account, please refer to section Creating an
Account for MyVigor to create your own one. Please read the articles on the
Agreement regarding user rights carefully while creating a user account.
4 The following page will be displayed after you logging in MyVigor. Type a nickname for
the router, then click Add.
5 When the following page appears, your router information has been added to the
database.

6 After clicking OK, you will see the following page. Your router has been registered to
myvigor website successfully.

Part II Connectivity
It means wide area network. Public IP will be used in

WAN.
It means local area network. Private IP will be used in

LAN.
Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets
regulated and ruled by router. The design of network
structure is related to what type of public IP addresses
coming from your ISP.
When the data flow passing through, the Network

Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will
dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and
the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in
the local area network.
DNS, LAN DNS, IGMP, WOL, RADIUS, …
Static Route, Load-Balance/Route Policy, OSPF, BGP

II-1 Port Setup
This page is used for configuring tranmission rate for LAN and WAN ports respectively.
Due to hardware restriction, the speed of P3 is the same as the speed of P4. So whenever P3 is
changed, P4 is changed too and vice versa.
Available settings are explained as follows:
Item Description
Port Display the physical ports on Vigor router.
Function P1 ~ P8 - These ports are switchable between WAN and LAN
ports.
Speed P1 ~ P2 - Available options include Auto, 10G and 1G.
P3 ~ P4 - Available options include Auto and 2.5G. Due to the
hardware limitation, the speed for P4 is the same as P3.
P5 ~ P12- Available options include Auto, 1G, 100M, and 10
M.

II-2 WAN
It allows users to access Internet.
Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network

IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print
server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid
address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre
(NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public
network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the
management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC
has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as
private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:
From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
What are Public IP Address and Private IP Address

As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of
host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the
Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to
communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other
network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the
Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate
public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local
area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.
Get Your Public IP Address from ISP

In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is
required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over
Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access
concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with
significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service
according to user requirement.
When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for
a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated via
PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other
related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.
Network Connection by 3G/4G USB Modem

For 3G/4G mobile communication through Access Point is popular more and more, Vigor3910
adds the function of 3G/4G network connection for such purpose. By connecting 3G/4G USB
Modem to the USB port of Vigor3910, it can support LTE/HSDPA/UMTS/EDGE/GPRS/GSM and
the future 3G/4G standard (HSUPA, etc). Vigor3910n with 3G/4G USB Modem allows you to
receive 3G/4G signals at any place such as your car or certain location holding outdoor
activity and share the bandwidth for using by more people. Users can use LAN ports on the
router to access Internet. Also, they can access Internet via 802.11(a/b/g/n/ac) wireless
standard, and enjoy the powerful firewall, bandwidth management, and VPN features of
Vigor3910n series.

After connecting into the router, 3G/4G USB Modem will be regarded as the WAN3/WAN4 port.
However, the original WAN1 and WAN2 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the
router. Besides, 3G/4G USB Modem in WAN3/WAN4 also can be used as backup device.
Therefore, when WAN1 and WAN2 are not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting
automatically. The supported 3G/4G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please
visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.

Web User Interface
II-2-1 General Setup

This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection
modes for WAN1~WAN8 in details.
This router supports multiple-WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine
the bandwidth of the multiple WANs to speed up the transmission through the network. Each
WAN port can connect to different ISPs, Even if the ISPs use different technology to provide
telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.). If any connection problem
occurred on one of the ISP connections, all the traffic will be guided and switched to the
normal communication port for proper operation. Please configure WAN# settings.
This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN# respectively.
Item Description
Load Balance Mode This option is available for multiple-WAN for getting enough
bandwidth for each WAN port. If you know the practical
bandwidth for your WAN interface, please choose the setting
of According to Line Speed. Otherwise, please choose Auto
Weight to let the router reach the best load balance.
IP Based - The same source / destination IP pair will select
the same WAN interface as policy. It is the default setting.
Session Based- All of the WAN interfaces will be used (as
out-going WAN) for passing through new sessions to get
better transmission speed. Though good speed test result for
throughput might be reached; however, some web site may
not open smoothly, especially the site need authentication,
e.g., FTP.
If you have no strong demand about speed test result, keep
default settings as IP based.
Index (WAN1 ~WAN8) Click the WAN interface link under Index to access into the

WAN configuration page.
Enable Check the box to enable this WAN interface.
Physical Mode / Type / Display the physical mode, physical type, and LAN port of
Port this WAN interface.
Line Speed(Kbps) Display the downstream and upstream rate of this WAN
DownLink/UpLink interface.
Active Mode Display whether this WAN interface is Active device or

backup device.
Backup (WAN#)- Display the backup WAN interface for this
WAN when it is disabled.
Load Balance V means the function of load balance for such WAN interface
is enabled.
Info In default, each WAN port is enabled.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings.
To configure WAN interface settings, click the WAN# link to open the following page.
Item Description
Enable Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface.
Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.
Display Name Type the description for such WAN interface.
Physical Mode Display the physical mode of such WAN interface.
Physical Type You can change the physical type for WAN or choose Auto

negotiation for determined by the system.
Line Speed If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load
Balance Mode, please type the line speed for downloading
and uploading for such WAN interface. The unit is kbps.
VLAN Tag insertion Enable – Enable the function of VLAN with tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the WAN while sending them out.
Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by WAN1.
Disable – Disable the function of VLAN with tag.
Tag value – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The
range is form 0 to 4095.
Priority – Type the packet priority number for such VLAN.
The range is from 0 to 7.
Active Mode Always On - Choose Always On to make the WAN
connection being activated always.
Load Balance: Check this box to enable auto load balance

function for this WAN interface.
When the data traffic is large, the WAN interface with the
function enabled will balance the data transmission
automatically among all of the WAN interfaces in
connection status.
Failover – Choose it to make the WAN connection as a
backup connection.
 WAN Failure – When the active WAN failed, such WAN
will be activated as the main network connection.
 Traffic Threshold – When the data traffic of active
WAN reaches the traffic threshold (specified here),
the failover WAN will be enabled automatically to
share the overloaded data traffic.
Active When If you choose Failover as the Active Mode, the option of
Active When will appear.
 Any of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN
connection will be activated when any selected WAN
interface (checked below) disconnects.
 All of the selected WAN disconnect – Such WAN
connection will be activated only when all of selected
WAN interfaces (checked below) disconnect.
 Check boxes for WAN1 to WAN5 – Specify the WAN
interface by checking the WAN box.

II-2-2 Internet Access
For the router supports multi-WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings for
Internet Access. Due to different Physical Mode for WAN interface, the Access Mode for these
connections also varies. Refer to the following figures.
Item Description
Index Display the WAN interface.
Display Name It shows the name of the WAN1 ~ WAN8 that entered in
general setup.
Physical Mode / Port It shows the physical connection for WAN(Ethernet) /port
number according to the real network connection.
Access Mode Use the drop down list to choose a proper access mode. The
details page of that mode will be popped up. If not, click
Details Page for accessing the page to configure the settings.
Details Page This button will open different web page (based on IPv4)
according to the access mode that you choose in WAN
interface.
Note that Details Page will be changed slightly based on
physical mode.
IPv6 This button will open different web page (based on Physical
Mode) to setup IPv6 Internet Access Mode for WAN interface.
If IPv6 service is active on this WAN interface, the color of
“IPv6” will become green.
DHCP Client Option This button allows you to configure DHCP client options.
DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and
data information when such function is enabled and
configured.

Enable – Check the box to enable the function of DHCP
Option. Each DHCP option is composed by an option number
with data. For example,
Option number:100
Data: abcd
When such function is enabled, the specified values for DHCP
option will be seen in DHCP reply packets.
Interface – Specify the WAN interface(s) that will be
overwritten by this function. WAN13 ~ WAN52 can be located
under WAN>>Multi-VLAN.
Option Number – Type a number for such function.
DataType – Choose the type (ASCII or Hex) for the data to be
stored.
Data – Type the content of the data to be processed by the
function of DHCP option.
Info If you choose to configure option 61 here, the detailed settings in WAN>>Interface
Access will be overwritten.

II-2-2-1 Details Page for PPPoE in Etherenet WAN
To choose PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, please select PPPoE from the
WAN>>Internet Access >>WAN1 page. The following web page will be shown.
Item Description
Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
ISP Access Setup Enter your allocated username, password and authentication
parameters according to the information provided by your
ISP.
Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this
field.
The maximum length of the user name you can set is 63
characters.
Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.
The maximum length of the password you can set is 62
characters.
More Options - It shows optional settings for configuration.
 Service Name - Enter the description of the specific
network service.
PPPoE Pass-through The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you

also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local
clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol
is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be
transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server.
Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.
For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same
network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with
the Host PC) to access into Internet.
Note: To have PPPoA Pass-through, please choose PPPoA
protocol and check the box(es) here. The router will behave
like a modem which only serves the PPPoE client on the LAN.
That’s, the router will offer PPPoA dial-up connection.
WAN Connection Such function allows you to verify whether network
Detection connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose PPP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. If you choose Ping Detect as the
detection mode, you have to type required settings for the
following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
 Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific

transmit path.
 MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet.
 MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.
After clicking the “detect” button, the system will

calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
 Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
 Accept– After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for
PPP.
Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the
Internet after passing through the time without any action.
IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) - Usually ISP
dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect
to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to
always assign you the same IP address whenever you request.
In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP
field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this
function.
Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP
address in the box of Fixed IP Address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using. Type the additional WAN
IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit
the dialog.
Dial-Out Schedule You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request.
All the schedules can be set previously in Application >>
Schedule web page and you can use the number that you
have set in that web page.
TTL Change the TTL value – Check the box to enable the TTL
(Time to Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.
 If enabled - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it
passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client,
accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by
certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.
 If disabled – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when
a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be
cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet
will not be blocked by ISP.
Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or
specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC
Address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address – Type the MAC address for the router
manually.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.
II-2-2-2 Details Page for Static or Dynamic IP in Etherenet WAN

For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely
multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a
Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a
public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address
to the WAN interface.
To use Static or Dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the internet, please click the Static
or Dynamic IP tab. The following web page will be shown.

Item Description
Enable / Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,
this function will be closed and all the settings that you
adjusted in this page will be invalid.
IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically
and allows you type in IP address manually.
Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to
obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use
Dynamic IP mode.
More Options - It shows optional settings for configuration.
 Router Name: Type in the router name provided by ISP.
 Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you have
assigned.
 Enable DHCP Client Identifier: Check the box to
specify username and password as the DHCP client
identifier for some ISP.
- Username: Type a name as username. The maximum
length of the user name you can set is 63 characters.
- Password: Type a password. The maximum length of
the password you can set is 62 characters.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify
some data if you want to use Static IP mode.
 IP Address: Type the IP address.
 Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask.
 Gateway IP Address: Type the gateway IP address.
WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and
would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use
WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 32 public IP addresses other
than the current one you are using.
DNS Server IP Address Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to
use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address
for necessity in the future.
Detection connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose ARP Detect, Ping Detect, Always On or Strict
ARP Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. If
you choose Ping Detect as the detection mode, you have to
type required settings for the following items.
 Primary/Secondary Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type Primary or Secondary IP
address in this field for pinging.
 Ping Gateway IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection
mode, you also can enable this setting to use current WAN
gateway IP address for pinging.
With the IP address(es) pinging, Vigor router can check if
the WAN connection is on or off.
 TTL (Time to Live) – Set TTL value of PING operation.
 Ping Interval – Type the interval for the system to
execute the PING operation.
 Ping Retry – Type the number of times that the system is
allowed to execute the PING operation before WAN
disconnection is judged.
MTU It means Max Transmit Unit for packet.
Path MTU Discovery – It is used to detect the maximum MTU
size of a packet not to be segmented in specific transmit
path.
Click Detect to open the following dialog.
 Path MTU to – Type the IP address as the specific

transmit path.
 MTU size start from – Determine the starting point
value of the packet. Default setting is 1500.
 MTU reduce size by– It determines the decreasing size
of MTU value. For example, the number specified in
this field is “8”. The maximum MTU size is “1500”.

After clicking the “detect” button, the system will
calculate and get the suitable MTU value such as 1500,
1492, 1484 and etc., automatically.
 Detect – Click it to detect a suitable MTU value
 Accept– After clicking it, the detected value will be
displayed in the field of MTU.
Keep WAN Connection Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP
environments because some ISPs will drop connections if
there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check
Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.
PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please
specify the IP address for the system to PING it for keeping
alive.
PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to execute
the PING operation.
TTL Change the TTL value – Check the box to enable the TTL
(Time to Live) for a packet transmitted through Vigor router.
 If enabled - TTL value will be reduced (-1) when it
passess through Vigor router. It will cause the client,
accessing Internet through Vigor router, be blocked by
certain ISP when TTL value becomes “0”.
 If disabled – TTL value will not be reduced. Then, when
a packet passes through Vigor router, it will not be
cancelled. That is, the client who sends out the packet
will not be blocked by ISP.
RIP Protocol Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP（RFC1058）
specifying how routers exchange routing tables information.
Click Enable RIP for activating this function.
Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode - If the function is enabled, the router
will work as a bridge modem.
 Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check
boxes are enabled, the settings configured (user
profiles) under User Management will be ignored. And
all of the filter rules defined and enabled in Firewall
menu will be activated.
Bridge Subnet – Make a bridge between the selected LAN
subnet and such WAN interface.
MAC Address Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default
MAC address for the router.
Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers
specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In
such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and
enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.

II-2-2-3 Details Page for IPv6 – Offline in Ethernet WAN
When Offline is selected, the IPv6 connection will be disabled.
II-2-2-4 Details Page for IPv6 – PPP in Ethernet WAN

During the procedure of IPv4 PPPoE connection, we can get the IPv6 Link Local Address
between the gateway and Vigor router through IPv6CP. Later, use DHCPv6 or accept RA to
acquire the IPv6 prefix address (such as: 2001:B010:7300:200::/64) offered by the ISP. In
addition, PCs under LAN also can have the public IPv6 address for Internet access by means of
the generated prefix.
No need to type any other information for PPP mode.
Item Description
Detection connection is alive or not through Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On or Ping Detect for the system to
execute for WAN detection. Always On means no detection
will be executed. The network connection will be on always.
 Ping IP/Hostname – If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field
for pinging.

 TTL (Time to Live) –If you choose Ping Detect as
detection mode, you have to type TTL value.
RIPng Protocol RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same functions and
benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on PPP mode.
Info At present, the IPv6 prefix can be acquired via the PPPoE mode connection which is
available for the areas such as Taiwan (hinet), the Netherlands, Australia and UK.
II-2-2-5 Details Page for IPv6 – TSPC in Etherenet WAN

Tunnel setup protocol client (TSPC) is an application which could help you to connect to IPv6
network easily.
Please make sure your IPv4 WAN connection is OK and apply one free account from hexago
(http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account ) before you try to use TSPC for network
connection. TSPC would connect to tunnel broker and requests a tunnel according to the
specifications inside the configuration file. It gets a public IPv6 IP address and an IPv6 prefix
from the tunnel broker and then monitors the state of the tunnel in background.
After getting the IPv6 prefix and starting router advertisement daemon (RADVD), the PC
behind this router can directly connect to IPv6 the Internet.

Item Description
Username Type the name obtained from the broker. It is suggested for
you to apply another username and password for
http://gogonet.gogo6.com/page/freenet6-account.
The maximum length of the name you can set is 63
characters.
Password Type the password assigned with the user name.
characters.
Tunnel Broker Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
for pinging.

II-2-2-6 Details Page for IPv6 – AICCU in Ethernet WAN
Item Description
Always On Check this box to keep the network connection always.
Username Type the name obtained from the broker. Please apply new
account at http://www.sixxs.net/. It is suggested for you to
apply another username and password.
characters.
Password Type the password assigned with the user name.
characters.
Tunnel Broker It means a server of AICCU. The server can provide IPv6
tunnels to sites or end users over IPv4.
Type the address for the tunnel broker IP, FQDN or an
optional port number.
Tunnel ID One user account may have several tunnels. And, each
tunnel shall have one specified tunnel ID (e.g., T115394).
Type the ID offered by Tunnel Broker.
Subnet Prefix Type the subnet prefix address obtained from service
provider.
The maximum length of the prefix you can set is 128
characters.

execute for WAN detection.
for pinging.

II-2-2-7 Details Page for IPv6 – DHCPv6 Client in Ethernet WAN
DHCPv6 client mode would use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Item Description
IAID Type a number as IAID.
Detection connection is alive or not through NS Detect or Ping Detect.
Mode – Choose Always On, Ping Detect or NS Detect for the
system to execute for WAN detection. With NS Detect mode,
the system will check if network connection is established or
not, like IPv4 ARP Detect. Always On means no detection
for pinging.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.

II-2-2-8 Details Page for IPv6 – Static IPv6 in Ethernet WAN

This type allows you to setup static IPv6 address for WAN interface.
Item Description
Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address – Type the IPv6 Static IP Address.
configuration Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Update - Click it to modify an existed entry.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Current IPv6 Address Display current interface IPv6 address.
Table
Static IPv6 Gateway IPv6 Gateway Address - Type your IPv6 gateway address
Configuration here.
Mode – Choose Always On, NS Detect or Ping Detect for the

system to execute for WAN detection. Always On means no
detection will be executed. The network connection will be
on always.
for pinging.
Enable Firewall – It is available when Bridge Mode is
enabled. When both Bridge Mode and Firewall check boxes
are enabled, the settings configured (user profiles) under
User Management will be ignored. And all of the filter rules
defined and enabled in Firewall menu will be activated.
II-2-2-9 Details Page for IPv6 – 6in4 Static Tunnel in Ethernet WAN
This type allows you to setup 6in4 Static Tunnel for WAN interface.
Such mode allows the router to access IPv6 network through IPv4 network.
However, 6in4 offers a prefix outside of 2002::0/16. So, you can use a fixed endpoint rather
than anycast endpoint. The mode has more reliability.
Item Description

Remote Endpoint IPv4 Type the static IPv4 address for the remote server.
Address
6in4 IPv6 Address Type the static IPv6 address for IPv4 tunnel with the value
for prefix length.
LAN Routed Prefix Type the static IPv6 address for LAN routing with the value
for prefix length.
Tunnel TTL Type the number for the data lifetime in tunnel.
for pinging.

Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6in4 Static Tunnel mode.

II-2-2-10 Details Page for IPv6 – 6rd in Ethernet WAN
This type allows you to setup 6rd for WAN interface.
Item Description
6rd Mode Auto 6rd – Retrieve 6rd prefix automatically from 6rd service
provider. The IPv4 WAN must be set as "DHCP".
Static 6rd - Set 6rd options manually.
IPv4 Border Relay Type the IPv4 addresses of the 6rd Border Relay for a given
6rd domain.
IPv4 Mask Length Type a number of high-order bits that are identical across all
CE IPv4 addresses within a given 6rd domain.
It may be any value between 0 and 32.
6rd Prefix Type the 6rd IPv6 address.
6rd Prefix Length Type the IPv6 prefix length for the 6rd IPv6 prefix in number
of bits.
for pinging.

Below shows an example for successful IPv6 connection based on 6rd mode.

II-2-3 Multi-VLAN
This router allows you to create multi-PVC for different data transferring for using. Simply go
to WAN and select Multi-VLAN page.
Channel 1 to 8 have the following fixed assignments and cannot be altered.
Channels 13 through 52 can be configured as virtual WANs.
General
The system allows you to set up to eight channels used as multi-VLAN.
Item Description
Channel Display the number of each channel.
Channels 1~8 are used by the Internet Access web user
interface and can not be configured here.
Channels 13 ~ 52 are configurable.
Enable Display whether the settings in this channel are enabled
(checked) or not (unchecked).
WAN Type Displays the physical medium that the channel will use.
VLAN Tag Displays the VLAN tag value that will be used for the packets
traveling on this channel.

Click any index (13~52) to get the following web page:
Item Description
Enable Channel 13~52 Enable – Click it to enable the configuration of this channel.
Disable –Click it to disable the configuration of this channel.
WAN Type The connections and interfaces created in every channel may
select a specific WAN type to be built upon. In the
Multi-VLAN application, only the Ethernet WAN type is
available. The user will be able to select the physical WAN
interface the channel shall use here.
General Settings VLAN Tag – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. Valid
settings are in the range from 1 to 4095. The network traffic
flowing on each channel will be identified by the system via
their VLAN Tags. Channels using the same WAN type may not
configure the same VLAN tag value.
Priority – Choose the number to determine the packet
priority for such VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7.
Open WAN Interface for Check the box to enable relating function.
this Channel WAN Application –
 Management – It can be specified for general
management (Web configuration/telnet/TR-069). If
you choose Management, the configuration for this

VLAN will be effective for Web
configuration/telnet/TR-069.
 IPTV - The IPTV configuration will allow the WAN
interface to send IGMP packets to IPTV servers.
WAN Setup - Choose PPPoE/PPPoA or Static or Dynamic IP
as the protocol.
Load Balance - Check the box to enable the load balance
function for the selected channel.
ISP Access Setup If PPPoE/PPPoA is selected, you have to configure the
settings listed under ISP Access Setup. Enter your allocated
username, password and authentication parameters
according to the information provided by your ISP.
 ISP Name – Type in the name of your ISP.
 Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in
this field. The maximum length of the name you can set
is 80 characters.
 Password – Type in the password provided by ISP in this
field. The maximum length of the password you can set
is 48 characters.
 PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP
for PPP.
 Always On – Check it to keep the network
connection always.
 Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down
the Internet after passing through the time without
any action.
ISP Address from ISP - Specifies how the WAN IP address of
the channel configured.
 Fixed IP
 Yes - IP address entered in the Fixed IP Address
field will be used as the IP address of the virtual
WAN.
 No - Virtual WAN IP address will be assigned by the
ISP’s PPPoE/PPPoA server.
WAN IP Network Settings If Static or Dynamic IP is selected, you have to configure the
settings listed under WAN IP Network Settings.
 Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button
to obtain the IP address automatically.
 Router Name – Type in the router name provided by
ISP.
 Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you
have assigned.
 Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to
specify some data.
 IP Address – Type in the private IP address.
 Subnet Mask – Type in the subnet mask.
 Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.
 DNS Server IP Address - Type in the primary IP address
for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP
address for necessity in the future.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save the settings and return to previous page.

II-3 LAN
Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of
network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.
The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As
mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public
IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to
translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets
to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns
private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.
In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24.
This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is
equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve
for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or
servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.

What is Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to
accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP
address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.
What is Static Route

When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for
connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules
to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence
of RIP.
What are Virtual LANs and Rate Control

You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 8 virtual LANs. To manage the
communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function
and the rate of each.

Web User Interface
II-3-1 General Setup

This page provides you the general settings for LAN. Click LAN to open the LAN settings page
and choose General Setup.
There are several subnets provided by the router which allow users to divide groups into
different subnets (LAN1 – LAN50). In addition, different subnets can link for each other by
configuring Inter-LAN Routing. At present, LAN1 setting is fixed with NAT mode only. LAN2 –
LAN50 can be operated under NAT or Route mode. IP Routed Subnet can be operated under
Route mode.
Item Description
General Setup Allow to configure settings for each subnet respectively.
Index - Display all of the LAN items.
Enable - Basically, LAN1 status is enabled in default.
LAN2 –LAN50 and IP Routed Subnet can be configured after
enabling via LAN>>VLAN.
DHCP- LAN1 is configured with DHCP in default. If required,
please check the DHCP box for each LAN.
IP Address - Display the IP address for each LAN item. Such
information is set in default and you can not modify it.
Details Page - Click it to access into the setting page. Each

LAN will have different LAN configuration page. Each LAN
must be configured in different subnet.
IPv6 – Click it to access into the settings page of IPv6.
DHCP Server Options DHCP packets can be processed by adding option number and
data information when such function is enabled.
For detailed information, refer to later section.
Force router to use “DNS Force Vigor router to use DNS servers configured in LAN port
Server IP address”… instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server
(PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server).
Inter-LAN Routing Check the box to link two or more different subnets (LAN and
LAN).
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be
interconnected or isolated.
It is only available when the VLAN functionality is enabled.
Refer to section II-3-2 VLAN on how to set up VLANs.
In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix, a selected checkbox means
that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each
other.
When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
Info To configure a subnet, select its Detials Page button to bring up the LAN
Details Page.
II-3-1-1 Details Page for LAN1 – Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup
There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4)
and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for
detailed information.
Item Description
Network Configuration For NAT Usage,

IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
LAN IP Alias –Such feature allows specifying multiple
gateways (under a switch) with different WAN interfaces for
accessing the Internet via the Vigor router.
RIP Protocol Control,

Enable –When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
Configuration router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatches related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every
host in the LAN.
Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host
in the LAN.
 Start IP Address - The beginning LAN IP address that is
given out to LAN DHCP clients.
 IP Pool Counts - The maximum number of IP addresses
to be handed out by DHCP. The default value is 200.
Valid range is between 1 and 1021. The actual number
of IP addresses available for assignment is the IP Pool
Counts, or 1021 minus the last octet of the Start IP
Address, whichever is smaller.
 Gateway IP Address - The IP address of the gateway,

which is the host on the LAN that relays all traffic
coming into and going out of the LAN. The gateway is
normally the router, and therefore the Gateway IP
Address should be identical to the IP Address in the
Network Configuration section above.
 Lease Time - The maximum duration DHCP-issued IP
addresses can be used before they have to be renewed.
 Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients periodically - If
selected, the router sends ARP requests recycles IP
addresses previously assigned to inactive DHCP clients
to prevent exhaustion of the IP address pool.
Note: When Clear DHCP lease for inactive clients
periodically is enabled, router will do the following:
 Check activities of DHCP clients by ARP requests
every minute when the available DHCP IP
addresses are less than 30
 Clear DHCP lease when the client is not
responding ARP replies.
Enable Relay Agent – When selected, all DHCP requests are
forwarded to a DHCP server outside of the LAN subnet, and
whose address is specified in the DHCP Server IP Address
field.
 DHCP Server IP Address – It is available when Enable
Relay Agent is checked. Set the IP address of the DHCP
server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help
to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.
DNS Server IP Address DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host
must have a unique IP address, also they may have a
human-friendly, easy to remember name such as
www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly
name into its equivalent IP address.
Primary IP Address -You must specify a DNS server IP address
here because your ISP should provide you with usually more
than one DNS Server.
Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server
IP address here because your ISP often provides you more
than one DNS Server.
The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online
Status:
If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left

empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users
as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.
If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS
cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately.
Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the
external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable)
connection.
Private IP addresses can be assigned automatically to LAN clients using Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or manually assigned. The DHCP server can either be the

router (the most common case), or a separate server, that hands out IP addresses to DHCP
clients.
Alternatively, static IP addresses can be manually configured on LAN clients as part of their
network settings. No matter how IP addresses are configured, it is important that no two
devices get the same IP address. If both DHCP and static assignment are used on a network, it
is important to exclude the static IP addresses from the DHCP IP pool. For example, if your
LAN uses the 192.168.1.x subnet and you have 20 DHCP clients and 20 static IP clients, you
could configure 192.168.1.10 as the Start IP Address, 50 as the IP Pool Counts (enough for the
current number of DHCP clients, plus room for future expansion), and use addresses greater
than 192.168.1.100 for static assignment.
II-3-1-2 Details Page for LAN1 – IPv6 Setup

There are two configuration pages for LAN1, Ethernet TCP/IP and DHCP Setup (based on IPv4)
and IPv6 Setup. Click the tab for each type and refer to the following explanations for
detailed information. Below shows the settings page for IPv6.

It provides 2 daemons for LAN side IPv6 address configuration. One is SLAAC(stateless) and
the other is DHCPv6 Server (Stateful).

Item Description
Enable IPv6 Check the box to enable the configuration of LAN 1 IPv6
Setup.
WAN Primary Interface Use the drop down list to specify a WAN interface for IPv6.
Static IPv6 Address IPv6 Address –Type static IPv6 address for LAN.
Prefix Length – Type the fixed value for prefix length.
Add – Click it to add a new entry.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed entry.
Unique Local Address Unique Local Addresses (ULAs) are private IPv6 addresses
(ULA) configuration assigned to LAN clients.
Off - ULA is disabled.
Manually ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs
generated based on the prefix manually entered.
Auto ULA Prefix - LAN clients will be assigned ULAs using an
automatically-determined prefix.
DNS Server IPv6 Address Primary DNS Sever – Type the IPv6 address for Primary DNS
server.
Secondary DNS Server –Type another IPv6 address for DNS
server if required.
Management Configures the Managed Address Configuration flag (M-bit) in
Route Advertisements.
 Off - No configuration information is sent using Route
Advertisements.
 SLAAC(stateless) - M-bit is unset.
 DHCPv6(stateful) - M-bit is set, which indicates to LAN
clients that they should acquire all IPv6 configuration
information from a DHCPv6 server. The DHCPv6 server
can either be the one built into the Vigor2860, or a
separate DHCPv6 server.
Other Option(O-bit) When selected, the Other Configuration flag is set, which
indicates to LAN clients that IPv6 configuration information
besides LAN IPv6 addresses is available from a DHCPv6
server.
Setting the M-bit (see Management above) has the same
effect as implicitly setting the O-bit, as DHCPv6 supplies all
IPv6 configuration information, including what is indicated as
available when the O-bit is set.
DHCPv6 Server Enable Server –Click it to enable DHCPv6 server. DHCPv6

Configuration Server could assign IPv6 address to PC according to the
Start/End IPv6 address configuration.
Disable Server –Click it to disable DHCPv6 server.
IPv6 Address Random Allocation – After check the box,
Vigor router will assign the IPv6 randamly to the client.
Auto IPv6 range - After check the box, Vigor router will
assign the IPv6 range automatically and sequencely to the
client.
 Start IPv6 Address / End IPv6 Address –Type the start
and end address for IPv6 server.
 Advance setting – Click the Edit button to configure
advanced IPv6 settings for DHCPv6 server.
Advance setting The Advanced Settings page has additional settings for
Router Advertisement and enabling multiple WANs for IPv6
traffic.
Router Advertisement Server – Click Enable to enable

router advertisement server. The router advertisement
daemon sends Router Advertisement messages, specified by
RFC 2461, to a local Ethernet LAN periodically and when
requested by a node sending a Router Solicitation message.
These messages are required for IPv6 stateless
auto-configuration.

Disable – Click it to disable router advertisement server.
Hop Limt – The value is required for the device behind the
router when IPv6 is in use.
Min/Max Interval Time (sec) – It defines the interval
(between minimum time and maximum time) for sending RA
(Router Advertisement) packets.
Default Lifetime (sec) –Within such period of time, Vigor
router can be treated as the default gateway.
Default Preference – It determines the priority of the host
behind the router when RA (Router Advertisement) packets
are transmitted.
MTU – It means Max Transmit Unit for packet. If Auto is
selected, the router will determine the MTU value for LAN.
RIPng Protocol –RIPng (RIP next generation) offers the same
functions and benefits as IPv4 RIP v2.
Extension WAN – In addition to the default WAN used for
IPv6 traffic specified in the WAN Primary Interface in the LAN
IPv6 Setup page, additional WANs can be selected to carry
IPv6 traffic by enabling them in the Extension WAN section.
Available WAN – Additional WANs available but not currently
selected to carry IPv6 traffic.
Selected WAN – Additional WANs selected to carry IPv6
traffic.
After making changes on the Advance setting page, click the OK button to retain the changes
and return to the LAN IPv6 Setup page. Be sure to click OK on the LAN IPv6 Setup page or else
changes made on the Advance setting page will not be saved.

II-3-1-3 Details Page for IP Routed Subnet
Item Description
Network Configuration Enable/Disable - Click Enable to enable such configuration;
click Disable to disable such configuration.
For Routing Usage,
IP Address - This is the IP address of the router. (Default:
192.168.1.1).
Subnet Mask - The subnet mask, together with the IP Address
field, indicates the maximum number of clients allowed on
the subnet. (Default: 255.255.255.0/ 24).
RIP Protocol Control,
Enable – When Enabled, the router will attempt to exchange
routing information with neighbouring routers using the
Routing Information Protocol.
DHCP Server DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The
Configuration router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network
so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local
user configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended
that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do
not have a DHCP server for your network.
If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other
than the Vigor Router’s, you can let Relay Agent help you to
redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.
Start IP Address - Enter a value of the IP address pool for the
DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the
1st IP address of your router is 192.168.1.1, the starting IP
address must be 192.168.1.2 or greater, but smaller than
192.168.1.254.
IP Pool Counts - Enter the maximum number of PCs that you

want the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to. The default is
50 and the maximum is 253.
Lease Time - Enter the time to determine how long the IP
address assigned by DHCP server can be used.
Use LAN Port – Specify an IP for IP Route Subnet. If it is
enabled, DHCP server will assign IP address automatically for
the clients coming from P1. Please check the box of P1.
Use MAC Address - Check such box to specify MAC address.
MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by one
and click Add to create a list of hosts which can be assigned,
deleted or edited from above pool. Set a list of MAC Address
for 2nd DHCP server will help router to assign the correct IP
address of the correct subnet to the correct host. So those
hosts in 2nd subnet won’t get an IP address belonging to 1st
subnet.
Add – Type the MAC address in the boxes and click this button
to add.
Delete – Click it to delete the selected MAC address.
Edit – Click it to edit the selected MAC address.
Cancel – Click it to cancel the job of adding, deleting and
editing.
II-3-1-4 DHCP Server Option

DHCP Options can be configured by clicking the Advanced button on the LAN General Setup
screen.
Item Description
Customized List Shows all the DHCP options that have been configured in the

system.
Enable If selected, DHCP option entry is enabled.
If unselected, DHCP option entry is disabled.
Interface LAN interface(s) to which this entry is applicable.
Next Server IP Overrides the DHCP Next Server IP address (DHCP Option 66)
Address/SIAddr supplied by the DHCP server.
Option Number DHCP option number (e.g., 100).
DataType Type of data in the Data field:
ASCII Character - A text string. Example: /path.
Hexadecimal Digit - A hexadecimal string. Valid characters
are from 0 to 9 and from a to f. Example: 2f70617468.
Address List - One or more IPv4 addresses, delimited by
commas.
Data Data of this DHCP option.
Add To add a DHCP option entry modeled after an existing entry,
click the model entry in Customized List. The data entry
fields will be populated with values from the model entry.
After making all necessary changes for the new entry, click
Add to create it.
Update To modify an existing DHCP option entry, click on it in
Customized List. The data entry fields will be populated
with the current values from the entry. After making all
necessary changes, click Update to save the changes.
Delete To delete a DHCP option entry, click on it in Customized
List, and then click Delete.
Reset Clear the current settings.

II-3-2 VLAN
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) allow you to subdivide your LAN to facilitate
management or to improve network security.
Select LAN>>VLAN from the menu bar of the Web UI to bring up the VLAN Configuration page.
Tagged VLAN
The tagged VLANs (802.1q) can mark data with a VLAN identifier. This identifier can be
carried through an onward Ethernet switch to specific ports. The specific VLAN clients can
also pick up this identifier as it is just passed to the LAN. You can set the priorities for
LAN-side QoS. You can assign each of VLANs to each of the different IP subnets that the router
may also be operating, to provide even more isolation. The said functionality is tag-based
multi-subnet.
Info Settings in this page only applied to LAN port but not WAN port.
Item Description
Enable Click it to enable VLAN configuration.
LAN Port Check the boxes to group them under the selected VLAN.

Subnet Choose one of them to make the selected VLAN mapping to
the specified subnet only. For example, LAN1 is specified for
VLAN0. It means that PCs grouped under VLAN0 can get the
IP address(es) that specified by the subnet.
VLAN Tag Enable – Check the box to enable the function of VLAN with
tag.
The router will add specific VLAN number to all packets on
the LAN while sending them out.
Please type the tag value and specify the priority for the
packets sending by LAN.
VID – Type the value as the VLAN ID number. The range is
form 0 to 4095. VIDs must be unique.
Priority – Valid values are from 0 to 7, where 1 has the
lowest priority, followed by 0, and finally from 2 to 7 in
increasing order of priority.
Permit untagged device in Select to allow untagged hosts connected to LAN port P12 to
P12 to access router access the router. In case you have incorrectly configured
VLAN functionality, you will still be able to access the router
via the Web UI, and telnet and SSH shells to adjust the
configuration.
The Vigor router supports up to 50 VLANs. Within the grid of VLANs (vertical columns) and LAN
interfaces (horizontal rows), all hosts within the same VLAN (horizontal row) are visible to
one another.
Inter-LAN Routing allows different LAN subnets to be interconnected or isolated. It is only
available when the VLAN functionality is enabled. In the Inter-LAN Routing matrix, a selected
checkbox means that the 2 intersecting LANs can communicate with each other.

II-3-3 Bind IP to MAC
This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in
network. With the Bind IP to MAC feature you can reserve LAN IP addresses for LAN clients.
Each reserved IP address is associated with a Media Access Control (MAC) address.
Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.
Item Description
Enable Click this radio button to invoke this function. However,
IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to
Internet.
Disable Click this radio button to disable this function. All the
settings on this page will be invalid.
Strict Bind Check the box to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is

not listed in IP Bind List.
LAN clients will be assigned IP addresses according to the
MAC-to-IP address associations on this page. LAN client
whose MAC address has not been bound to an IP address will
be denied network access.
Note: Before selecting Strict Bind, make sure at least one
valid MAC address has been bound to an IP address.
Otherwise no LAN clients will have network access, and it
will not be possible to connect to the router to make changes
to its configuration.
Apply Strict Bind to Subnet – Choose the subnet(s) for
applying the rules of Bind IP to MAC.
ARP Table This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The
information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field.
Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be
selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.
Select All Select all entries in the ARP Table for manipulation.
Sort Reorder the entry based on the IP address.
Refresh Refresh the ARP table listed below to obtain the newest ARP
table information.
Add / Update to IP Bind IP Address – Type the IP address to be associated with a
List MAC address.
Mac Address – Type the MAC address of the LAN client’s
network interface.
Comment – Type a brief description for the entry.
Add It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP table or
the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the table of IP
Bind List.
Update It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP address and
MAC address that you create before.
Delete You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List. Simply click
and select the one, and click Delete. The selected item will
be removed from the IP Bind List.
IP Bind List It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.
Backup IP Bind List Click Backup and enter a filename to back up IP Bind List to a
file.

Upload From File Click Browse… to select an IP Bind List backup file. Click
Restore to restore the backup and overwrite the existing
list.
Info Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for
one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web user
interface of the router might not be accessed.
When you finish the configuration, click OK to save the settings.
II-3-4 PPPoE Server

LAN users can access into Internet through built-in PPPoE server on Vigor router. PPPoE server
is a mechanism which can authenticate LAN users (configured in User Management>>User
Profile) and prevent ARP attack completely.

Item Description
PPPoE Server Enable – Activate the built-in PPPoE Server.
Disable – Disable the built-in PPPoE Server.
Primary DNS / Secondary Type the IP address(es) of Primary /Secondary DNS server for
DNS PPPoE Client(s) in LAN.

II-4 NAT
Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a
mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one.
Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP
addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.
When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT
router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router,
select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an
entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server
response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router’s public IP address and the
router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate
with external host smoothly.
The benefit of the NAT includes:
 Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT
allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address,
thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.
 Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are
many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be
aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.
Info On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918.
Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before,
the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into
different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be
achieved by using port mapping methods.

Web User Interface
II-4-1 Port Redirection

Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN),
such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP
address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users.
Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the
router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is
to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping
private IP address/port of the server.
The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.

To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port
Redirection Table provides 520 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.

Each item is explained as follows:
Item Description
Index Display the number of the profile.
Enable Check the box to enable the port redirection profile.
Service Name Display the description of the specific network service.
WAN Interface Display the WAN IP address used by the profile.
Protocol Display the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Public Port Display the port number which will be redirected to the
specified Private IP and Port of the internal host.
Source IP Display the IP object of the source IP.
Private IP Display the IP address of the internal host providing the
service.
Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.

Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.
Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to
choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range.
In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port)
and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the
system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP
automatically.
Service Name Enter the description of the specific network service.
Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
WAN Interface Select the WAN IP used for port redirection. There are eight
WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port
redirection. The default setting is All which means all the
incoming data from any port will be redirected to specified
range of IP address and port.
Public Port Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private
IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the
port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field.
Type the required number on the first box (as the starting
port) and the second box (as the ending port).
Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Private IP Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing
the service. If you choose Range as the port redirection
mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete
IP address in the first box (as the starting point). The second
one will be assigned automatically later.
Private Port Specify the private port number of the service offered by the
internal host.
After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.
Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc.
Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to
reset the router in order to avoid confliction.

For example, the built-in web user interface in the router is with default port 80, which may
conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you
need to change the router’s http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid
conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You
then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g.,
http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.

II-4-2 DMZ Host
As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on
particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP
protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor
router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single
host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will
continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user
to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as
Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.
The security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest
you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.
Click DMZ Host to open the following page. You can set different DMZ host for each WAN
interface. Click the WAN tab to switch into the configuration page for that WAN.

Item Description
Choose Private IP or None first.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
PC to select one.
Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private
IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one
private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above dialog,
the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK to save
the setting.
DMZ Host for other WAN interface is slightly different with WAN1. Active True IP selection is
available for WAN1 only.
See the following figure.
If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE or Static or Dynamic IP mode in WAN2
interface, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.

Item Description
Enable Check to enable the DMZ Host function.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose
PC to select one.
Choose IP Click this button and then a window will automatically pop
up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of
private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select
one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.
When you have selected one private IP from the above

dialog, the IP address will be shown on the screen. Click OK
to save the setting.

II-4-3 Open Ports
Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications.
Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella,
WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application
involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.
Click Open Ports to open the following page:
Item Description
Index Indicate the relative number for the particular entry that you
want to offer service in a local host. You should click the
appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding
entry.
Enable Check the box to enable the open port profile.
Comment Specify the name for the defined network service.
WAN Interface Display the WAN interface used by such index.
Aux. WAN IP Display the IP alias setting used by such index. If no IP alias
setting exists, such field will not appear.

Source IP Display the source IP address.
Local IP Address Display the private IP address of the local host offering the
service.
To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page
will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.
Item Description
Enable Open Ports Check to enable this entry.
Comment Make a name for the defined network application/service.
WAN Interface Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry.
WAN IP Specify the WAN IP address that will be used for this entry.
This setting is available when WAN IP Alias is configured.
Source IP Use the drop down list to specify an IP object. Or click IP
Object link to create a new one for applying.
Private IP Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose
PC to select one.
Choose IP - Click this button and, subsequently, a window
having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will
automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of
the local host in the list.
Protocol Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP,
or ----- (none) for selection.
Start Port Specify the starting port number of the service offered by
the local host.
End Port Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the
local host.

II-4-4 Port Triggering

Port Triggering is a variation of open ports function.
The key difference between "open port" and "port triggering" is:
 Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "open port" keeps
the ports opened forever.
 Once the OK button is clicked and the configuration has taken effect, "port triggering"
will only attempt to open the ports once the triggering conditions are met.
 The duration that these ports are opened depends on the type of protocol used. The
"default" durations are shown below and these duration values can be modified via
telnet commands.
TCP: 86400 sec.
UDP: 180 sec.
IGMP: 10 sec.
TCP WWW: 60 sec.
TCP SYN: 60 sec.

Item Description
Index Indicate the relative number for the port triggering profile.
You should click the appropriate index number to edit or
clear the corresponding entry.
Enable Check the box to enable the Port Triggering profile.
Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this
rule.
Triggering Protocol Display the protocol of the triggering packets.
Source IP Display the source IP address.
Triggering Port Display the port of the triggering packets.
Incoming Protocol Display the protocol for the incoming data of such triggering
profile.
Incoming Port Display the port for the incoming data of such triggering
profile.
Click the index number link to open the configuration page.

Item Description
Enable Check to enable this entry.
Service Choose the predefined service to apply for such trigger
profile.
Comment Type the text to memorize the application of this rule.
Source IP Select any IP address, IP object or IP group as the source IP.
Triggering Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such
triggering profile.
Triggering Port Type the port or port range for such triggering profile.
Incoming Protocol When the triggering packets received, it is expected the
incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the
protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of
such triggering profile.
Incoming Port Type the port or port range for the incoming packets.

II-4-5 ALG
ALG means Application Layer Gateway. There are two methods provided by Vigor router,
RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) ALG and SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) ALG, for
processing the packets of voice and video.
RTSP ALG makes RTSP message, RTCP message, and RTP packets of voice and video be
transmitted and received correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
However, SIP ALG makes SIP message and RTP packets of voice be transmitted and received
correctly via NAT by Vigor router.
Item Description
Enable ALG Check to enable such function.
Listen Port Type a port number for SIP or RTSP protocol.
TCP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from TCP transmit and receive via NAT.
UDP Check the box to make correspond protocol message packet
from UDP transmit and receive via NAT.

II-5 Applications
Dynamic DNS
The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via
your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you
access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic
WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the
specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered
domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is
particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.
Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS
service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service
providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most
popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com,
www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to
register your own domain name for the router.
LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding

The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the
network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can
specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is
adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor3910 Series will
respond the specified private IP address.
Schedule
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
RADIUS/TACACS+
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is
widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating
and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.
The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a
wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables
centralized remote access authentication for network management.
LDAP /Active Directory Setup

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP
network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on
directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is
established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without
the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire
and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory
securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or
manage the active directory.

UPnP
The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected
devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly
connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers,
the major feature of UPnP on the router is “NAT Traversal”. This enables applications inside
the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router.
Wake on LAN
A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up
a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC
on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.
In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,
WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.

Web User Interface
II-5-1 Dynamic DNS
Enable the Function and Add a Dynamic DNS Account

1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say
hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.
2. In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.
Item Description
Set to Factory Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Default
Enable Dynamic DNS Check this box to enable DDNS function.
Setup
View Log Display DDNS log status.
Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.

Auto-Update Set the time for the router to perform auto update for DDNS
interval service.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page
of DDNS setup to set account(s).
Enable Check the box to enable such account.
WAN Interface Display the WAN interface used.
Domain Name Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of
DDNS setup.
3. Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS
Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, type the registered
hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block.
The following two blocks should be typed your account Login Name: test and Password:
test.
If User-Defined is specified as the service provider, the web page will be changed
slightly as follows:

Item Description
Enable Dynamic DNS Check this box to enable the current account. If you did
Account check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the
Active column of the previous web page in step 2).
WAN Interface WANx First - While connecting, the router will use WANx as
the first channel for such account. If WANx fails, the router
will use another WAN interface instead.
WANx Only - While connecting, the router will use WANx as
the only channel for such account.
Service Provider Select the service provider for the DDNS account.
Service Type Select a service type (Dynamic, Custom or Static). If you
choose Custom, you can modify the domain that is chosen in
the Domain Name field.
Domain Name Type in one domain name that you applied previously. Use
the drop down list to choose the desired domain.
Login Name Type in the login name that you set for applying domain.
Password Type in the password that you set for applying domain.
Wildcard and The Wildcard and Backup MX (Mail Exchange) features are
Backup MX not supported for all Dynamic DNS providers. You could get
more detailed information from their websites.
Mail Extender If the mail server is defined with another name, please type
the name in this area. Such mail server will be used as
backup mail exchange.
Determine WAN IP If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can
enable such function to locate the real WAN IP.
When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this
function can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and
use the detected IP address for DDNS update.

There are two methods offered for you to choose:
 WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router
is private, DDNS update will take place right away.
 Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor
router is private, it will be converted to public IP
before DDNS update takes place.
4. Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.
DrayDDNS Settings
DrayDDNS, a new DDNS service developed by DrayTek, can record multiple WAN IP (IPv4) on
single domain name. It is convenient for users to use and easily to set up. Each Vigor Router is
available to register one domain name.
Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider, the web page will be displayed as follows:
Item Description
Enable Dynamic DNS Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the
Account box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of
the previous web page in step 2).
Service Provider Choose DrayTek Global as the service provider.
Status Display if the license is actvtaed or not.
Determine WAN IP If a Vigor router is installed behind any NAT router, you can enable
such function to locate the real WAN IP.
When the WAN IP used by Vigor router is private IP, this function
can detect the public IP used by the NAT router and use the
detected IP address for DDNS update.
There are two methods offered for you to choose:
 WAN IP - If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is
private, DDNS update will take place right away.
 Internet IP – If it is selected and the WAN IP of Vigor router is
private, it will be converted to public IP before DDNS update
takes place.
WAN Interfaces WANx - While connecting, the router will use WANx as the channel
for such account.

Let’s Encrypt Auto Update – Check the box to make the system update the
certificate certificate automatically.
Disable the Function and Clear all Dynamic DNS Accounts

In the DDNS setup menu, uncheck Enable Dynamic DNS Setup, and push Clear All button to
disable the function and clear all accounts from the router.
Delete a Dynamic DNS Account

In the DDNS setup menu, click the Index number you want to delete and then push Clear All
button to delete the account.

II-5-2 LAN DNS / DNS Forwarding
The LAN DNS lets the network administrators host servers with privacy and security. When the
network administrators of your office set up FTP, Mail or Web server inside LAN, you can
specify specific private IP address (es) to correspondent servers. Thus, even the remote PC is
adopting public DNS as the DNS server, the LAN DNS resolution on Vigor3910 Series will
respond the specified private IP address.
Simply click Application>>LAN DNS/DNS Forwarding to open the following page.
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting
page.

Enable Check the box to enable the selected profile.
Profile Display the name of the LAN DNS profile.
Domain Name Display the domain name of the LAN DNS profile.
Forwarding Display that such profile is conditional DNS forwarding or
not.
DNS Server Display the IP addres of the DNS Server.
You can set up to 120 LAN DNS profiles.

To create a LAN DNS profile:
1. Click any index, say Index No. 1.
2. The detailed settings with index 1 are shown below.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable such profile.
Profile Type a name for such profile.
Note: If you type a name here for LAN DNS and click OK to
save the configuration, the name also will be applied to
conditional DNS forwarding automatically.
Domain Name Type the domain name for such profile.
CNAME (Alias Domain CNAME is abbreviation of Canonical name record.
Name) Such option is used to record the domain name or the host
alias.
Add – Click it to add a new host with specified reference.
Delete – Click it to remove the setting.
IP Address List The IP address listed here will be used for mapping with the
domain name specified above. In general, one domain name

maps with one IP address. If required, you can configure two
IP addresses mapping with the same domain name.
Add – Click it to open a dialog to type the host’s IP address.
 Only responds to the DNS…. – Different LAN PCs can

share the same domain name. However, you have to
check this box to make the router identify & respond
the IP address for the DNS query coming from different
LAN PC.
Delete – Click it to remove an existed IP address on the list.
3. Click OK button to save the settings.

4. If you need to configure LAN DNS settings, click index 1 to edit the LAN DNS profile just
created. Or, you can click index 2 to use this profile as conditional DNS forwarding.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable such profile.
Profile Type a name for such profile.
Note: If you type a name here for conditional DNS forwarding
and click OK to save the configuration, the name also will be
applied to LAN DNS automatically.
Domain Name Type the domain name for such profile.
DNS Server IP Address Type the IP address of the DNS server you want to use for DNS
forwarding.
6. A new LAN DNS profile has been created.

II-5-3 DNS Security
DNS security is able to ensure that the incoming data is not falsified and the source of the
data is secure and correct to prevent from DNS attack by someone.
II-5-3-1 General Setup

All of WAN interfaces of Vigor router can be configured with DNS Security enabled
respectively.
Item Description
Interface There are four WAN interfaces allowed to be set with DNS
security enabled.
Enable Check the box to enable the DNS security management.
Primary DNS Display the IP address of primary DNS obtained from DHCP
server or specified by Static WAN.
Secondary DNS Display the IP address of secondary DNS obtained from DHCP
server or specified by Static WAN.
Bogus DNS Reply Sometime, Vigor router might encounter packets from bogus
DNS inquiry. There are two ways to reply such DNS inquiry.
Drop – Discard the packets.
Pass – Accept the packets and let them pass through Vigor
router.

II-5-3-2 Domain Diagnose
This page is used to configure settings for manually detecting if the domain is secure not.
Item Description
Domain Type the domain name or IP address (IPv4/IPv6) that you
want to query.
Interface Specify the interface required for executing diagnose.
DNS Server Type the IP address of the DNS Server which will diagnose the
domain specified above.
Diagnose Click it to perform the diagnosis for the domain.
Result The diagnosed information will be displayed on such field.

II-5-4 Schedule
The Vigor router has a built-in clock which can update itself manually or automatically by
means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to
dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so
that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The
schedule is also applicable to other functions.
You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date
menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router’s clock to current time of your PC.
The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set
up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the
router’s clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.
Item Description
Current System Time Display the time Vigor router used.
System time set Click it to acess into the time setup page (System
Maintenance>>Time and Date).
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.
Index Click the index number link to access into the setting page of
schedule.
Enable Click the box to enable such schedule profile.

Comment Display the name of the time schedule.
Time Display the valid time period by time bar.
Frequency Display which day(s) will be always on and which day(s) will
be always off of the schedule profile by color boxes.
- If it lights in green, it means such schedule is active.
You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and
Remote Access >> LAN-to-LAN settings.
To add a schedule:
1. Click any index, say Index No. 1.
2. The detailed settings of the call schedule with index 1 are shown below.
Item Description
Enable Schedule Check to enable the schedule.
Setup
Comment Type a short description for such schedule.
Start Date Specify the starting date of the schedule.
(yyyy-mm-dd)
Start Time (hh:mm) Specify the starting time of the schedule.
Duration Time Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
(hh:mm)
End Time (hh:mm) It will be calculated automatically when Start Time and
Duration Time are configured well.
Action Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the
period of the schedule.
Force On -Force the connection to be always on.
Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.

How Often Specify how often the schedule will be applied.
 Once -The schedule will be applied just once
 Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should
perform the schedule.
 Monthly, on date – The router will only execute the
action applied such schedule on the date (1 to 28) of a
month.
 Cycle duration – Type a number as cycle duration.
Then, any action applied such schedule will be
executed per several days. For example, “3” is selected
as cycle duration. That means, the action applied such
schedule will be executed every three days since the
date defined on the Start Date.
Example
Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On)
from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be
disconnected (Force Down).
Office
Hour:
(Force On)
Mon - Sun 9:00 am to 6:00 pm
1. Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.
2. Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.
3. Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.
4. Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet
connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action
according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.

II-5-5 RADIUS/TACACS+
Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication
client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization, and accounting, which is
widely used in enterprise networks. It is the most common authentication method to manage
the clients' access to the wireless network, the Internet and the VPN.
The router supports external TACACS+ and internal and external RADIUS servers for user
authentication. To configure TACACS+ or RADIUS servers, from the Main Menu select
Applications >> RADIUS/TACACS+.
II-5-5-1 External RADIUS

Vigor Router supports the RADIUS client function. The built-in RADIUS client feature allows
the router to authenticate the remote dial-in VPN users, the wireless connections through
802.1X and the access to the Internet.
When it operates as the RADIUS client, Vigor Router needs to work with an External Radius
server, and the External RADIUS Server setting should be configured here.
Item Description
RADIUS Server Status Log Display the record of current status of RADIUS server.
Enable Select to enable the profile.
Comment Displays the comment of the profile.
Primary Server Displays the IP address of the primary server.
Secondary Server Display the IP address of the secondary server.
Click any index number to open the following page. It is used to configure settings for
external RADIUS server. Then users of the Vigor router will be authenticated by this server for
the network application.

Item Description
Enable this profile Check to enable RADIUS client profile.
Comment - Enter a brief description for this profile.
Primary Server Primary Server - Enter the IP address of RADIUS server.
Authentication Port - The UDP port number that the RADIUS
server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.
Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is
used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both
sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The
maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36
characters.
Retry - Set the number of attempts to perform reconnection
with RADIUS server. If the connection (with the Primary
Server) still fails, stop the connection attempt and begin to
make connection with the secondary server.
Secondary Server Secondary Server - Enter the IP address of RADIUS server.
Authentication Port - The UDP port number that the RADIUS
server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.
Secret - The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is
used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both
sides must be configured to use the same shared secret. The
maximum length of the shared secret you can set is 36
characters.
Retry - Set the number of attempts to perform reconnection.
If the connection (with the Secondary Server) still fails, stop
the connection attempt. The client authentication would be
determined as "failed".
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.

II-5-5-2 Internal RADIUS
Except for being a built-in RADIUS client, Vigor router also can be operated as a RADIUS server
which performs security authentication by itself. This page is used to configure settings for
internal RADIUS server. Then users of Vigor router will be authenticated by Vigor router
directly.
Item Description
Enable Select to enable the router's internal RADIUS server.
Authentication Port The UDP port for authentication message.
RADIUS Client Access List Only clients that meet the criteria configured in the access
list are allowed to access the RADIUS server.
Index - The index number of the client entry.
Enable - Select to enable this client entry.
Shared Secret - A text string that is known to both the
router’s RADIUS server and the RADIUS client that is used to

authenticate messages sent between them. Maximum length
is 36 characters.
IP Address – Enter the base address of the IP block.
IP Mask – Enter the IP mask to configure the size of the IP
block.
IPv6 Address –Enter the base address of the IPv6 block.
IPv6 Length - Enter the prefix length of the IPv6 block.
Authentication Select the authentication protocol(s) to be used.
PAP Only – Only the Password Authentication Protocol will be
used to validate users.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 – PAP, CHAP
(Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol), and
Microsoft versions of CHAP can be used to validate users.
User Profile During the process of security authentication, user account
and user password will be required for identity
authentication. Before configuring such page, create at least
one user profile in User Management>>User Profile first.
Select All – Click to move all user profiles under the
Available List to the Authentication List.
Clear All- Click to remove all user profiles from the
Authentication List.
Available List – User profiles (created in User Management
>> User Profile) that have not been added to the
authentication list.
Authentication List – User profiles (created in User
Management >> User Profile) that have been added to the
authentication list. Users can log in using these profiles.
To add a User Profile to the RADIUS server, select it under Available List, then click the
button. To remove a User Profile from the RADIUS server, select it under Selected
Authentication List, then click the button.
To save changes on the page, click OK. To discard changes, click Cancel. To reset all settings
to blank, click Clear.

II-5-5-3 External TACACS+
It means Terminal Access Controller Access-Control System Plus (TACACS+). It is another
protocol for authentication and works as the RADIUS does. Click the External TACACS+ to
open the following page:
Item Description
Enable Select to enable the use of the external TACACS+ server.
Server IP Address Enter the IP address of TACACS+ server.
Destination Port The UDP port used by the TACACS+ server.
Shared Secret A text string that is known to both the TACACS+ server and
client (the router) is used to authenticate messages sent
between them. Maximum length is 36 characters.
Confirm Shared Secret Enter the Shared Secret for confirmation.
To save changes on the page, click OK. To discard changes, click Cancel. To reset all settings
to blank, click Clear.

II-5-6 Active Directory/ LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a communication protocol for using in TCP/IP
network. It defines the methods to access distributing directory server by clients, work on
directory and share the information in the directory by clients. The LDAP standard is
established by the work team of Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).
As the name described, LDAP is designed as an effect way to access directory service without
the complexity of other directory service protocols. For LDAP is defined to perform, inquire
and modify the information within the directory, and acquire the data in the directory
securely, therefore users can apply LDAP to search or list the directory object, inquire or
manage the active directory.
General Setup
This page allows you to enable the function and specify general settings for LDAP server.
Item Description
Enable Check to enable such function.
Bind Type There are three types of bind type supported.
 Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication
without any search action.
 Anonymous – Perform a search action first with
Anonymous account then do the bind authentication.
 Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous
mode. The different is that, the server will firstly check
if you have the search authority.
For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN
and Regular Password.
Server Address Enter the IP address of LDAP server.
Destination Port Type a port number as the destination port for LDAP server.
Use SSL Check the box to use the port number specified for SSL.
Regular DN Type this setting if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.

Regular Password Specify a password if Regular Mode is selected as Bind Type.
After finished the above settings, click OK button to save the settings.
Active Directory / LDAP Profiles

You can configure eight AD/LDAP profiles. These profiles would be used with User
Management for different purposes in management.
Click any index number link to open the following page.
Item Description
Name Type a name for such profile. The length of the user name is
limited to 19 characters.
Common Name Identifier Type or edit the common name identifier for the LDAP server.
The common name identifier for most LDAP server is “cn”.
Additional Filter Type the condition for additional filter.
Base Distinguished Name Type or edit the distinguished name used to look up entries on
/ Group Distinguished the LDAP server.
Name
Sometimes, you may forget the Distinguished Name since it’s
too long. Then you may click the button to list all the
account information on the AD/LDAP Server to assist you finish

the setup.
After finished the above settings, click OK to save and exit this page. A new profile has been
created.

II-5-7 IGMP
IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication
protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
groups.
II-5-7-1 General Setting
Item Description
IGMP Proxy Check this box to enable this function. The application of
multicast will be executed through WAN /PVC/VLAN port.
In addition, such function is available in NAT mode.
Interface – Specify an interface for packets passing
through.
IGMP version – At present, two versions (v2 and v3) are
supported by Vigor router. Choose the correct version
based on the IPTV service you subscribe.
General Query Interval – Vigor router will periodically
check which IP obtaining IPTV service by sending query. It
might cause inconvenience for client. Therefore, set a
suitable time (unit: second) as the query interval to limit
the frequency of query sent by Vigor router.
Add PPP header – Check this box if the interface type for
IGMP is PPPoE. It depends on the specifications regulated
by each ISP. If you have no idea to enable or disable, simply
contact your ISP providers.
Enable IGMP syslog - Check the box to store the IGMP
status ontot Syslog.

II-5-7-2 Working Group
Item Description
Refresh Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.
Group ID This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The
available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to
239.255.255.254.
P2 to P12 It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.

II-5-8 Wake on LAN
A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up
a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC
on this web page of Wake on LAN (WOL) of this router.
In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way,
WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.
Item Description
Wake by Two types provide for you to wake up the binded IP.
 MAC Address - If you choose Wake by MAC Address,
you have to enter the correct MAC address of the host
in MAC Address boxes.
 IP Address - It is available when LAN >>Bind IP to
MAC is enabled. If you choose Wake by IP Address,
select an IP address.
IP Address The IP addresses that have been configured in LAN>>Bind
IP to MAC will be shown in this drop down list. Choose the
IP address from the drop down list that you want to wake
up.
MAC Address Enter any one of the MAC address of the bound PCs.
Wake Up Click this button to wake up the selected IP. See the
following figure. The result will be shown on the box.

II-5-9 SMS / Mail Alert Service
The function of SMS (Short Message Service)/Mail Alert is that Vigor router sends a message to
user’s mobile or e-mail box through specified service provider to assist the user knowing the
real-time abnormal situations.
Vigor router allows you to set up to 10 SMS profiles which will be sent out according to
different conditions.
SMS Provider
This page allows you to specify SMS provider, who will get the SMS, what the content is and
when the SMS will be sent.
Item Description
Enable Check the box to enable such profile.
SMS Provider Use the drop down list to choose SMS service provider.
You can click SMS Provider link to define the SMS server.
Recipient Number Type the phone number of the one who will receive the
SMS.
Notify Profile Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The
recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.
You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content
of the SMS.
Schedule (1-15) Type the schedule number that the SMS will be sent out.
You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the
schedule.

Mail Server
This page allows you to specify Mail Server profile, who will get the notification e-mail, what
the content is and when the message will be sent.
Item Description
Mail Service Use the drop down list to choose mail service object. All of
the available objects are created in Object
Settings>>SMS/Mail Service Option. If there is no object
listed, click Mail Service link to define a new one with
specified service provider.
Mail Address Type the e-mail address of the one who will receive the
notification message.
Notify Profile Use the drop down list to choose a message profile. The
recipient will get the content stated in the message profile.
You can click the Notify Profile link to define the content
of the mail message.
Schedule (1-15) Type the schedule number that the notification will be sent
out.
You can click the Schedule(1-15) link to define the
schedule.

II-5-10 Bonjour
Bonjour is a service discovery protocol which is a built-in service in Mac OS X; for Windows or
Linux platform, there is correspondent software to enable this function for free.
Usually, users have to configure the router or personal computers to use above services.
Sometimes, the configuration (e.g., IP settings, port number) is complicated and not easy to
complete. The purpose of Bonjour is to decrease the settings configuration (e.g., IP setting).
If the host and user’s computer have the plug-in bonjour driver install, they can utilize the
service offered by the router by clicking the router name icon. In short, what the
Clients/users need to know is the name of the router only.
To enable the Bonjour service, click Application>>Bonjour to open the following page. Check
the box(es) of the server service(s) that you want to share to the LAN clients.
Below shows an example for applying the bonjour feature that Vigor router can be used as the
FTP server.
1. Here, we use Firefox and DNSSD to discover the service in such case. Therefore, just
ensure the Bonjour client program and DNSSD for Firefox have been installed on the
computer.

2. Open the web browse, Firefox. If Bonjour and DNSSD have been installed, you can open
the web page (DNSSD) and see the following results.
3. Open System Maintenance>>Management. Type a name (e.g., DrayTek) as the Router

Name and click OK.
4. Next, open Applications>>Bonjour. Check the service that you want to use via Bonjour.
5. Open the DNSSD page again. The available items will be changed as the follows. It means
the Vigor router (based on Bonjour protocol) is ready to be used as a printer server, FTP
server, SSH Server, Telnet Server, and HTTP Server.

6. Now, any page or document can be printed out through Vigor router (installed with a
printer).

II-5-11 High Availability
The High Availability (HA) feature of the router provides redundancy of network resources,
and reduces downtime in case of component failure. The level of sophistication of HA is
determined by availability requirements and tolerance of system interruptions. Systems that
provide near full-time availability typically have redundant hardware and software.
The HA of the Vigor3910 Series is designed to avoid single points-of-failure. When failures
occur, the failover process transfers the network load handled by the failed component (the
primary router) to the backup component (the secondary router), and the availability of
network resources are preserved and partially failed transactions are recovered. In a matter
of seconds the system returns to normal operation.
In order to set up High Availability, at least 2 DrayTek routers have to be configured in the
following manner:
 Enable High Availability on both the primary and secondary routers.
 Set a high priority ID on the primary router, and a lower priority ID on the secondary
router.
 Configure identical redundancy methods, group IDs, and authentication keys on both
routers.
 Set the management interface of both routers to the same subnet.
 Enable virtual IP on both routers for each subnet in use. Make sure the virtual IPs are
identical on both routers.

Open Applications>>High Availability to get the following page.

Item Description
Enable High Abailablity Check this box to enable HA function.
Redundancy Method Select the redundancy method for high availability.
Hot-Standby -
Such method is suitable when there is only one ISP account.
When this method is selected,
 During normal operation the secondary router will be
idling. When the primary router fails to operate
normally, the secondary router(s) will take over.
 WAN settings of the primary and secondary routers
are identical.
Note: When Hot-Standby is used, the wireless LAN
function on secondary router will be “disabled”
directlly. Clients can not connect to the secondary
router any more.
Active-Standby -
This method is suitable when there are multiple
simultaneously active ISP connections. When this method is
selected,
 All WANs on the secondary routers can be up at the
same time. LANs that are not configured under high
availability can be routed to secondary routers.
 WAN settings of primary and secondary routers are
independently configured.
 Config Sync may be enabled to synchronize most
configuration settings between the primary and
secondary routers.
 All routers must be set to the same redundancy
method.
Group ID Type a value (1~255).
In LAN environment, multiple routers can be devided into
several groups. Each router must be specified with one group
ID. Different routers with the same ID value will be
categoried into the same group.
Only one of the routers in the same group will be selected as
the primary router.
Priority ID Type a value (1~30).
Different routers must be configured with different IDs.
All routers within a group must be assigned a priority ID.
Within a group, the router with the largest priority ID (i.e.,
the highest priority) will be the primary router. When
multiple routers in a group are assigned the same priority ID,
routers with lower LAN IP addresses (configured on the LAN
>> General Setup page) have higher priority.
Authentication Key Enter an authentication key up to 31 characters long. This is
used to encrypt the DARP (DrayTek Address Redundancy
Protocol) traffic to guard against malicious attacks.
Protocol Select the IP protocol to be used for DARP.
Management Interface Select the interface to be used for DARP negotiation
between routers. Only interfaces which are enabled in
LAN>>General Setup are available for selection.

However, LAN1 is always enabled.
Update DDNS Enable – Check the box to update the DDNS server for the
secondary device when the primary router fails.
If the primary device fails, and the secondary device must
take over the job of data transmitting and receiving. Then
the system will update the DDNS server to make the user
connect to the specified domain name.
Syslog Enable – Check the box to record required information on
Syslog.
LAN1 ~ LAN50 Enable – Check the box to enable the interface.
Virtual IP - Display the default IP address for each LAN. If
rquired, modify the IP address for the LAN port device.
II-5-11-2 Config Sync

This page is used to specify the synchronization time for such Vigor router and only available
when Hot-Standby method is specified and High Availability is enabled.
Item Description
Enable Config Sync (Max. Check this box to enable configuration synchronization.
Sync to 10 routers) To sync configuration from primary to secondary router,
both primary and seconday routers need to enable “config
sync”. Note that config sync can be enabled by Hot-Standby
redundancy method only.
Config Sync Interval Day / Hour / Minute - Primary router will sync its
configuration to secondary router based on the time interval
set here.
Exclude the following Settings selected in this field will be excluded when
settings from config sync executing configuration synchronization. This setting is

available when the Redundancy Method is set to “Hot
Standby”.
When the configuration method is set to “Hot Standby”, the following settings will not be
synchronized:
 WAN (user selectable)
 LAN
 LAN IPv6
 router name
 admin and user passwords.
Example:
Take the following picture as an example. The upper Vigor3910 is regarded as primary device,
the lower Vigor3910 is regarded as secondary device. When primary Vigor3910 Series is
broken down, the secondary device could replace the primary role to take over all jobs as
soon as possible. However, once the primary device is working again, the secondary device
would be changed to original role to stand by.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Implement the LDAP/AD Authentication for User Management?

For simplifying the configuration of LDAP authentication for User Access Management, we
implement “Group” feature.
There is no need to pre-configure user profile for each user on Vigor router anymore. We only
need to configure the Groups DN, then the Vigor router (e.g., Vigor 2860 series) can pass the
authentication to LDAP server with the pre-defined Group path.
Below shows the configuration steps:
1. Access into the web user interface of the Vigor router.
2. Open Applications>>Active Directory /LDAP to get the following page for configuring
LDAP related settings.
There are three types of bind type supported:

 Simple Mode – Just simply do the bind authentication without any search action.
 Anonymous – Perform a search action first with Anonymous account then do the
bind authentication.
 Regular Mode– Mostly it is the same with anonymous mode. The different is that,
the server will firstly check if you have the search authority.
For the regular mode, you’ll need to type in the Regular DN and Regular Password.
3. Create LDAP server profiles. Click the Active Directory /LDAP tab to open the profile
web page and click any one of the index number link.
If we have two groups “RD1” and “SHRD” on LDAP server, we can configure two LDAP
server profiles with different Group Distinguished Name.

and
4. Click OK to save the settings above.

5. Open User Management>>General Setup. Select User-Based as the Mode option.

6. Then open VPN and Remote Access>>PPP General Setup to check the profile(s) that
will be authenticated with LDAP server.
After above configurations, users belong to either “rd1” or “shrd” group can access Internet
after inputting their credentials on LDAP server.
A-2 How to use DrayDDNS?
Vigor router supports various DDNS service providers, user can set up user-defined profile to
update the DDNS even the service provider is not on the list. Now, DrayTek starts to support
our own DDNS service - DrayDDNS. We will provide a domain name for each Vigor router, this
single domain name can record IP addresses of all WAN.
Set up DrayDDNS on DrayOS Router

1. Go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup. Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.
2. Go to Wizards >> Service Activation Wizard page, wait for the router to connect to
MyVigor server, then:
(a) Select DT-DDNS.
(b) Enter the desired Domain Name.

(c) Make sure you have read the License Agreement. Check I have read and accept
the above Agreement, then click Next.
3. Confirm the information, then click Activate.
4. MyVigor server will reply with the service activation information.

5. Vigor router will contact with MyVigor server, then get the DrayDDNS license as well as
the domain name back, and create the DDNS profile automatically. Please go to
Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup page to make sure the router has created the DDNS
profile.
Note that, if your router does not get the domain after you activating the license, it may
due to the router does not trigger the process, which to connect and get the license from
MyVigor server. You may reboot the router to trigger the process.
Modify DrayDDNS Domain Name
Currently, only the domain name is allowed to be modified MyVigor website. We will need to
register the router to MyVigor server, and log in to MyVigor website to modify it.
1. Please visit https://myvigor.draytek.com/ or go to Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup

>> DrayDDNS profile and click Edit domain.

2. Log in to MyVigor Website, choose the profile, then click Edit DDNS settings.
3. Input the desired Domain name and click Update.
4. Vigor router will get the modified domain name when the it performs next DDNS
updating. We can click Sync domain to accelerate this process.

5. After few seconds, the router will get the new domain name and print it on the profiles
list.

II-6 Routing
Route Policy (also well known as PBR, policy-based routing) is a feature where you may need
to get a strategy for routing. The packets will be directed to the specified interface if they
match one of the policies. You can setup route policies in various reasons such as load balance,
security, routing decision, and etc.
Through protocol, IP address, port number and interface configuration, Route Policy can be
used to configure any routing rules to fit actual request. In general, Route Policy can easily
reach the following purposes:
Load Balance
You may manually create policies to balance the traffic across network interface.
Specify Interface
Through dedicated interface (WAN/LAN/VPN), the data can be sent from the source IP to the
destination IP.
Address Mapping
Allows you specify the outgoing WAN IP address (es) for an internal private IP address or a
range of internal private IP addresses.
Priority
The router will determine which policy will be adopted for transmitting the packet according
to the priority of Static Route and Route Policy.
Failover to/Failback
Packets will be sent through another Interface or follow another Policy when the original
interface goes down (Failover to). Once the original interface resumes service (Failback),
the packets will be returned to it immediately.
Other routing
Specify routing policy to determine the direction of the data transmission.
Info For more detailed information about using policy route, refer to SUPPORT
>> TECH SUPPORT >>FAQs on www.draytek.com.
Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide III-135

Web User Interface
II-6-1 Static Route

Go to Routing to open setting page and choose Static Route. The router offers IPv4 and IPv6
for you to configure the static route. Both protocols bring different web pages.
II-6-1-1 Static Route for IPv4

Item Description
Index The number (1 to 30) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.
Set to Factory Default Clear all of the settings and return to factory default
settings.
Viewing Routing Table Displays the routing table for your reference.
Add Static Routes to Private and Public Networks

Here is an example (based on IPv4) of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B
locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet
access has been configured and the router works properly:
 use the Main Router to surf the Internet.
 create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)
 create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).
 have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.
Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward
recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.

1. Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control.
Then click the OK button.
Info There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on
1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP
packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet
(192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal
private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the
router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with
different subnets.
2. Click the LAN >> Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box.
Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to
192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.
Item Description
Enable Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IP Type an IP address as the destination of such static route.
Address
Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for such static route.
Gateway IP Address Type the gateway IP addres for such static route.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for such
static route.
3. Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another
static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be
forwarded to 192.168.1.3. Click OK.

4. Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.
II-6-1-2 Static Route for IPv6

You can set up to 40 profiles for IPv6 static route. Click the IPv6 tab to open the following
page:
Item Description
Index The number (1 to 40) under Index allows you to open next
page to set up static route.
Destination Address Displays the destination address of the static route.
settings.
Viewing IPv6 Routing Displays the routing table for your reference.
Table
Click any underline of index number to get the following page.

Item Description
Enable Click it to enable this profile.
Destination IPv6 Address / Type the IP address with the prefix length for this entry.
Prefix Len
Gateway IPv6 Address Type the gateway address for this entry.
Network Interface Use the drop down list to specify an interface for this static
route.
II-6-2 Load-Balance /Route Policy

It allows network administrator to manage the outbound traffic more specifically. The policy
set in Load-Balance/Route Policy always has higher priority than Default Route and Auto
Load Balance set in WAN >> Internet Access, and always has lower priority than the Firewall
Rules. Administrator may also define a priority to this policy.

General Setup lists all the policies and shows whether the policy is enabled / disabled, what
are the criteria to match, and through which the interface should the traffic to go if the
criteria are matched, and also its priority.

Item Description
Index Click the number of index to access into the configuration
web page.
Enable Check this box to enable this policy.
Protocol Display the protocol used for this policy.
Interface Display the interface to send packets to once the policy is
matched.
Priority Display the priority value for such route policy profile.
Src IP Start Display the IP address for the start of the source IP.
Src IP End Display the IP address for the end of the source IP.
Dest IP Start Display the IP address for the start of the destination IP.
Dest IP End Display the IP address for the end of the destination IP.
Dest Port Start Display the IP address for the start of the destination port.
Dest Port End Display the IP address for the end of the destination port.
Move UP/Move Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the policy.
Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used (simple and basic)
settings of route policy via three setting pages.
Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of route policy.
To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:
1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:

Item Description
Source IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.
Src IP Start - Type the source IP start for the specified WAN
interface.
Src IP End - Type the source IP end for the specified WAN
interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source
IPs inside the LAN will be passed through the WAN
interface.
Destination IP Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.
Dest IP Start- Type the destination IP start for the specified
WAN interface.
Dest IP End - Type the destination IP end for the specified
WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the
destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.
Country Object - Choose a country object. All the traffic
from destination IPs in that country is allowed pass through
the WAN interface.
3. Click Next to get the following page.
Item Description
Interface Use the drop down list to choose an interface (LAN/WAN) or
VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be
transferred to the interface chosen here.

Interface Address It is available only when WAN is selected as Interface. There
might be a lot of alias IP address, it is necessary to assign one
alias IP for the interface setting.
4. After specifying the interface, click Next to get the following page.
Item Description
Force NAT /Force It determines which mechanism that the router will use to
Routing forward the packet to WAN.
5. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.
6. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.

To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:
1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 2 to access into the following page.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable this policy.
Comment Type a brief explanation for this profile.
Criteria
Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the
WAN interface.
Source Any – Any IP can be treated as the source IP.

IP Range – Define a range of IP address as source IP
addresses.
 Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such profile.
 End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.
IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask
address.
 Network – Type an IP address here.
 Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask
for the network.
IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a

preconfigured IP object/group.
Destination Any – Any IP can be treated as the destination IP.
IP Range – Define a range of IP address as destination IP
addresses.
 Start - Type an address as the starting IP for such profile.
 End - Type an address as the ending IP for such profile.
IP Subnet – Define a subnet containing IP address and mask
address.
 Network – Type an IP address here.
 Mask – Use the drop down list to choose a suitable mask
for the network.
Domain Name – Specify a domain name as the destination.
 Select – Click it to choose an existing domain name
defined in Objects Setting>>String Object.
 Delete – Remove current used domain name.
 Add – Create a new domain name as the destination.
IP Object / IP Group– Use the drop down list to choose a
preconfigured IP object/group.
Country Object – Use the drop dwon list to choose a
preconfigured object. Then all IPs within that country will be
treated as the destination IP.
Destination Port Any – Any port number can be treated as the destination
port.
Dest Port Range –
 Start - Type the destination port start for the destination
IP.
 End - Type the destination port end for the destination IP.
If this field is blank, it means that all the destination
ports will be passed through the WAN interface.
Send via if criteria Matched
Interface Use the drop down list to choose a WAN or LAN interface or
VPN profile. Packets match with the above criteria will be
transferred to the interface chosen here.
Gateway Specific gateway is used only when you want to forward the
packets to the desired gateway. Usually, Default Gateway is
selected in default.
Packet Forwarding to When you choose WAN (e.g., WAN1) as the Interface for
WAN via packet transmission, you have to specify the way the packet
forwarded to. Choose Force NAT or Force Routing.
Failover to Check this button to lead the data passing through specific
interface (WAN/LAN/VPN/Route Policy) automatically when
the selected interface (defined in Send via if criteria
matched) is down.
 WAN/LAN – Use the drop down list to choose an
interface as an auto failover interface.
 VPN – Use the drop down list to choose a VPN tunnel as
a failover tunnel.
 Route Policy – Use the drop down list to choose an
existed route policy profile.
Priority

Priority Packets will be transmitted based on all routes or Route
Policy. Vigor router will determine which rule will be
adopted for transmitting the packet according to the priority
of Static Route and Route Policy.
The greater the value is, the lower the priority is. Default
value for route policy is “200” which means it has higher
priority than the default route.
3. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.
II-6-2-2 Diagnose for Route Policy

With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route)
of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.
Click the Diagnose link on Routing>>Load-Balance/Route Policy or the Diagnose button on
the configuration page based on Advanced Mode.
or

Item Description
Mode Analyze how a packet will be sent – Choose such mode to
make Vigor router analyze how a single packet will be sent
by a route policy.
Analyze how multiple packets… - Choose such mode to
make Vigor router analyze how multiple packets in a
specified file will be sent by a route policy.
Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor
router.
ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.
Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.
Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination
port.
Analyze – Click it to perform the job of analyzing. The
analyzed result will be shown on the page. If required, click
export analysis to export the result as a file.
Input File Select – Click the download link to get a blank example
file. Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file
for saving the result of analysis.


Note that the analysis was based on the current
"load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee
it will be 100% the same as the real case.
II-6-3 OSPF
OSPF(Open Shortest Path First), running within the AS, is a routing protocol based on IP
protocol. It uses the algorithm of SPF (Shortest Path First) to calculate the route metric. It is
suitable for large network and complicated data exchange. Vigor3910 supports up to OSPF
version 2(only for IPv4).
The Autonomous System (AS) used in OSPF can be divided into several areas. Usually, Area 0
will be used as OSPF backbone which distributing the routing information among areas.
When you need faster convergence than distance vector, want to support much larger
networks or want to have less susceptible to bad routing information, you can enable OSPF
feature to fit your request. Note that both routers must support OSPF function at the same
time to build the OSPF connection.
Open Routing >> OSPF to get the following page.
Item Description
Local
Enable OSPF Check the box to enable the function.

Profile
Enable Check it to enable and configure an OSPF profile.
Index 1 to 8 indicates profile 1 to profile 8.
Interface Choose a LAN / WAN interface to apply the settings
configured for this profile.
Area An AS will be divided into several areas. Each area must be
assigned with a dedicated number.
MD5 Auth Enable/disable the MD5 authentication mechanism for such
profile.
Password Enter characters as the password for MD5 authentication.
Key ID (1-255) Specify the IP address of such Vigor router.
Such ID will help Vigor router to be identified in an
autonomous system. However, if no address is specified,
then an IP address of the active interface will be used by
system automatically.
Neighborhoods Displays current neighbors status in BGP routing
environment.

II-6-4 BGP
BGP means Border Gateway Protocol. It is a standardized exterior gateway protocol which can
exchange routing and reachability information between autonomous systems (AS) on Internet.
The protocol TCP is used by two routers supporting BGP for data transmission. They can
exchange the BGP routing information for each other. A BGP router is the “neighbor” of other
BGP routers. Define the IP address, AS number for the router is essential for TCP connection
of BGP routing information exchange.
AS, the abbreviation of Autonomous System, is a group interconnected with multiple IP
addresses. Each AS shall be assigned with one AS number (ASN). The ASN is is a unique
identifier for AS to distinguish each network group in the whole interconnected network. It
can be operated by one or several ISPs and follows the routing policies made by ISP.

II-6-4-1 Basic Settings
Set general settings for for local router and neighboring routers.
Item Description
Local
Enable BGP Check the box to enable basic BGP function for local
router.
Local AS Number Set the AS number for local router.
Hold Time Set the time interval (in seconds) to determine the peer is
dead when the router is unable to receive any keepalive
message from the peer within the time.
Connect Retry Time If the router fails to connect to neighboring router, it
requires a period of time to reconnect.
Set the time interval to do reconnection.
Router ID Specify the LAN subnet for the router.
Neighbor
Index Click the index number link to configure neighbor profile.
Enable Check the box to enable the basic BGP function for
neighboring router.
AS Number Display the AS Number for neighboring router.
Profile Name Display the name of the neighboring profile.
IP Address Display the IP address specified for the neighboring profile.
MD5 Auth Display the status (enable or disable) of MD5 Auth.
Status Display the connection status for local router and
neighboring router.

II-6-4-2 Static Network

This page allows you to configure up to eight neighboring routers for exchanging the routing
information with the local router.
Item Description
Select Check the box to enable the configuration for the selected
index entry.
IP Address Enter the IP address for a router.
Subnet Mask Choose the mask value for the IP address.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Customize a Secure Route between VPN Router and Remote Router
by Using Route Policy
Example 1:
In the following figure, a LAN to LAN VPN tunnel is built between DrayTek VPN router (e.g.,
Vigor3910 Series) and the remote router. Firewall Router can receive all of the traffic coming
from remote PC which wants to access into Internet; and send back the packets to Remote
Router through VPN Router.
1. Establish a VPN tunnel between VPN Router and the Remote Router.
2. Change to default route for the router located in Remote Router.
3. Access into the web user interface of the router in VPN Router. Then, open Routing >>
Load-Balance / Route Policy and click Advance Mode.

4. Click any Index number link (e.g., 1 in this case). Configure the settings as follows.
Now, if you want such route policy will be applied by Vigor router with higher priority,
please adjust the value of Priority for such route policy. In general, default route is
specified with the lowest priority for it value is fixed as “250”. And Routes in Routing
Table are fixed as “150”. You can adjust the value for such route policy with lower value,
e.g., 100 to ensure it will be applied to packets transmission with the highest priority.
5. After finished the above settings, click OK to save the configuration.
6. To route the packets coming from the Firewall Router back to the remote router, access
into the web user interface of the Firewall Router. Then, set “192.168.1.1/24” as the
gateway IP address and set “172.16.3.0/24” as the destination IP address.

Example 2:
Below shows a scenario that local users behind Vigor router A want to access into a remote
service (e.g., YouTube) which is blocked or restricted by local Service Provider in area with
restrictions. A policy route can be created by the side of Router A to break through the
Internet censorship circumvention.
A VPN tunnel has been established between Router A and router B.

1. Access into the web user interface of Router A.
2. Open Routing >> Load-Balance/Route Policy and click Advance Mode.
3. Click any index number (e.g., #1 in this case).
4. In the following web page, check Enable; type “192.168.1.10” as Src IP Range; type
“213.57.89.100” as the Destination IP for the remote VPN server; and choose VPN as the
Interface setting.
5. Click OK to save the settings.

This page is left blank.

Part III VPN
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a
private network that encompasses links across shared
or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN
technology, you can send data between two computers
across a shared or public network in a manner that
emulates the properties of a point-to-point private
link.
It is a form of VPN that can be used with a standard

Web browser.
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is

issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains
information such as your name, a serial number,
expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the
certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can
verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router
support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.

III-1 VPN and Remote Access
A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links
across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send
data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the
properties of a point-to-point private link.
The VPN built is suitable for:
 Communication between home office and customer
 Secure connection between Teleworker, staff on business trip and main office
 Exchange data between remote office and main office
 POS between chain store and headquarters
Web User Interface

III-1-1 Remote Access Control
Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your
LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as
well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.

III-1-2 PPP General Setup
This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over
IPsec.
Item Description
Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP Only - elect this option to force the router to
authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 - Selecting this option
means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users
with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not
support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol
for authentication.
Dial-In PPP Encryption Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE
(MPPE) encryption method will be optionally employed in the router
for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does
not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will
transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE
encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.
 Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will
force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE
encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in
user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using
128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE
encryption method is not available, then 40-bit
encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.
 Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router
will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum
bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.
Mutual Authentication The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to
(PAP) communicate with other routers or clients who need

bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger
security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable
this function when your peer router requires mutual
authentication. You should further specify the User Name
and Password of the mutual authentication peer.
The length of the name/password is limited to 23/19
characters.
IP Address Assignment for Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection. You
Dial-In Users should choose an IP address from the local private network.
For example, if the local private network is
192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, you could choose 192.168.1.200
as the Start IP Address.
PPP Authentication Select the method(s) to be used for authentication in PPP
Methods connection.
While using Radius or If PPP connection will be authenticated via RADIUS server or
LDAP Authentication LDAP profiles, it is necessary to specify the LAN profile for
the dial-in user to get IP from.

III-1-3 IPsec General Setup
In IPsec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.
There are two phases of IPsec.
 Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman
parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of
both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that
starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer
tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure
tunnel for IKE Phase 2.
 Phase 2: negotiation IPsec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual
examination of the secure tunnel establishment.
There are two encapsulation methods used in IPsec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport
mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload
only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPsec. The Tunnel mode will not only
add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the
whole original IP packet.
Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed
between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to
create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets.
On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and
compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality
and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.

Item Description
IKE Authentication This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node
Method (LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and
IPsec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPsec and
IPsec tunnel. There are two methods offered by Vigor router
for you to authenticate the incoming data coming from
remote dial-in user, Certificate (X.509) and Pre-Shared
Key.
Certificate – X.509 certificates can be used for IKE
authentication. To set up certificates on the router, go to
the Certificate Management section.
Preferred Local ID - Specify the preferred local ID
information (Alternative Subject Name First or Subject
Name First) for IPsec authentication while the client is using
the general setting (without a specific Peer IP or ID in the
VPN profile).
General Pre-Shared Key- Define the PSK key for general
authentication.
Confirm General Pre-Shared Key- Re-enter the characters
to confirm the pre-shared key.
XAuth User Pre-Shared Key - Define the PSK key for IPsec
XAuth authentication.
Confirm XAuth User Pre-Shared Key- Re-enter the
characters to confirm the pre-shared key for IPsec XAuth
authentication.
Note: Any packets from the remote dial-in user which does
not match the rule defined in VPN and Remote
Access>>Remote Dial-In User will be applied with the
method specified here.
IPsec Security Method Available mthods include Basic, Medium and High. Each
method offers different encryption, HMAC and DH Group.
Basic - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option
is active.
Medium - When this option is selected, the Authentication
Header (AH) protocol can be used to provide authentication
to IPsec traffic.
High - When this option is selected, the Encapsulating
Security Payload (ESP) protocol can be used to provide
authentication and encryption to IPsec traffic. Three
encryption standards are supported for ESP: DES, 3DES and
AES, in ascending order of security.

III-1-4 IPsec Peer Identity
To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote
User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown
below, the router provides 500 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes.
of IPsec Peer Identity.
Name Display the profile name of that index.
Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital
signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The
following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

Item Description
Enable this account Check it to enable such account profile.
Profile Name Type the name of the profile. The maximum length of the
name you can set is 32 characters.
Accept Any Peer ID Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.
Accept Subject Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept
Alternative Name the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address,
Domain, or E-mail address. The box under the Type will
appear according to the type you select and ask you to fill in
corresponding setting.
Accept Subject Name Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to
accept the peer with matching value. The field includes
Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O),
Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email
(E).

III-1-5 OpenVPN
OpenVPN offers a convenient way for users to build VPN between local end and remote end.
With integrating of OpenVPN, Vigor router can help users to achieve more robust, reliable and
secure private connections for business needs.
There are two advantages of OpenVPN:

 It can be operated on different systems such as Windows, Linux, and MacOS.
 Based on the standard protocol of SSL encryption, OpenVPN can provide you with a
scalable client/server mode, permitting multi-client to connect to a single OpenVPN
Server process over a single TCP or UDP port.
III-1-5-1 General Setup
Before establishing OpenVPN connection, general settings for OpenVPN service shall be
configured first.
Item Description
Enable UDP Check the box to enable UDP port setting for OpenVPN.
UDP Port – Enter a number.
Enable TCP Check the box to enable TCP port setting for OpenVPN.
TCP Port – Enter a number.
Cipher Algorithm Two encryptions are supported, AES128 and AES256.
HMAC Algorithm The HMAC algorithm only supports SHA1/SHA256.
Certificate Authentication If certificate authentication is required for OpenVPN, simply
check the box to apply the trusted CA certificate and local
certificate for OpenVPN tunnel.
Certificate authentication can offer more secure VPN tunnel
between the client and the router.

III-1-5-2 Client Config
The settings on this page can be downloaded as a file. Later, such file can be imported and
applied to remote end’s CPE (as VPN client). Then, a private connection via OpenVPN tunnel
between the server and the client can be connected successfully.
Item Description
Remote Server Click IP and use the drop down list to specify an IP address of
WAN for VPN connection. Or click Domain to enter a domain
name for the remote server.
Transport Protocol Simply choose UDP or TCP as protocol for building OpenVPN
connection between the server and the remote client.
Fine Name Enter a name for the configuration file.
CA cert Enter the certificate authority (CA) file name obtained from
3rd party provider
Client cert Each client in an OpenVPN connection must have its
certificate and private key.
Enter the certificate file name obtained from 3rd party
provider
Client key Enter the private key file name obtained from 3rd party
provider
Export The settings in this page can be saved as a file after clicking
such button. Later, the downloaded file can be imported to
the VPN client for building OpenVPN connection.

III-1-6 Remote Dial-in User
You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users
can be authenticated to dial-in via VPN connection. You may set parameters including
specified connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel,
and L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
The router provides 500 access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the user
accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following
figure shows the summary table.
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.
View All – Click it to display the all of the user accounts.
Online – Click it to display the online user accounts.
Offline – Click it to display the offline user accounts.
of Remote Dial-in User.

Enable Check the box to activate such profile.
User Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the
LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the
profile is empty.
Status Display the access state of the specific dial-in user.
Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the
different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.
Item Description
User account and Enable this account - Select to enable this profile to be used
Authentication by remote dial-in users.
Idle Timeout - Allowed idle time before the router
disconnects the VPN connection. Default timeout value is
300 seconds.
Allowed Dial-In Type Select all VPN protocols allowed for this profile.
For L2TP, specify how IPsec should be applied. Options are
None – IPsec cannot be used with L2TP connections.
 Nice to Have – IPsec is preferred but not mandatory for
L2TP connections.

 Must – IPsec is required when establish L2TP
connections.
Specify Remote Node - The IP address of the remote VPN
client (Remote Client IP) or the Peer ID (used in IKE
aggressive mode) can be optionally specified. The router will
reject the connection if either of these values are entered in
the profile but the remote client does not pass the value, or
passes the wrong value.
Netbios Naming Packet - Specifies whether to allow NetBIOS
naming packets to traverse through the VPN tunnel.
 Pass – Click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel
while connecting.
 Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Specifies whether to allow multicast
packets to traverse through the VPN tunnel.
 Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.
 Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
Subnet The VPN client will receive an IP address from the DHCP pool
or IP address range specified in IP Address Assignment for
Dial-In Users for the selected LAN subnet.
Assign Static IP Address – Alternatively, a static IP address
can be set by selecting the Assign Static IP Address checkbox.
User Name - Used for PPTP, L2TP or SSL Tunnel dial-in type.
The length of the name is limited to 23 characters.
Password - Used for PPTP, L2TP or SSL Tunnel dial-in type.
The length of the password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Select to
enable one-time passwords (Mobile-OTP). Enter the PIN Code
and Secret. DrayTek’s SmartVPN client has built-in support
for mOTP. Third-party mOTP clients can be used to generate
passwords when using other VPN clients. For more
information on mOTP, visit Mobile-OTP's homepage.
 PIN Code – Enter the code for authentication (e.g,
1234).
 Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by
mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g.,
e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
IKE Authentication Pre-Shared Key - This checkbox is available when Remote
Method Client IP or Peer ID is specified. Check the checkbox and
click IKE Pre-shared Key to enter an IKE PSK (1~63
characters) that will be used only for this profile.
Digital Signature (X.509) – To enable authentication using
X.509 Peer IDs, check the checkbox then select an X.509
profile. X.509 profiles can be configured in VPN and Remote
Access >> IPsec Peer Identity.
IPsec Security Method Select all the IPsec protocols that are allowed to be used for
this profile.
Medium-Authentication Header (AH) means data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option

is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High (ESP) - High-Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP)
means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption
Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID (Optional)- Specify a local ID to be used when
establishing a LAN-to-LAN VPN connection using IKE
aggressive mode.
III-1-7 LAN to LAN

Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles.
You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out),
connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPsec Tunnel, and
L2TP by itself or over IPsec) and corresponding security methods, etc.
The following figure shows the summary table according to the item
(All/Trunk/Online/Offline) selected for View.

Item Description
Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.
View All – Shows all LAN-to-LAN VPN profiles.
Trunk – Shows all Trunk profiles (see VPN and Remote Access
>> VPN TRUNK Management).
Index Click the index number of the profile to view or edit its
settings.
Enable Check to enable the LAN-to-LAN VPN profile.
Name Display the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ???
represents that the profile is empty.
Remote Network Display the name of the remote network.
Status Shows the status of the profile.
Online – LAN-to-LAN VPN is connected.
Offline – LAN-to-LAN VPN is disconnected.
--- – Profile is disabled.
Pass Routing LAN to VPN Check the box to allow the packets from the Routing LAN to
pass over the VPN tunnel.
Default setting is "Disable".
Pass Packets to NAT when If enabled, the Vigor router will send the packets to the
VPN disconnects default gateway once the VPN disconnects.
Default setting is "Enable".
Backup Click Backup to save the configuration.
Restore Click Select to choose a configuration file. Then click
Restore to apply the file.
To edit each profile:
1. Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each
LAN-to-LAN profile includes 5 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it
untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

Item Description
Common Settings Profile Name – Specify a name for the profile of the
LAN-to-LAN connection.
Enable this profile - Check here to activate this profile.
VPN Dial-Out Through - Use the drop down menu to choose a
proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful
for dial-out only.
 WANx First- While connecting, the router will use
WANx as the first channel for VPN connection. If WANx
fails, the router will use another WAN interface
instead.
 WANx Only - While connecting, the router will use
WANx as the only channel for VPN connection.
 WAN1 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN2 down - If
WAN2 failed, the router will use WAN1 for VPN
connection.
 WAN2 Only: Only establish VPN if WAN1 down - If
WAN1 failed, the router will use WAN2 for VPN
connection.
Netbios Naming Packet
 Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel

while connecting.
 Block – When there is conflict occurred between the
hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such
function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming
Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.
 Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass
through the router.
 Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let
multicast packets be blocked by the router.
Call Direction - Specify the allowed call direction of this
LAN-to-LAN profile.
 Both:-initiator/responder
 Dial-Out- initiator only
 Dial-In- responder only.
Tunnel Mode - At present, a tunnel (GRE tunnel) without
encryption is offered to fit the requiarement of specific
client.
Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN
connection.
Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the
connection has been idled over the value, the router will
drop the connection.
Enable PING to keep alive - This function is to help the
router to determine the status of IPsec VPN connection,
especially useful in the case of abnormal VPN IPsec tunnel
disruption. For details, please refer to the note below. Check
to enable the transmission of PING packets to a specified IP
address.
Enable PING to keep alive is used to handle abnormal IPsec
VPN connection disruption. It will help to provide the state
of a VPN connection for router’s judgment of redial.
Normally, if any one of VPN peers wants to disconnect the
connection, it should follow a serial of packet exchange
procedure to inform each other. However, if the remote
peer disconnects without notice, Vigor router will by no
where to know this situation. To resolve this dilemma, by
continuously sending PING packets to the remote host, the
Vigor router can know the true existence of this VPN
connection and react accordingly. This is independent of DPD
(dead peer detection).
PING to the IP - Enter the IP address of the remote host that
located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel.
Dial-Out Settings Type of Server I am calling - PPTP - Build a PPTP VPN
connection to the server through the Internet. You should set
the identity like User Name and Password below for the
authentication of remote server.
IPsec Tunnel - Build an IPsec VPN connection to the server
through Internet.
L2TP with IPsec Policy - Build a L2TP VPN connection
through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or
with IPsec. Select from below:
 None: Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly, the
VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPsec

policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.
 Nice to Have: Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out
VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
 Must: Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely applied
on the L2TP connection.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select, PPTP or
L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The length of the
name is limited to 49 characters.
Password - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
password is limited to 15 characters.
PPP Authentication - This field is applicable when you
select, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
PAP/CHAP/MS-CHAP/MS-CHAPv2 is the most common
selection due to compatibility.
VJ compression - This field is applicable when you select
PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. VJ
Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression.
Normally set to On to improve bandwidth utilization.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.
 Pre-Shared Key - Input 1-63 characters as pre-shared
key.
 Digital Signature (X.509) - Select one predefined
Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec
Peer Identity.
Peer ID - Select one of the predefined Profiles set in
VPN and Remote Access >>IPsec Peer Identity.
Local ID – Specify a local ID (Alternative Subject Name
First or Subject Name First) to be used for Dial-in
setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is
optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.
 Local Certificate – Select one of the profiles set in
Certificate Management>>Local Certificate.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy.
 Medium AH (Authentication Header) means data will
be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.
 High (ESP-Encapsulating Security Payload)- means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
Select from below:
 DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.
 DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption algorithm
and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.
 3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES
encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication
scheme.
 3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES encryption
algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication
algorithm.
 AES without Authentication-Use AES encryption
algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

 AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm
and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.
Advanced - Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE
phase, Gateway, etc.
The window of advance setup is shown as below:
IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive

mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security
proposals to create a protected secure channel. Main mode
is more secure than Aggressive mode since more exchanges
are done in a secure channel to set up the IPsec session.
However, the Aggressive mode is faster. The default value in
Vigor router is Main mode.
 IKE phase 1 proposal-To propose the local available
authentication schemes and encryption algorithms to
the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match.
Two combinations are available for Aggressive mode
and nine for Main mode. We suggest you select the
combination that covers the most schemes.
 IKE phase 2 proposal-To propose the local available
algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to
find a match. Three combinations are available for both
modes. We suggest you select the combination that
covers the most algorithms.
 IKE phase 1 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
28800 seconds. You may specify a value in between 900
and 86400 seconds.
 IKE phase 2 key lifetime-For security reason, the
lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is
3600 seconds. You may specify a value in between 600
and 86400 seconds.
 Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)-The IKE Phase 1 key will
be reused to avoid the computation complexity in
phase 2. The default value is inactive this function.
Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of the
IP address while identity authenticating with remote
VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47
characters.
Schedule Profile - Set the wireless LAN to work at certain
time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of
the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule
setup. The default setting of this field is blank and the
function will always work.

Item Description
Dial-In Settings Allowed Dial-In Type - Determine the dial-in connection
with different types.
 PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP
VPN connection through the Internet. You should set
the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user
below.
 IPsec Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger
an IPsec VPN connection through Internet.
 L2TP with IPsec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user
to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet.
You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPsec. Select
from below:
 None - Do not apply the IPsec policy. Accordingly,
the VPN connection employed the L2TP without
IPsec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP
connection.
 Nice to Have - Apply the IPsec policy first, if it is
applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the
dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP
connection.
 Must - Specify the IPsec policy to be definitely
applied on the L2TP connection.
 SSL Tunnel- Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an
SSL VPN connection through Internet.
Specify Remote VPN Gateway - You can specify the IP
address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the
same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box.

Also, you should further specify the corresponding security
methods on the right side.
If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you select
above will apply the authentication methods and security
methods in the general settings.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
name is limited to 11 characters.
password is limited to 11 characters.
VJ Compression - VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP
protocol header compression. This field is applicable when
you select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above.
IKE Authentication Method - This group of fields is
applicable for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when
you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only
exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you
select IPsec tunnel either with or without specify the IP
address of the remote node.
 Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to
invoke this function and type in the required characters
(1-63) as the pre-shared key.
 Digital Signature (X.509) –Check the box of Digital
Signature to invoke this function and select one
predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access
>>IPsec Peer Identity.
 Local ID – Specify which one will be inspected
first.
 Alternative Subject Name First – The alternative
subject name (configured in Certificate
Management>>Local Certificate) will be
inspected first.
 Subject Name First – The subject name
(configured in Certificate Management>>Local
Certificate) will be inspected first.
IPsec Security Method - This group of fields is a must for
IPsec Tunnels and L2TP with IPsec Policy when you specify
the remote node.
 Medium- Authentication Header (AH) means data will
be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default,
this option is active.
 High- Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means
payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated.
You may select encryption algorithm from Data
Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
GRE over IPsec Enable IPsec Dial-Out function GRE over IPsec: Check this
Settings box to verify data and transmit data in encryption with GRE
over IPsec packet after configuring IPsec Dial-Out setting.
Both ends must match for each other by setting same virtual
IP address for communication.
Logical Traffic: Such technique comes from RFC2890. Define
logical traffic for data transmission between both sides of
VPN tunnel by using the characteristic of GRE. Even hacker
can decipher IPsec encryption, he/she still cannot ask LAN
site to do data transmission with any information. Such

function can ensure the data transmitted on VPN tunnel is
really sent out from both sides. This is an optional function.
However, if one side wants to use it, the peer must enable it,
too.
My GRE IP: Type the virtual IP for router itself for verified by
peer.
Peer GRE IP: Type the virtual IP of peer host for verified by
router.
TCP/IP Network My WAN IP –This field is only applicable when you select
Settings PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The default
value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a PPP
IP address from the remote router during the IPCP
negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote
side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the
default value if you do not select PPTP or L2TP.
Remote Gateway IP - This field is only applicable when you
select PPTP or L2TP with or without IPsec policy above. The
default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will
get a remote Gateway PPP IP address from the remote router
during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is
fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do
not change the default value if you do not select PPTP or
L2TP.
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static
route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPsec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Local Network IP / Local Network Mask - Display the local
network IP and mask for TCP / IP configuration. You can
modify the settings if required.
More - Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Masks
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.
RIP Direction - The option specifies the direction of RIP

(Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can
enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide
four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.
From first subnet to remote network, you have to do - If
the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP,

please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.
Change default route to this VPN tunnel - Check this box to
change the default route with this VPN tunnel.
IPSec VPN with the For both ends (e.g., different sections in a company) are
Same subnet within the same subnet, there is a function which allows you
to build Virtual IP mapping between two ends. Thus, when
VPN connection established, the router will change the IP
address according to the settings configured here and block
sessions which are not coming from the IP address defined in
the Virtual IP Mapping list.
After checking the box of IPSec VPN with the Same subnet,
the options under TCP/IP Network Settings will be changed
as shown below:
Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask - Add a static

route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP
Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection.
For IPSec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick
mode.
Translated Local Network – This function is enabled in
default. Use the drop down list to specify a LAN port as the
transferred direction. Then specify an IP address. Click
Advanced to configure detailed settings if required.
Advanced – Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to
more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Mask
through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you
find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.

Translated Type – There are two types for you to choose.
 Whole Subnet
 Specific IP Address
Virtual IP Mapping – A pop up dialog will appear for you to
specify the local IP address and the mapping virtual IP
address.
2. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration.

III-1-8 VPN Trunk Management
VPN trunk includes four features - VPN Backup, VPN load balance, GRE over IPsec, and Binding
tunnel policy.
Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup Mechanism

VPN TRUNK Management is a backup mechanism which can set multiple VPN tunnels as
backup tunnel. It can assure the network connection not to be cut off due to network
environment blocked by any reason.
 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism can judge abnormal situation for the environment of
VPN server and correct it to complete the backup of VPN Tunnel in real-time.
 VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism is compliant with all WAN modes (single/multi)
 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and ISDN (depends
on hardware specification)
 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure
 Fully compliant with VPN Server LAN Site Single/Multi Network
 Mail Alert support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for
detailed configuration
 Syslog support, please refer to System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert for detailed
configuration
 Specific ERD (Environment Recovery Detection) mechanism which can be operated by
using Telnet command
VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism profile will be activated when initial connection of single
VPN tunnel is off-line. Before setting VPN TRUNK -VPN Backup mechanism backup profile,
please configure at least two sets of LAN-to-LAN profiles (with fully configured dial-out
settings) first, otherwise you will not have selections for grouping Member1 and Member2.
Features of VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance Mechanism

VPN Load Balance Mechanism can set multiple VPN tunnels for using as traffic load balance
tunnel. It can assist users to do effective load sharing for multiple VPN tunnels according to
real line bandwidth. Moreover, it offers three types of algorithms for load balancing and
binding tunnel policy mechanism to let the administrator manage the network more flexibly.
 Three types of load sharing algorithm offered, Round Robin, Weighted Round Robin and
Fastest
 Binding Tunnel Policy mechanism allows users to encrypt the data in transmission or
specified service function in transmission and define specified VPN Tunnel for having
effective bandwidth management
 Dial-out connection types contain IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec and GRE over IPsec
 The web page is simple to understand and easy to configure
 The TCP Session transmitted by using VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance mechanism will not be
lost due to one of VPN Tunnels disconnected. Users do not need to reconnect with setting
TCP/UDP Service Port again. The VPN Load Balance function can keep the transmission for
internal data on tunnel stably

Item Description
Backup Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN
Backup mechanism profile.
No – The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup mechanism
profile.
Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such
profile is disabled.
Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup
mechanism profile.
Member1 - Display the dial-out profile selected from the
Member1 drop down list below.
Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the
state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with
Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.
Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as
IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over
IPsec(MUST) and so on.
Advanced – This button is available only when LAN to LAN
profile (or more) is created.

Detailed information for this dialog, see later section -
Advanced Load Balance and Backup.
Load Balance Profile List Set to Factory Default - Click to clear all VPN TRUNK-VPN
Load Balance mechanism profile.
No - The order of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance
mechanism profile.
Status - “v” means such profile is enabled; “x” means such
profile is disabled.
Name - Display the name of VPN TRUNK-VPN Load Balance
mechanism profile.
Active - “Yes” means normal condition. “No” means the
state might be disabled or that profile currently is set with
Dial-in mode (for call direction) in LAN-to-LAN.
Type - Display the connection type for that profile, such as
IPsec, PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPsec (NICE), L2TP over
IPsec(MUST) and so on.
Advanced – This button is only available when there is one or
more profiles created in this page.
Detailed information for this dialog, see later section -

Advanced Load Balance and Backup.

General Setup Status- After choosing one of the profile listed above, please
click Enable to activate this profile. If you click Disable, the
selected or current used VPN TRUNK-Backup/Load Balance
mechanism profile will not have any effect for VPN tunnel.
Profile Name- Type a name for VPN TRUNK profile. Each
profile can group two VPN connections set in LAN-to-LAN.
The saved VPN profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be shown on
Member1 and Member2 fields. The length of the name is
limited to 11 characters.
Member 1/Member2 - Display the selection for LAN-to-LAN
dial-out profiles (configured in VPN and Remote Access >>
LAN-to-LAN) for you to choose for grouping under certain
VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile.
 No - Index number of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.
 Name - Profile name of LAN-to-LAN dial-out profile.
 Connection Type - Connection type of LAN-to-LAN
dial-out profile.
 VPN ServerIP (Private Network) - VPN Server IP of
LAN-to-LAN dial-out profiles.
Active Mode - Display available mode for you to choose.
Choose Backup or Load Balance for your router.
Add - Add and save new profile to the backup profile list.
The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles) grouped
in such new VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism profile will
be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in
red. VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance mechanism profile will
be locked. The profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in
blue.
Update - Click this button to save the changes to the Status
(Enable or Disable), profile name, member1 or member2.
Delete - Click this button to delete the selected VPN TRUNK
profile. The corresponding members (LAN-to-LAN profiles)
grouped in the deleted VPN TRUNK profile will be released
and that profiles in LAN-to-LAN will be displayed in black.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism profile

VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism will be activated automatically after the initial
connection of single VPN Tunnel off-line. The content in Member1/2 within VPN TRUNK – VPN
Backup mechanism backup profile is similar to dial-out profile configured in LAN-to-LAN web
page. VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup mechanism backup profile will process and handle everything
unless it is off-line once it is activated.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK – VPN Load Balance mechanism profile
After finishing the connection for one tunnel, the other tunnel will dial out automatically
within two seconds. Therefore, you can choose any one of members under VPN Load Balance
for dialing out.
Time for activating VPN TRUNK –Dial-out when VPN Load Balance Disconnected
For there is one Tunnel created and connected successfully, to keep the load balance effect
between two tunnels, auto-dial will be executed within two seconds.
To close two tunnels of load balance after connecting, please click Disable for Status in
General Setup field.

How can you set a VPN TRUNK-VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism profile?
1. First of all, go to VPN and Remote Access>>LAN-to-LAN. Set two or more LAN-to-LAN
profiles first that will be used for Member1 and Member2. If you do not set enough
LAN-to-LAN profiles, you cannot operate VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup /Load Balance
mechanism profile management well.
2. Access into VPN and Remote Access>>VPN TRUNK Management.
3. Set one group of VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance mechanism backup profile by
choosing Enable radio button; type a name for such profile (e.g., 071023); choose one of
the LAN-to-LAN profiles from Member1 drop down list; choose one of the LAN-to-LAN
profiles from Member2 drop down list; and click Add at last.
4. Take a look for LAN-to-LAN profiles. Index 1 is chosen as Member1; index 2 is chosen as
Member2. For such reason, LAN-to-LAN profiles of 1 and 2 will be expressed in red to
indicate that they are fixed. If you delete the VPN TRUNK – VPN Backup/Load Balance
mechanism profile, the selected LAN-to-LAN profiles will be released and expressed in
black.
How can you set a GRE over IPsec profile?

1. Please go to LAN to LAN to set a profile with IPsec.
2. If the router will be used as the VPN Server (i.e., with virtual address 192.168.50.200).
Please type 192.168.50.200 in the field of My GRE IP. Type IP address (192.168.50.100) of
the client in the field of Peer GRE IP. See the following graphic for an example.

3. Later, on peer side (as VPN Client): please type 192.168.50.100 in the field of My GRE IP
and type IP address of the server (192.168.50.200) in the field of Peer GRE IP.
Advanced Load Balance and Backup
After setting profiles for load balance, you can choose any one of them and click Advance for
more detailed configuration. The windows for advanced load balance and backup are
different. Refer to the following explanation:

Advanced Load Balance
Item Description
Profile Name List the load balance profile name.
Load Balance Algorithm Round Robin – Based on packet base, both tunnels will send
the packet alternatively. Such method can reach the balance
of packet transmission with fixed rate.
Weighted Round Robin – Such method can reach the balance
of packet transmission with flexible rate. It can be divided
into Auto Weighted and According to Speed Ratio. Auto
Weighted can detect the device speed (10Mbps/100Mbps)
and switch with fixed value ratio (3:7) for packet
transmission. If the transmission rate for packets on both
sides of the tunnels is the same, the value of Auto Weighted
should be 50:50. According to Speed Ratio allows user to
adjust suitable rate manually. There are 100 groups of rate
ratio for Member1:Member2 (range from 1:99 to 99:1).
VPN Load Balance Policy Below shows the algorithm for Load Balance.
Edit – Click this radio button for assign a blank table for
configuring Binding Tunnel.
Insert after – Click this radio button to adding a new binding

tunnel table.
Tunnel Bind Table Index- 128 Binding tunnel tables are
provided by this device. Specify the number of the tunnel for
such Load Balance profile.
Active – In-active/Delete can delete this binding tunnel
table. Active can activate this binding tunnel table.
Binding Dial Out Index – Specify connection type for
transmission by choosing the index (LAN to LAN Profile Index)
for such binding tunnel table.
Scr IP Start /End– Specify source IP addresses as starting
point and ending point.
Dest IP Start/End – Specify destination IP addresses as
starting point and ending point.
Dest Port Start /End– Specify destination service port as
starting point and ending point.
Protocol – Any means when the source IP, destination IP,
destination port and fragment conditions match with the
settings specified here, such binding tunnel table can be
established for TCP Service Port/UDP Service
Port/ICMP/IGMP specified here.
TCP means when the source IP, destination IP, destination
port and fragment conditions match with the settings
specified here and TCP Service Port also fits the number
here, such binding tunnel table can be established. UDP
means when the source IP, destination IP, destination port
and fragment conditions match with the settings specified
here and UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such
binding tunnel table can be established. TCP/UPD means
when the source IP, destination IP, destination port and
fragment conditions match with the settings specified here
and TCP/UDP Service Port also fits the number here, such
binding tunnel table can be established. ICMP means when
the source IP, destination IP, destination port and fragment
conditions match with the settings specified here and ICMP
Service Port also fits the number here, such binding tunnel
table can be established. IGMP means when the source IP,
destination IP, destination port and fragment conditions
match with the settings specified here and IGMP Service Port
also fits the number here, such binding tunnel table can be
established. Other means when the source IP, destination IP,
destination port and fragment conditions match with the
settings specified here with different TCP Service Port/UDP
Service Port/ICMP/IGMP, such binding tunnel table can be
established.
Detail Information This field will display detailed information for Binding Tunnel
Policy. Below shows a successful binding tunnel policy for
load balance:

To configure a successful binding tunnel, you have to:
Type Binding Src IP range (Start and End) and Binding Des IP
range (Start and End). Choose TCP/UDP, IGMP/ICMP or Other
as Binding Protocol.
Advanced Backup
Item Description
Profile Name List the backup profile name.
ERD Mode ERD means “Environment Recovers Detection”.
Normal – choose this mode to make all dial-out VPN TRUNK
backup profiles being activated alternatively.
Resume – when VPN connection breaks down or disconnects,

Member 1 will be the top priority for the system to do VPN
connection.
Detail Information This field will display detailed information for Environment
Recovers Detection.
III-1-9 Connection Management

You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN
connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool
and clicking Dial button.
Item Description
Dial-out Tool General Mode - This filed displays the profile configured in
LAN-to-LAN (with Index number and VPN Server IP address).
The VPN connection built by General Mode does not support
VPN backup function.
Backup Mode - This filed displays the profile name saved in

VPN TRUNK Management (with Index number and VPN Server
IP address). The VPN connection built by Backup Mode
supports VPN backup function.
Dial - Click this button to execute dial out function.

Refresh Seconds - Choose the time for refresh the dial

information among 5, 10, and 30.
Refresh - Click this button to refresh the whole connection
status.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Build a LAN-to-LAN VPN Between Remote Office and Headquarter
via IPsec Tunnel (Main Mode)
Configuration on Vigor Router for Head Office

1. Log into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2. Open VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN to create a LAN-to-LAN profile. The
following settings are for a permanent VPN connection.
3. Click any index number to open the configuration page. Type a name which is easy for
identification for such profile (in this case, type VPN Server), and check the box of
Enable This Profile. For Vigor router will be set as a server, the call direction shall be
set as Dial-in and set 0 as Idle Timeout.

4. Now navigate to the next section, Dial-In Settings to check PPTP, IPsec Tunnel and L2TP
boxes. Check the box of Specify Remote… and type the Peer VPN Server IP (e.g.,
218.242.130.19 in this case). Press the IKE Pre-Shared Key button to set the PSK; and
select Medium (AH) or High (ESP) as the security method.
5. Continue to navigate to the TCP/IP Network Settings for setting the LAN IP for remote
side.

7. Open VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management to check the dial-in
connection status (from branch office).

Configuration on Vigor Router for Branch Office
2. Open VPN and Remote Access>>LAN to LAN to create a LAN-to-LAN profile. The
following settings are for a permanent VPN connection.
3. Click any index number to open the configuration page. Type a name which is easy for
identification for such profile (in this case, type VPN Client), and check the box of
Enable This Profile. For such Vigor router will be set as a client, the call direction shall
be set as Dial-out. Check the box of Always on for a permanent VPN connection.

4. Now navigate to the next section, Dial-Out Settings to select the IPsec Tunnel service
and type the remote server IP/host name (e.g., 218.242.133.91, in this case). Press the
IKE Pre-Shared Key button to set the PSK; and select Medium (AH) or High (ESP) as the
security method.
5. Continue to navigate to the TCP/IP Network Settings for setting the LAN IP for the
remote side.

7. Open VPN and Remote Access>>Connection Management to check the dial-in
connection status (from head office).

III-2 SSL VPN
SSL VPN (Secure Sockets Layer virtual private network) is a form of VPN that encrypts traffic
using SSL, which is the same technology used on secured websites. Because of SSL’s
prominence as an encryption protocol on the Internet, most networks have few restrictions on
SSL traffic, and as a result SSL VPN is more likely to work when other VPN technologies
experience difficulties due to obstacles such as firewalls and Network Address Translation
(NAT).
In short,
 It is not necessary for users to preinstall VPN client software for executing SSL VPN
connection.
 There are less restrictions for the data encrypted through SSL VPN in comparing with
traditional VPN.

Web User Interface
III-2-1 General Setup

The general settings of the SSL VPN Server and SSL Tunnel are entered on this page.
Item Description
Bind to WAN Select the WAN interfaces to accept inbound SSL VPN
connections.
Port The port to be used for SSL VPN server. This is separate from
the management port which is configured in System
Maintenance>>Management. The default setting is 443.
Server Certificate When the client does not set any certificate, default
certificate will be used for HTTPS and SSL VPN server.
Specify the certificate to be used for SSL connections. Select a
certificate from imported or generated certificates on the
router, or choose Self-signed to use the router’s built-in
default certificate. The selected certificate can be used in SSL
VPN server and HTTPS Web Proxy.

III-2-2 User Account
With SSL VPN, Vigor3910 Series let teleworkers have convenient and simple remote access to
central site VPN. The teleworkers do not need to install any VPN software manually. From
regular web browser, you can establish VPN connection back to your main office even in a
guest network or web cafe. The SSL technology is the same as the encryption that you use for
secure web sites such as your online bank. The SSL VPN can be operated in either full tunnel
mode or proxy mode. Now, Vigor3910 Series allows up to 16 simultaneous incoming users.
SSL VPN authentication and permissions management are implemented through user accounts.
SSL VPN user accounts are shared with the remote dial-in user accounts used by other VPN
protocols such as PPTP and L2TP, and hence SSL VPN’s User Account setup page SSL VPN >>
User Account is identical to VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in user.
Info SSL VPN can work only with Smart VPN Client developed by DrayTek. After
configuring SSL VPN profile, download the utility of Smart VPN Client to
build SSL VPN connection.

Click each index to edit one remote user profile.
Item Description
User account and Enable this account - Check the box to enable this function.
Authentication Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of
the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the
Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.
User Name - This field is applicable when you select PPTP or
name/password is limited to 23 characters.
name/password is limited to 19 characters.
Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP) - Check this box
to make the authentication with mOTP function.
 PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
 Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by
mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g.,
e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
Allowed Dial-In Type Select the VPN protocols that this user is allowed to use.
PPTP - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish VPN
connections with the PPTP protocol. You should set the User

Item Description
Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.
IPSec Tunnel - Allow the remote dial-in user to establish IPsec
tunnels.
L2TP with IPSec Policy - Allow the remote dial-in user to
establish L2TP VPN connections. You can select to use L2TP
alone or with IPSec. Select one of the following options:
 None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. L2TP connections
are not encrypted.
 Nice to Have - Attempt to establish an IPsec secure
channel first, before starting an L2TP session. If an IPsec
secure channel cannot be established with the remote
client, fall back to an L2TP connection without
encryption.
 Must - Require that an IPsec secure channel be
established before starting an L2TP connection.
Disconnect if an IPsec secure channel cannot be
established.
SSL Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to initiate
SSL VPN tunnels.
OpenVPN Tunnel - Select to allow the remote dial-in user to
initiate OpenVPN tunnels.
Specify Remote Node - Select this option to specify the
remote IP address, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE
aggressive mode) used to authenticate the remote dial-in
user. If this option is not selected, the authentication and
security methods specified in the general settings will be used
instead.
Netbios Naming Packet
 Pass – Select this to allow Netbios name inquiries
between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel.
 Block – Select this to block Netbios name inquiries
between remote and local hosts.
Multicast via VPN - Some programs might send multicast
packets via VPN connection.
 Pass –Select this to allow multicast packets to pass
through VPN connections.
 Block –Select this to block multicast packets from passing
through the VPN connections. This is the default setting.
Subnet Select a subnet for this VPN profile.
Assign Static IP Address –If you would like to assign a static IP
address to this user, enter it here.
IKE Authentication All fields in this section, except for Digital Signature (X.509),
Method are applicable to IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with
IPsec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote
node (Remote Client IP in Specify Remote Node above).
Digital Signature (X.509) can be used with IPSec tunnels
regardless of the IP address of the remote node is specified or
not.
Pre-Shared Key - Select this checkbox to enable Pre-shared
Key function and enter a string of up to 63 characters as the
pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Select this checkbox to enable
X.509 Digital Signature and choose a predefined profile that

Item Description
has been set in VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer
Identity.
IPSec Security Method When the remote node is specified, all fields in this section are
required for IPsec Tunnels and L2TP connections with IPsec
Policy. Select any combination of Medium, DES, 3DES and AES
security methods as desired.
Medium (AH, Authentication Header) - Data will be
authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is
enabled. You can uncheck it to disable it.
High (ESP, Encapsulating Security Payload) - Payload (data)
will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select
encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES),
Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the
LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be
used only in IKE aggressive mode.

III-3 Certificate Management
A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA).
It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the
digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the
certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard
X.509.
Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA
server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate
the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.
Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA
certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that
you can get the correct valid period of certificate.

Web User Interface
III-3-1 Local Certificate
Item Description
Generate Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request
window.
Type in all the information that the window requests. Then
click Generate again.
Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification
information.
Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate
request.
Delete Click this button to delete selected name with certification
information.
GENERATE
Click this button to open Generate Certificate Signing Request window. Type in all the
information that the window request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different
certificate), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE again.

Info Please be noted that “Common Name” must be configured with rotuer’s
WAN IP or domain name.
After clicking GENERATE, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:
IMPORT
Vigor router allows you to generate a certificate request and submit it the CA server, then
import it as “Local Certificate”. If you have already gotten a certificate from a third party,
you may import it directly. The supported types are PKCS12 Certificate and Certificate with a
private key.
Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information. There are three types
of local certificate supported by Vigor router.

Item Description
Upload Local Certificate It allows users to import the certificate which is generated by
Vigor router and signed by CA server.
If you have done well in certificate generation, the Status of
the certificate will be shown as “OK”.
Upload PKCS12 It allows users to import the certificate whose extensions are
Certificate usually .pfx or .p12. And these certificates usually
need passwords.
Note: PKCS12 is a standard for storing private keys and
certificates securely. It is used in (among other things)
Netscape and Microsoft Internet Explorer with their import
and export options.
Upload Certificate and It is useful when users have separated certificates and private
Private Key keys. And the password is needed if the private key is
encrypted.

REFRESH
Click this button to refresh the information listed below.
View
Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.
Info You have to copy the certificate request information from above window.
Next, access your CA server and enter the page of certificate request, copy
the information into it and submit a request. A new certificate will be
issued to you by the CA server. You can save it.
Delete
Click this button to remove the selected certificate.

III-3-2 Trusted CA Certificate
Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate. In addition, you can build a
RootCA certificate if required.
When the local client and remote client are required to make certificate authentication (e.g.,
IPsec X.509) for data passing through SSL tunnel and avoiding the attack of MITM, a trusted
root certificate authority (Root CA) will be used to authenticate the digital certificates
offered by both ends.
However, the procedure of applying digital certificate from a trusted root certificate
authority is complicated and time-consuming. Therefore, Vigor router offers a mechanism
which allows you to generate root CA to save time and provide convenience for general user.
Later, such root CA generated by DrayTek server can perform the issuing of local certificate.
Info Root CA can be deleted but not edited. If you want to modify the settings
for a Root CA, please delete the one and create another one by clicking
Create Root CA.

Creating a RootCA
Click Create Root CA to open the following page. Type in all the information that the window
request such as certifcate name (used for identifying different certificate), subject
alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then click GENERATE again.
Importing a Trusted CA
To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following
window. Use Browse… to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you
imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window.
For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information
window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all
the certificate information.

III-3-3 Certificate Backup
Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file.
Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption
password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password
and Confirm password.
Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.

III-3-4 Self-Signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which
generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is
signed with its own private key.
The self-signed certificate will be applied in SSL VPN, HTTPS, and so on. In addition, it can be
created for free by using a wide variety of tools.

Part IV Security
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth
for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance
learning, security has been always the most
concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to
protect your local network against attack from
unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the
local network from accessing the Internet.
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management

which is used to control IM/P2P usage, filter the web
content and URL content to reach a goal of security
management.

IV-1 Firewall
While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications,
or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor
router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also
restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out
specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.
Firewall Facilities
The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:
 User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).
 Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data
 Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection
IP Filters
Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN
link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter
and Data Filter.
 Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all
traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules.
If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet
connection and send the packet to Internet.
 Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to
incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal,
the packet will pass the router.
The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic
and outgoing traffic respectively.

Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI)
Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy
static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header,
stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all
interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router
not only examines the header information also monitors the state of the connection.
Denial of Service (DoS) Defense

The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks
are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks.
The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the
vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the
protocol or operation system.
The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on
the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze
the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning,
if you set up Syslog server.
Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined
parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router
will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.
The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:
1. SYN flood attack 9. SYN fragment

2. UDP flood attack 10. Fraggle attack
3. ICMP flood attack 11. TCP flag scan
4. Port Scan attack 12. Tear drop attack
5. IP options 13. Ping of Death attack
6. Land attack 14. ICMP fragment
7. Smurf attack 15. Unassigned Numbers
8. Trace route

Web User Interface
Below shows the menu items for Firewall.
IV-1-1 General Setup

General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can
enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can
be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can
configure the Log Flag settings, Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets, and Accept
incoming fragmented UDP packets.
Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.
General Setup Page

Such page allows you to enable / disable Call Filter and Data Filter, determine general rule
for filtering the incoming and outgoing data.
Item Description

Call Filter Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Call Filter.
Data Filter Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a
start filter set for the Data Filter.
Allow pass inbound Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of
gragmented large… fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively
as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these
fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable
“Allow pass inbound gragmented large…”. By checking this
box, you can play these kinds of on-line games. If security
concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable “Allow pass
inbound gragmented large…”.
Enable Strict Security For the sake of security, the router will execute strict
Firewall security checking for data transmission.
Such feature is enabled in default. All the packets, while
transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall. If the firewall system (e.g., content filter server)
does not make any response (pass or block) for these
packets, then the router’s firewall will block the packets
directly.
Block routing packet from Usually, IPv6 network sessions/traffic from WAN to LAN will
WAN be accepted by IPv6 firewall in default.
IPv6 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the packets (routed from WAN to
LAN) via IPv6 being blocked by such router. It is effective
only for the packets routed but not for packets translated by
NAT.
IPv4 - To prevent remote client accessing into the PCs on
LAN, check the box to make the incoming packets via IPv4
being blocked by such router. It is effective only for the
packets routed but not for packets translated by NAT.

Default Rule Page
Such page allows you to choose filtering profiles including QoS, Load-Balance policy, WCF,
APP Enforcement, URL Content Filter, for data transmission via Vigor router.
Item Description
Filter Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with
the filter rules.
Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page.
Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
related section later.
User Management Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in
User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall
rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users
specified here.
Note: When there is no user profile or group profile existed,
Create New User or Create New Group item will appear for
you to click to create a new one.
APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must follow
the standard configured in the APP Enforcement profile
selected here. For detailed information, refer to the section
of APP Enforcement profile setup. For troubleshooting
needs, you can specify to record information for IM/P2P by

checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please
refer to section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed
information.
URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this
router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>
URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose [Create New]
from the drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box.
It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
[Create New] from the drop down list in this page to create
a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to
section Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
DNS Filter Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in
CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at
least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page
first. Or click the DNS Filter link in this page to create a new
profile.
Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters

among different languages. Choose correct codepage can
help the system obtain correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter.
The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you
do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be
processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a
codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the
dialog box.

Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol
(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout – Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources.

IV-1-2 Filter Setup
Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.
To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page
will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit
each rule. Check Active to enable the rule.
Item Description
Filter Rule Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click
the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the
detailed information, refer to the following page.
Active Enable or disable the filter rule.
Comment Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
23–character long.
Direction Display the direction of packet.
Src IP / Dst IP Display the IP address of source /destination.
Service Type Display the type and port number of the packet.

Action Display the packets to be passed /blocked.
CSM Display the content security managed
Move Up/Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.
Next Filter Set Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the
current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.
Wizard Mode Allow to configure frequently used settings for filter rule via
several setting pages.
Advance Mode Allow to configure detailed settings of filter rule.
To use Wizard Mode, simple do the following steps:
1. Click the Wizard Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 1. The setting page will appear as follows:
Item Description
Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other

LAN.
Source/Destination IP To set the IP address manually, please choose Any
Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as
the Address Type and type them in this dialog.
Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.

Source Port / (=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
Destination Port one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
3. Click Next to get the following page.
Item Description
Pass Immediately Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.
APP Enforcement - Select an APP Enforcement profile for
global IM/P2P application blocking. If there is no profile for
you to select, please choose [Create New] from the drop
down list in this page to create a new profile. All the hosts
in LAN must follow the standard configured in the APP
Enforcement profile selected here. For detailed
information, refer to the section of APP Enforcement
profile setup. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to
record information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It
will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section
Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter - Select one of the URL Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page
to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for URL Content Filter by
information.
Web Content Filter - Select one of the Web Content Filter
profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for
applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for
anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or
choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this page

to create a new profile. For troubleshooting needs, you can
specify to record information for Web Content Filter by
information.
DNS Filter - Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router.
Please set at least one profile in CSM>> Web Content
Filter web page first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the
drop down list in this page to create a new profile.
Block Immediately Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.
4. After choosing the mechanism, click Next to get the summary page for reference.
5. If there is no error, click Finish to complete wizard setting.

To use Advance Mode, do the following steps:
1. Click the Advance Mode radio button.

2. Click Index 1 to access into the following page.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable the filter rule.
Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is
14- character long.
Schedule Profile Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You
may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules
pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The
default setting of this field is blank and the function will
always work.
Clear sessions when Check this box to clear the sessions when the above
schedule is ON schedule profiles are applied.
Direction Set the direction of packet flow. It is for Data Filter only.
For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call
Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.
Note: RT means routing domain for 2nd subnet or other
LAN.
Source IP / Country Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the
source/destination IP or IP ranges.
Destination IP /
Country

To set the IP address manually, please choose Any
Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet
Address/Group and Objects/Country Object as the
Address Type and type them in this dialog. For example, if
you want to use the IP range from defined groups or
objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address
Type.
From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you
want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to
choose the object that you want.
Service Type Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a
suitable service type.
To set the service type manually, please choose User

defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In
addition, if you want to use the service type from defined
groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the

Service Type.
Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will
apply to.
Source/Destination Port –
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this service
type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it
indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when
the first and last values are different, it indicates that all
the ports except the range defined here are available for
this service type.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for
this profile.
Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose
the one that you want.
Fragments Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used
for Data Filter only.
Don’t care -No action will be taken towards fragmented
packets.
Unfragmented -Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.
Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.
Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short
to contain a complete header.
Filter Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the
rule.
Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
dropped immediately.
Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be
passed immediately.
Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule,
and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.
Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and
that does not match further rules, will be passed through.
Branch to other Filter If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule
Set will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule
to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the
router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will
not return to previous filter rule any more.
Sessions Control The number typed here is the total sessions of the packets
that do not match the filter rule configured in this page.
The default setting is 60000.
MAC Bind IP Strict –Make the MAC address and IP address settings
configured in IP Object for Source IP and Destination IP
are bound for applying such filter rule.
No-Strict - no limitation.
Quality of Service Choose one of the QoS rules to be applied as firewall rule.
For detailed information of setting QoS, please refer to the
related section later.
User Management Such item is available only when Rule-Based is selected in
User Management>>General Setup. The general firewall

rule will be applied to the user/user group/all users
specified here.
Note: When there is no user profile or group profile
existed, Create New User or Create New Group item will
appear for you to click to create a new one.
APP Enforcement Select an APP Enforcement profile for global IM/P2P
application blocking. If there is no profile for you to select,
please choose [Create New] from the drop down list in this
page to create a new profile. All the hosts in LAN must
follow the standard configured in the APP Enforcement
profile selected here. For detailed information, refer to
the section of APP Enforcement profile setup. For
troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record
information for IM/P2P by checking the Log box. It will be
sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section Syslog/Mail
Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in
CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. Or choose
record information for URL Content Filter by checking the
Web Content Filter Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings
(created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with
this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in
CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. Or choose
record information for Web Content Filter by checking the
DNS Filter Select one of the DNS Filter profile settings (created in
CSM>>DNS Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at
least one profile in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page
first. Or click the DNS Filter link from the drop down list in
this page to create a new profile.
Advance Setting Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is
strongly recommended to use the default settings here.
Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters

among different languages. Choose correct codepage can

help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data
from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content
Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I.
If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL
will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose
a codepage.
If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,
please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup
dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on
the dialog box.
Window size – It determines the size of TCP protocol

(0~65535). The more the value is, the better the
performance will be. However, if the network is not stable,
small value will be proper.
Session timeout–Setting timeout for sessions can make the
best utilization of network resources. However, Queue
timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session
timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with
the firewall rule.
DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the
following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web
page. The default setting is Enabled.
Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while

transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by
firewall settings configured by Vigor router. When the
resource is inadequate, the packets will be blocked if Strict
Security Checking is enabled. If Strict Security Checking is
not enabled, then the packets will pass through the router.
3. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page.

IV-1-3 Defense Setup
As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in
the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.
IV-1-3-1 DoS Defense

Click Firewall and click Defense Setup to open the setup page.
Item Description
Enable Dos Defense Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.
Select All - Click this button to select all the items listed
below.
White/Black List Option – Set white/black list of IPv4/IPv6
address.
Enable SYN flood defense Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from
the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor
router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP
SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for
this is prevent the TCP SYN packets’ attempt to exhaust the
limited-resource of Vigor router.
By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to
2000 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.

Enable UDP flood defense Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function.
Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the
Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router
will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets
for a period defined in Timeout.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 2000
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 2000 packets per second received, they will
be regarded as “attack event” and the session will be
paused for 10 seconds.
Enable ICMP flood defense Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function.
Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the
Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the
defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo
requests coming from the Internet.
The default setting for threshold and timeout are 250
packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively. That
means, when 250 packets per second received, they will be
regarded as “attack event” and the session will be paused
for 10 seconds.
Enable PortScan detection Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets
to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would
respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan
detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration
behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate,
the Vigor router will send out a warning.
By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 2000
packets per second. That means, when 2000 packets per
second received, they will be regarded as “attack event”.
Block IP options Check the box to activate the Block IP options function.
The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option
field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP
option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the
LAN because it will carry significant information, such as
security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of
Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An
eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your
private networks.
Block Land Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the
Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack
technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an
attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical
source and destination addresses, as well as the port
number to victims.
Block Smurf Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The
Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo
request.
Block trace route Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward
any trace route packets.
Block SYN fragment Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function.
The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and
more fragment bit set.
Block Fraggle Attack Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function.
Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is
blocked.

Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block
some legal packets. For example, when you activate the
fraggle attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming
from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets
from the Internet might be dropped.
Block TCP flag scan Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function.
Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those
scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK
scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
Block Tear Drop Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function.
Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams
(packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this
type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of
discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length
greater than 1024 octets.
Block Ping of Death Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function.
This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping
packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will
hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers
will block any packets realizing this attacking activity.
Block ICMP Fragment Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment
function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are
dropped.
Block Unassigned Numbers Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol
function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the
datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over
the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than
100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the
router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of
packets.
Warning Messages We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message
from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive
the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog
Client.
All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be
sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon.
Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a
name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.

IV-1-3-2 Spoofing Defense
Open Firewall >> Defense Setup and click Spoofing Defense to open the setup page.
IV-1-4 Diagnose
The purpose of this function is to test when the router receiving incoming packet, which
firewall rule will be applied to that packet. The test result, including firewall rule profile, IP
address translation in packet transmission, state of the firewall fuctions and etc., also will be
shown on this page.
Info The result obtained by using Diagnose is offered for RD debug. It will be
different according to actual state such as netework connection, LAN/WAN
settings and so on.

Item Description
Mode To have a firewall rule test, specify the service type (ICMP,
UDP, TCP) of the packet and type of the IP address
(IPv4/IPv6).
Direction Set the way (from WAN or from LAN) that Vigor router
receives the first packet for test. Different way means the
firewall will process the connection initiated from LAN or
from WAN.
Test View This is a dynamic display page.
According to the direction specified, test view will display
the figure to guide you typing IP address, port number, and
MAC address.
Later, after clicking the Analyze button, the information for
the firewall rule profile and address translation will be
shown on this page.
Src IP Type the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s source.
Src Port Type the port number of the packet’s source.
Src MAC Type the MAC address of the packet’s source.
Dst IP Type the IPv4/IPv6 address of the packet’s destination.
Dst Port Type the port number of the packet’s destination.
Packet & Payload In firewall diagnose, two packets belong to one connection.
In general, two packets are enough for Vigor router to
perform this test.
Enable – Check the box to send out the test packet.
Direction – The first packet of the firewall test will follow
the direction specified above. However, the direction for
the second packet might be different. Simply choose the
direction (from Computer A to B or from the B to A) for the
second packet.
Protocol – It displays the mode selected above and the
sate. If required, click the mode link to configure advanced
setting. The common service type (Customize, Ping, Trace

Route / Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize,
Http(GET) related to that mode (ICMP / UDP / TCP) will be
shown on the following dialog box.
 Type – Choose Customize, Ping, Trace Route /

Customize, DNS, Trace Route / Customize, Http
(GET).
 Payload – It is available when Customzie is selected.
Simply type 16 HEX characters which represent
certain packet (e.g., DNS packet) if you want to set
the data transfered with protocol (ICMP/UDP/TCP)
which is different to Type setting.
Analyze Execute the test and analyze the result.
The following figure shows the test result after clicking Analyze. Processing state for the
fuctions (MAC Filter, QoS, User management, etc.,) related to the firewall will be displayed
by green or red LED.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Configure Certain Computers Accessing to Internet

We can specify certain computers (e.g., 192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20) accessing to Internet
through Vigor router. Others (e.g., 192.168.1.31 and 192.168.1.32) outside the range can get
the source from LAN only.
The way we can use is to set two rules under Firewall. For Rule 1 of Set 2 under
Firewall>>Filter Setup is used as the default setting, we have to create a new rule starting
from Filter Rule 2 of Set 2.
1. Access into the web user interface of Vigor router.
2. Open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and choose the Filter Rule 2 button.

3. Check Enable to enable the filter rule. Type the comments (e.g., block_all). Choose
Block If No Further Match for the Filter setting. Then, click OK.
Info In default, the router will check the packets starting with Set 2, Filter
Rule 2 to Filter Rule 7. If Block If No Further Match for is selected for
Filter, the firewall of the router would check the packets with the
rules starting from Rule 3 to Rule 7. The packets not matching with
the rules will be processed according to Rule 2.
4. Next, set another rule. Just open Firewall>>Filter Setup. Click the Set 2 link and
choose the Filter Rule 3 button.
5. Check Enable to enable the filter rule. Type the comments (e.g., open_ip). Click the
Edit button for Source IP.
6. A dialog box will be popped up. Choose Range Address as Address Type by using the
drop down list. Type 192.168.1.10 in the field of Start IP, and type 192.168.1.20 in the
field of End IP. Then, click OK to save the settings. The computers within the range can
access into the Internet.

7. Now, check the content of Source IP is correct or not. The action for Filter shall be set
with Pass Immediately. Then, click OK to save the settings.
8. Both filter rules have been created. Click OK.
Now, all the settings are configured well. Only the computers with the IP addresses within
192.168.1.10 ~ 192.168.1.20 can access to Internet.

IV-2 CSM (Central Security Management)
CSM is an abbreviation of Central Security Management which is used to control IM/P2P

usage, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.
APP Enforcement Filter

As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot
become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to
connect with their customers, some industry may take reserved attitude in order to reduce
employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation
for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but
insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.
URL Content Filter

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
Web Content Filter

We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be
inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in
your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect
your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and
security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or
chat rooms.
Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories
of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be
checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global
team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your
router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the
categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your
Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of
requests for categorization.
Info The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.

Web User Interface
IV-2-1 APP Enforcement Profile

You can define policy profiles for IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol/Misc
application. This page allows you to set 32 profiles for different requirements. The APP
Enforcement Profile will be applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Item Description
Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.
Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.
Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile. The maximum length of the
Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page.
Clear All Uncheck all the selected boxes.
Enable Check the box to select the APP to be blocked by Vigor
router.
The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and
Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.

IV-2-2 URL Content Filter Profile
To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter
not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web
feature where malicious code may conceal.
Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking
facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user’s access to the
website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who
won’t sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a
job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL
Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks
the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy
firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.
On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious
codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable
objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once
downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system.
For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If
malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.
For example, if you add key words such as “sex”, Vigor router will limit web access to web
sites or web pages such as “www.sex.com”, ”www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html”.
Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as “www.sex.com” or “sex.com”.
Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.
Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.

Item Description
Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to
set different policy.
Name Display the name of the URL Content Filter Profile.

Administration Message You can type the message manually for your necessity.
Default Message - You can type the message manually for your
necessity or click this button to get the default message which
will be displayed on the field of Administration Message.
You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile
to open the following web page.
Item Description
Priority It determines the action that this router will apply.
Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below passing through. When you choose this
setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access
Control and Web Feature will be inactive.
Both:Block –The router will block all the packages that
match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both
configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web
Feature will be inactive.
Either: URL Access Control First – When all the packages
matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control
and Web Feature below, such function can determine the
priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router
will process the packages with the conditions set below for
URL first, then Web feature second.
Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages matching
with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web
Feature below, such function can determine the priority for
the actions executed. For this one, the router will process
the packages with the conditions set below for web feature
first, then URL second.

Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL
Access Control. Note that the priority for URL Access
Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web
content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the
router will execute the action specified in this field and
ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.
Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to deny
any web surfing activity using IP address, such as
http://202.6.3.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone
dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser
cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates
properly on a web page that you visited before.
Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL
Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is
selected.
 Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.
 Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding
webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the keyword set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.
Exception List – Specify the object profile(s) as the
exception list which will be processed in an opposite manner
to the action selected above.
Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides several
frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports
multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial
noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a
frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In
addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character
long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline
the connection request to the website whose URL string
matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed
that the more simplified the blocking keyword list is, the
more efficiently the Vigor router performs.

Web Feature Enable Web Feature Restriction - Check this box to make
the keyword being blocked or passed.
Action - This setting is available only when Either: URL
Access Control First or Either: Web Feature First is
selected.
 Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the keywords listed on the box below.
 Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding
webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified
feature set here, it will be processed with reverse
action.
Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission
from inside to outside world to protect the local user's
privacy.
Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To
control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of
great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters
out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.
Upload – Check the box to block the file upload by way of
web page.
File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you
configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects
previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.
After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.

IV-2-3 Web Content Filter Profile
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version of WCF directly without accessing
into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is
necessary for you to access into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using
corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account.
WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider (e.g., DrayTek).
No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to
click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with Vigor
router currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want
to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.
Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default
setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another
server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for
searching another qualified and suitable one.
Info 1 Web Content Filter (WCF) is not a built-in service of Vigor router but a
service powered by Commtouch. If you want to use such service (trial or
formal edition), you have to perform the procedure of activation first. For
the service of formal edition, please contact with your dealer/distributor
for detailed information.
Info 2 Commtouch is merged by Cyren, and GlobalView services will be continued
to deliver powerful cloud-based information security solutions! Refer to:
http://www.prnewswire.com/news-releases/commtouch-is-now-cyren-239
025151.html

Item Description
Activate Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.
Setup Query Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize
searching when you type URL in browser based on the web
content filter profile.
Setup Test Server It is recommended for you to use the default setting,
auto-selected.
Find more Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching
another qualified and suitable server.
Cache None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is
normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL
matching.
L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it
will be stored in the router to be accessed quickly if
required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with
faster rate.
L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to
access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the
IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized
for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the
user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will
check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the
page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL

matching with the fastest rate.
L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast
processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.
Set to Factory Default Click this link to retrieve the factory settings.
Default Message You can type the message manually for your necessity or
click this button to get the default message which will be
displayed on the field of Administration Message.
Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under
Profile to open the following web page.
The items listed in Categories will be changed according to the different service providers. If
you have and activate another web content filter license, the items will be changed
simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web content filter will be deleted
automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you change the web content filter
license.
Item Description
Log Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.
All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
Black/White List Enable – Activate white/black list function for such profile.
Group/Object Selections – Click Edit to choose the group or
object profile as the content of white/black list.
Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web
pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they

will be processed with the categories listed on the box
below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the
box below.
Action Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with
the categories listed on the box below.
Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage
with the categories listed on the box below.
If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set
here, it will be processed with reverse action.

IV-2-4 DNS Filter Profile
The DNS Filter monitors DNS queries on UDP port 53 and will pass the DNS query information
to the WCF to help with categorizing HTTPS URL's.
DNS can be specified in LAN>>General Setup by using the server (e.g., 168.95.1.1) on router
or external DNS server (e.g., 8.8.8.8). If the router server is used, DNS Filter General Setting
will be applied to DNS query from clients on LAN. However, if the external DNS server is used,
DNS Filter Profile will be applied to DNS query coming from clients on LAN.
Info For DNS filter must use the WCF service profile to filter the packets,
therefore WCF license must be activated first. Otherwise, DNS filter does
not have any effect on packets.
Item Description
DNS Filter Profile Table It displays a list of different DNS filter profiles (with

specified WCF and UCF).
Click the profile link to open the following page. Then, type
the name of the profile and specify WCF/UCF based on your
requirement.
DNS Filter Local Setting DNS Filter Local Setting will be applied to DNS query from
clients on LAN when router’s DNS server is used.
DNS Filter - Check Enable to enable such feature.
Web Content Filter- Set the filtering conditions.
URL Content Filter - Set the filtering conditions.
Syslog - The filtering result can be recorded according to the
setting selected for Syslog.
 None – There is no log file will be recorded for this
profile.
 Pass – Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.
 Block – Only the log about Block will be recorded in
Syslog.
 All – All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in
Syslog.
Black/White List – Specify IP address, subnet mask, IP
object, or IP group as a black list or white list for DNS
packets passing through or blocked by Vigor router.
Administration Message When DNS packets are blocked by DNS filter, a web page
containing the description listed on Administration Message
will be shown on the screen.
Type the words or sentences which will be displayed when a
web page is blocked by Vigor router. You can type the
message manually for your necessity or click Default
Message button to get the default text displayed on the field
of Administration Message.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Create an Account for MyVigor

The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several
useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filtering
the web pages for the sake of protecting your system.
To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.
Create an Account via Vigor Router

1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.
Or
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.

2. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.
3. Click the link of Create an account now.

4. The system will ask if you are 16 years old or over.
 If yes, click I am 16 or over.

 If not, click I am under 16 years old to get the following page. Then, click I and my
legal guardian agree.
5. After reading the terms of service/privacy policy, click Agree.
6. In the following page, enter your personal information in this page and then click
Continue.

7. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.
8. Now you have created an account successfully.

9. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter
from myvigor.draytek.com.
10. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following
screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.

11. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just
created) in the fields of UserName and Password.
12. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to
activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.

A-2 How to Block Facebook Service Accessed by the Users via Web Content
Filter / URL Content Filter
There are two ways to block the facebook service, Web Content Filter and URL Content Filter.
Web Content Filter,
Benefits: Easily and quickly implement the category/website that you want to block.
Note: License is required.
URL Content Filter,
Benefits: Free, flexible for customize webpage.
Note: Manual setting (e.g., one keyword for one website.)
I. Via Web Content Filter

1. Make sure the Web Content Filter license is valid.
2. Open CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile to create a WCF profile. Check Social
Networking with Action, Block.

3. Select this profile in Firewall>>General Setup>>Default Rule.
4. Next time when someone accesses facebook via this router, the web page would be
blocked and the following message would be displayed instead.
II. Via URL Content Filter

A. Block the web page containing the word of “Facebook”
1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2. In the field of Contents, please type facebook. Configure the settings as the following
figure.

3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4. Configure the settings as the following figure.
5. When you finished the above steps, click OK. Then, open Firewall>>General Setup.

6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.
B. Disallow users to play games on Facebook

1. Open Object Settings>>Keyword Object. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
2. In the field of Contents, please type apps.facebook. Configure the settings as the
following figure.

3. Open CSM>>URL Content Filter Profile. Click an index number to open the setting
page.
4. Configure the settings as the following figure.
5. When you finished the above steps, please open Firewall>>General Setup.
6. Click the Default Rule tab. Choose the profile just configured from the drop down list in
the field of URL Content Filter. Now, users cannot open any web page with the word
“facebook” inside.

A-3 How to use APP Enforcement to block application like Facebook, YouTube
or TeamViewer?
APP Enforcement helps network administrator to block applications on LAN network. Draytek
routers provide a few categories to set up the profiles e.g., IM, P2P, Protocol, Stream,
Remote control.
This section is going to demonstrate how to use APP Enforcement to block Facebook, Skype,
YouTube and TeamViewer.
1. Create an APP Enforcement Profile: Click on an Index number to create a new profile at
CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile.

2. Set up the details in the profile.
(a) Enter Profile Name.

(b) Choose the Facebook in Instant Message.
(c) Choose Skype in VoIP.
(d) Choose YouTube in Stream.
(e) Choose TeamViewer in Remote control.
(f) Click OK to save.
3. Apply the APP Enforcement Profile to a Firewall Filter Rule. Go to Firewall >> Filter
Setup, and click an available set.

4. Click on a Filter Rule index to set up a filter.
5. Set up the details in the profile.
(a) Enable the Filter Rule.

(b) Put the comments of this rule.
(c) Select the Direction as LAN/DMZ/RT/VPN -> WAN.
(d) Edit the Source IP which should be blocked from the APP.
(e) Select Filter as Pass Immediately.
(f) Select APP Enforcement as the profile we created in Step 2.
(g) You may also check the Syslog if needed.

(h) Click OK to save.
6. With the above configuration, LAN clients cannot be able to use the APP and website.


Part V Management
There are several items offered for the Vigor router
system setup: System Status, TR-069, Administrator
Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,
Configuration Backup, Configuration Export, Syslog
/Mail Alert, Time and Date, SNMP, Management,
Self-Signed Certificate, Reboot System, Firmware
Upgrade, Activation, Internal Service User List and
Dashboard Control.
It is used to control the bandwith of data transmission

through configuration of Sessions Limit, Bandwidth
Limit, and Quality of Servie (QoS).
It is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic

(except DHCP-related packets) from a particular host
until that host has correctly supplied a valid username
and password.

V-1 System Maintenance
For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration:
System Status, TR-069, Administrator Password, User Password, Login Page Greeting,
Configuration Backup, Syslog /Mail Alert, Time and Date, Management, Panel Control, Reboot
System, Firmware Upgrade, Activation, Internal Service User List and Dashboard Control.
Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.

Web User Interface
V-1-1 System Status

The System Status displays basic network information of Vigor router including LAN and WAN
interface status. Also available is the current firmware version and firmware related
information.
Item Description
Model Name Displays the model name of the router.
Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the router.
Build Date/Time Displays the date and time of the current firmware build.
LAN MAC Address
- Displays the MAC address of the LAN Interface.
IP Address
- Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.
Subnet Mask
- Displays the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.
DHCP Server
- Displays the current status of DHCP server of the LAN
interface.
DNS
- Displays the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.
WAN Link Status
- Displays current connection status of the WAN interface.

MAC Address
- Displays the MAC address of the WAN Interface.
Connection
- Displays the connection type of the WAN interface..
IP Address
- Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.
Default Gateway
- Displays the assigned IP address of the default gateway.
IPv6 Address - Displays the IPv6 address for LAN.
Scope - Displays the scope of IPv6 address. For example,
IPv6 Link Local is non-routable and can only be used for
local connections.
Internet Access Mode – Displays the connection mode of the
WAN interface.

V-1-2 TR-069
This device supports the TR-069 standard for remote management of customer-premises
equipment (CPE) through an Auto Configuration Server, such as VigorACS.
V-1-2-1 ACS and CPE Settings
Item Description
TR-069 Enables or disables TR-069 functionality.
ACS Server On Choose the interface for connecting the router to the Auto
Configuration Server.
ACS Server This section specifies the settings of the ACS Server.
URL – Enter the URL for connecting to the ACS. Please refer

to the Auto Configuration Server user’s manual for detailed
information.
 Wizard – Click it to enter the IP address of VigorACS
server, port number and the handler.
 Acquire URL form DHCP option 43 – Select to acquire
the ACS URL from DHCP option 43.
Username/Password – Enter the credentials required to
connect to the ACS server.
 Test With Inform – Click to send an inform message
using the selected Event Code to test if the CPE is able
to communicate with the VigorACS server.
 Event Code – Select an event for the inform test.
Last Inform Response Time –Displays the time of the most
recent Inform Response message received from the
VigorACS.
CPE Client This section specifies the settings of the CPE Client.
Protocol – Select Https if the connection is encrypted;
otherwise select Http.
Port – In the event of port conflicts, change the port number
of the CPE.
Username and Password – Enter the username and password
that the VigorACS will use to connect to the CPE.
Periodic Inform Settings Enable – The default setting is Enable, which means the CPE
Client will periodically connect to the ACS Server to update
its connection parameters at intervals specified in the
Interval Time field.
 Time Interval - Please set interval time or schedule
time for the router to send notification to CPE.
Disable - Select Disable to turn off periodic notifications.
STUN Settings STUN allows the ACS Server to connect to the CPE Client
even when the client is behind a network address translator
(NAT).
Disable - The default setting is Disable.
Enable - Please Enter the relational settings listed below:
 Server Address – Enter the IP address of the STUN
server.
 Server STUN Port – Enter the port number of the STUN
server.
 Minimum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the
CPE must periodically transmit binding requests to the
server for the purpose of maintaining the binding with
the Gateway. Enter the minimum interval between
keep-alive messages that the CPE client sends to the
ACS server. The default setting is 60 seconds.
 Maximum Keep Alive Period – If STUN is enabled, the
CPE must send binding request to the server for the
purpose of maintaining the binding with the Gateway.
Enter the maximum interval between keep-alive
messages that the CPE client sends to the ACS server. A
value of -1 indicates that no maximum period is
specified.
Apply Settings to APs This feature is able to apply TR-069 settings (including STUN
and ACS server settings) to all of APs managed by Vigor2865
at the same time.

Disable – TR-069 and Related settings will not be applied to
VigorAPs.
Enable – TR-069 settings will be applied to VigorAPs after
clicking OK. The VigorAP password must be specified.
 AP Password – Enter the password of the VigorAP that
you want to apply Vigor router's TR-069 settings.
Specify STUN Settings for APs – After clicking the Enable
radio button for Apply Settings to APs, if you want to apply
specific STUN settings (i.e., different from the Vigor2865
STUN settings) to VigorAPs to meet specific requirements,
check this box and enter the server IP address, server port,
and minimum and maxmum keep alive periods respectively.
Bandwidth Utilisation This feature allows the ACS Server to be notified when
Notification Settings bandwidth usage has been exceeded on the router.
Enable / Disable – Select to enable or disable the featur.
 Time Period – Select the frequency of the notifications
(15 mins, 30 mins, 1hour, 3 hours, or 6 hours).
 WAN – Select the WAN interfaces to be monitored and
reported.
 Threshold Level – Sets the utilization percentages (of
the preset Tx and Rx Line Speeds) when Medium or High
Usage notifications should be sent.
 Line Speed – Enter the Tx and Rx bandwidths of the
WAN interface.
Select OK to save changes on the page, or Clear to reset all settings to factory defaults.
V-1-2-2 Reporting Configuration

Information related to the router's health are divided into several categories and listed in this
field. After checking the item(s), Vigor router will arrange and send corresponding data to
VigorACS as a reference for the system administrator.

Item Description
Health Parameters Check the one that Vigor router will send the status
information to VigorACS.
Threshold (for VoIP R-Factor) - Once the quality of VoIP is
lower than warning limit value or critical limit value, the
router will send the result to VigorACS.
CPE Notification Settings Enable - Check the box to select the notification item(s).
Vigor router will send the utilization status to VigorACS.
Click OK to save changes on the page.
V-1-2-3 Export Parameters

Click Export to save the TR-069 parameter settings as an ".xml".

V-1-3 Administrator Password
This page allows you to set or change the administrator password.

Item Description
Administrator Password The administrator can login web user interface of Vigor
router to modify all of the settings to fit the requirements.
Old Password - Enter the current password. The factory
default is “admin”.
New Password – Enter the new password. The maximum
length of the password is 23 characters.
Confirm Password – Enter the new password again for
confirmation.
Enable ‘admin’ account login to Web UI from the Internet –
Select to allow the administrator to log in from the Internet.
This option is enabled when Administrator Local User is
enabled (see below).
Use only advanced authentication method for Admin
“WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can offer a
more secure network connection. Select to require mOTP or
2-step authentication when logging in from the WAN.
 Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Select to allow
the use of mOTP passwords. Enter the PIN Code and
Secret settings for getting one-time passwords.
 2-Step Auth code via SMS Profile and/or Mail Profile –
Select the SMS and/or Mail profiles and the destination
SMS number and/or email address for transmitting the
password.
Administrator Local User Usually, the system administrator has the highest privilege to
modify the settings on the web user interface of the Vigor
router. However, in some cases, it might be necessary to
have other users in LAN to access into the web user interface
of Vigor router.
This feature allows you to add more administrators who can
then log in to the web interface, with the same privileges as
the administrator.
Enable Local User – Check the box to allow other users to
administer the router.
 Use only advanced authentication method for Admin
“WAN” login – Advanced authentication method can
offer a more secure network connection. In general,
the above basic password setting will be used for
authentication if such option is disabled. Simply check
the box to enable the following settings.
 Local User List – Shows all the users that are set up to
administer the router.
 Specific User – Create the new user account as the
local user. Then specify the authentication method
(dividing into Basic and Advanced) for the user account.
 User Name – Enter a user name.
 Authentication method – Select from Basic or
Advanced authentication methods.
Basic – Static passwords will be used to authenticate
users.
 Local Password – Enter the password for the local
user.
Advanced - Mobile One-time Passwords (mOTP) or

2-step authentication will be used to authenticate
users.
 Mobile one-Time Password (mOTP) – Select to
allow the use of mOTP passwords. Enter the mOTP
PIN Code and Secret that will be used to generate
the one-time passwords.
 2-Step Authentication via SMS Profile and/or
Mail Profile – Select the SMS and/or Mail profiles
and the destination SMS number and/or email
address for transmitting the password.
 Add – After entering the user name and password
above, click this button to create a new local user. The
new user will be shown on the Local User List
immediately.
 Edit – If you wish to change a user in the Local User List,
select it, perform the necessary modifications, and
click this button to update the user.
 Delete – If you wish to delete a user in the Local User
List, select it and click this button to remove it.
Administrator LDAP Enable LDAP/AD login for admin users – Select to allow
Setting authentication using an LDAP/Active Directory Server.
LDAP Server Profiles Setup – Click to set up the LDAP/Active
Directory server.
Click OK to save changes on the page, and you will be directed to the login screen. Please log
in with the new password.

V-1-4 User Password
This page allows you to set new password for user operation.
Item Description
Enable User Mode for Check this box to enable User Mode for web user interface
simple web configuration with the password typed here for simple web configuration.
The simple web user interface settings differ from those on
the full web user interface seen when logged in using the
administrator password.
Password Enter the password. The maximum length of the password is
31 characters.
Confirm Password Enter the password again for verification.
Password Strength Shows the security strength of the password specified above.
Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting.
Click OK to save changes on the page, and you will be directed to the login screen. Please
window will appear. Please log in with the new password.
Here are the steps involved in setting up the router for User Mode Access:
1. Navigate to System Maintenance>>User Password in the web user interface.
2. Check the box of Enable User Mode for simple web configuration to enable user mode
operation. Enter a new password in the field of New Password and click OK.

3. The following screen will appear. Simply click OK.
4. Log out the Vigor router web user interface by clicking the Logout button.
5. The following window will be shown. Enter the new user password in the Password field
and click Login.

6. The main screen with User Mode will be shown:
Only basic settings are available in User Mode. These are a subset of the Admin Mode
settings.
Info Setting in User Mode can be configured as same as in Admin Mode.

V-1-5 Login Page Greeting
When you want to access into the web user interface of Vigor router, the system will ask you
to offer username and password first. At that moment, the background of the web page is
blank and no heading will be displayed on the Login window. This page allows you to specify
login URL and the heading on the Login window if you have such requirement.
This section allows you to customize the login page by adding a message and/or setting the
page title.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to enable the login customization function.
Login Page Title Enter a brief description (e.g., Welcome to DrayTek) which
will be shown on the heading of the login dialog.
Welcome Message and Enter words or sentences here. It will be displayed for
Bulletin bulletin message. In addition, it can be displayed on the
login dialog at the bottom.
Note that do not enter URL redirect link here.
Preview Click to preview the customized login window based on the
settings entered on this page.
Set to Factory Default Click to return to the factory default setting.
Below shows an example of a customized login page with the values entered in the Login Page
Title and Welcome Message and Bulletin fields.

V-1-6 Configuration Backup
This function allows the backup and restoration of Vigor router settings.
Item Description
Restore This file is encrypted with password – Check the box and
enter a password for encrypting the configuration file.
Click the Select File button to specify a configuration file to
be restored.
Restore - Click to initiate restoration of configuration. If the
backup file is encrypted, you will be asked to enter the
password.
Backup Normal backup - Click it to perform the configuration
backup of this router.
Protect full file with password- Select to encrypt the
backup with a password. You will be prompted to enter the
password as shown below:
 Password – Enter a new password for encrypting the

configuration file.
 Confirm Password – Enter the new password again for
confirmation.
Backup - Click to initiate the backup process.

Backing up the Configuration
Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.
1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup.
2. Click the Backup button. Depending on your browser, you may be prompted to select a
location to save the file, or the file may be saved in the default download location of
your browser.
The configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named
config.cfg.
Info Configuration Backup does not include certificates stored on the router.
Please back up certificates separately by going to Certificate Management
>> Certificate Backup.
Restoring the Configuration

1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be
shown.
2. Click the Choose File button under Backup to bring up the open file dialog box to select
the configuration file to be uploaded and restored.
3. Click the Restore button and wait for few seconds.

V-1-7 Configuration Export
Configuration for Vigor3910 can be exported as an user-readable text-based (.exp) file which
can be applied to other Vigor router.
In addition, it is possible to import an ".exp" file from other DrayTek routers onto the
Vigor3910.
Item Description
Import This file is encrypted with password – Check the box and
enter a password for dencrypting the configuration file (if
the.exp file is encrypted).
Click the Select File button to specify an exp file.
Import - Click to import a configuration file. If the file is
encrypted, you will need to enter the password set on the
above password field.
Export Do not encrypt - The configuration file (.exp) will be output

as an fully user-readable text-based file.
Encrypt password fields - The configuration file (.exp) will
be output as a user-readable text-based file except for
password related fields (user passwords will be encrypted).
Protect full file with password - The configuration file is
protected by full encryption. The password will be needed
when importing the "exp" file on Vigor router.
Export - Click it to export the configuration of Vigor router
as a file with the extension of "exp".

V-1-8 Syslog/Mail Alert
SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router.
Item Description
SysLog Access Setup Enable - Check Enable to activate function of syslog.

Syslog Save to – Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog
server.
Router Name Display the name for such router configured in System
Maintenance>>Management.
If there is no name here, simply lick the link to access into
System Maintenance>>Management to set the router name.
Server IP / Hostname - The IP address / hostname of the
Syslog server.
Destination Port - Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.
Mail Syslog – Check the box to recode the mail event on
Syslog.
Enable syslog message - Check the box listed on this web
page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN,
User Access, Call, WAN, Router/DSL information to Syslog.
Mail Alert Setup Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.

Send a test e-mail - Make a simple test for the e-mail
address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address
first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail
address is available or not.
SMTP Server/SMTP Port - The IP address/Port number of the
SMTP server.

Mail To - Assign a mail address for sending mails out.
Return-Path - Assign a path for receiving the mail from
outside.
Use SSL - Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for
some e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.
Authentication - Check this box to activate this function
while using e-mail application.
Username - Type the user name for authentication.
Password - Type the password for authentication.
Enable E-mail Alert - Check the box to send alert message to
the e-mail box while the router detecting the item(s) you
specify here.
Click OK to save these settings.
For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:

1. Just set your monitor PC’s IP address in the field of Server IP Address
2. Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the
Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.

3. From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in
Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router.
Otherwise, you won’t succeed in retrieving information from the router.

V-1-9 Time and Date
This section allows you to configure settings related to the system date and time.
Item Description
Current System Time Click Inquire Time to retrieve the current time from the
time server.
Use Browser Time Select this option to let the router set its system time using
the time reported by the web browser.
Use Internet Time Select this option to let the router set its system time by
retrieving time information from the specified network time
server using the Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Time Server Enter the IP address / Host name of the time server.
Priority Select Auto or IPv6 First as the priority.
Time Zone Select the time zone where the router is located.
Enable Daylight Saving Check the box to enable Daylight Saving Time (DST), if it is
applicable to your location.
Advanced – Click to enter a custom schedule to enable DST.
Use the default time setting or set user defined time for your
requirement.
 Default – uses the default DST schedule for the time

zone.
 Customized: By Date – Select this option if DST starts
and ends on fixed dates.
 Customized: By Weekday - Select this option if DST
starts and ends on certain days of the week.
Automatically Update Select the time interval at which the router updates the
Interval system time.
Send NTP Request Specify a WAN interface to send NTP request for time
Through synchronization.
Select OK to save changes on the page, or Cancel to discard changes without saving.
V-1-10 SNMP
This section allows you to configure settings for SNMP and SNMPV3 services.
The SNMPv3 is more secure than SNMP through the use of encryption (supports AES and DES)
and authentication (supports MD5 and SHA) for the management needs.
Item Description

Enable SNMP Agent Check to enable SNMP function. Then, enable SNMPV1
agent/SNMPV2C agent.
Get Community Enter the Get Community string. The default setting is
public. Devices that send requests to retrieve information
using get commands must pass the correct Get Community
string.
The maximum allowed length is 23 characters.
Set Community Enter the Set Community string. The default setting is
private. Devices that send requests to change settings using
set commands must pass the correct Set Community string.
The maximum length of the text is 23 characters.
Manager Host IP (IPv4) Enter the IPv4 address of hosts that are allowed to issue
SNMP commands. If this field is left blank, any IPv4 LAN host
is allowed to issue SNMP commands.
Manager Host IP (IPv6) Enter the IPv6 address of hosts that are allowed to issue
SNMP commands. If this field is left blank, any IPv6 LAN host
is allowed to issue SNMP commands.
Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string. The default setting is
public. Devices that send unsolicited messages to the SNMP
console must pass the correct Trap Community string.
The maximum length of the text is 23 characters.
Notification Host IP (IPv4) Enter the IPv4 address of hosts that are allowed to send
SNMP traps.
Notification Host IP (IPv6) Enter the IPv6 address of hosts that are allowed to send
SNMP traps.
Trap Timeout The default setting is 10 seconds.
Enable SNMPV3 Agent Check it to enable SNMPV3.
USM User USM means user-based security mode.
Enter the username to be used for authentication. The
maximum allowed length is 23 characters.
Auth Algorithm Choose one of the hashing methods to be used with the
authentication algorithm.
Auth Password Enter a password for authentication. The maximum allowed

length is 23 characters.
Privacy Algorithm Choose one of the methods listed below as the privacy
algorithm.
Choose an encryption method as the privacy algorithm.

Privacy Password Type a password for privacy. The maximum length of the
text is limited to 23 characters.
Enter a password for privacy. The maximum allowed length is
23 characters.

V-1-11 Management
This page allows you to manage the settings for Internet/LAN Access Control, Access List from
Internet, Management Port Setup, TLS/SSL Encryption Setup, CVM Access Control and Device
Management.
The management pages for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols are different.
V-1-11-1 IPv4 Management Setup
Item Description
Router Name Enter the router name provided by ISP.
Default: Disable If enabled, the auto-logout function for the web user
Auto-Logout interface will be disabled.
The web user interface session will not terminate until you
manually click the Logout icon.

Enable Validation Code in If enabled, Vigor router will require users to enter a
Internet/LAN Access validation code as shown in an image when they log in.
Internet Access Control Allow management from the Internet – Select to allow
system administrators to login from the Internet, and then
select the specific services that are allowed to be remotely
administered.
Domain name allowed – If specified, only hosts belonging to
that domain name are allowed to manage the router over the
Internet.
Disable PING from the Internet - Select to reject all PING
packets from the Internet. For increased security, this
setting is enabled by default.
Access List from the The ability of system administrators to log into the router
Internet can be restricted to up to 10 specific hosts or networks.
Apply Access List to PING - When this option is checked and
Disable PING from the Internet is unchecked, pings
originating from the Internet will be accepted only if they
are from one of the IP addresses and/or subnet masks
specified below. This option has no effect if Disable PING
from the Internet is checked, such that no pings from the
Internet are accepted.
Index in IP Object - Enter the index of a configured IP
object.
IP / Mask - Show the IP address and/or subnet mask of the
selected IP object.
Management Port Setup User Define Ports - Check to specify custom port numbers
for the Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TR-069 and SSH servers.
Default Ports - Check to use standard port numbers for the
Telnet and HTTP servers.
Brute Force Protection Any client trying to access into Internet via Vigor router will
be asked for passing through user authentication. Such
feature can prevent Vigor router from attacks when a hacker
tries every possible combination of letters, numbers and
symbols until find out the correct combination of password.
Enable brute force login protection – Select to enable
detection of brute force login attempts.
Maximum login failure – Specify the maximum number of
failed login attempts before further login is blocked.
Penalty period – Set the lockout time after maximum
number of login attempts has been exceeded. The user will
be unable to attempt to log in until the specified time has
passed.
Blocked IP List – Display, in a new browser window, IP
addresses that are currently blocked from logging into the
router.
TLS/SSL Encryption Setup Enable SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0/1.1/1.2 – Check the box to
enable SSL 3.0/1.0/1.1/1.2 encryption protocols.
For improved security, the HTTPS and SSL VPN servers that

are built into the router have been upgraded to TLS 1.x
protocol. If you are using an old web browser (eg. IE 6.0) or
an old version of the SmartVPN Client, you may need to
enable SSL 3.0 to connect to the router. However, it is
recommended that you instead upgrade your web browser or
SmartVPN client to a version that supports TLS protocols that
are far more secure than SSL.
Select OK to save changes on the page.
V-1-11-2 IPv6 Management Setup
Item Description
Management Access Allow management from the Internet – Select to allow
Control system administrators to login from the Internet, and then
select the specific services that are allowed to be remotely
administered.
Disable PING from the Internet - Select to reject all PING
packets from the Internet. For increased security, this
setting is enabled by default.
Access List from the The ability of system administrators to log into the router
Internet can be restricted to up to 10 specific hosts or networks.
Apply Access List to PING - When this option is checked and
Disable PING from the Internet is unchecked, pings
originating from the Internet will be accepted only if they
are from one of the IP addresses and/or subnet masks
specified below. This option has no effect if Disable PING

from the Internet is checked, such that no pings from the
Internet are accepted.
Index in IPv6 Object - Enter the index of a configured IP
object.
IPv6 /Prefix - Show the IPv6 address and/or prefix of the
selected IP object.
V-1-11-3 LAN Access Control
Item Description
Allow management from Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login
LAN from LAN interface. There are several servers provided by
the system which allow you to manage the router from LAN
interface. Check the box(es) to specify.
Apply To Subnet Check the LAN interface for the administrator to use for
accessing into web user interface of Vigor router.
Index in IP Object- Type the index number of the IP object
profile. Related IP address will appear automatically.

V-1-12 Self-Signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is a unique identification for the device (e.g., Vigor router) which
generates the certificate by itself to ensure the router security. Such self-signed certificate is
signed with its own private key.
The self-signed certificate can be used for services such as SSL VPN and HTTPS. In addition, it
can be created for free by using a wide variety of tools.
Click Regeneration to open Regenerate Self-Signed Certificate window.

Enter all requested information including certificate name (used to differentiate different
certificates), subject alternative name type and relational settings for subject name. Then
click GENERATE.

V-1-13 Reboot System
The Web user interface may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System
Maintenance to bring up the following page.
Item Description
Reboot System Select one of the following options, and press the Reboot
Now button to reboot the router.
Using current configuration – Select this option to reboot
the router using the current configuration.
Using factory default configuration – Select this option to
reset the router’s configuration to the factory defaults
before rebooting.
Auto Reboot Time Schedule Profile - Select up to 4 user-configured schedules
Schedule to reboot the router on a scheduled basis.
Info When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web
settings, please click Reboot Now to reboot your router for ensuring normal
operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.

V-1-14 Firmware Upgrade
Download the newest firmware from DrayTek's web site or FTP site. The DrayTek web site is
www.DrayTek.com (or local DrayTek's web site) and FTP site is ftp.DrayTek.com.
Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to launch the Firmware Upgrade Utility.
Choose the right firmware by clicking Select. Then, click Upgrade. The system will upgrade
the firmware of the router automatically.
Click OK. The following screen will appear. Please execute the firmware upgrade utility first.
For the detailed information about firmware update, please go to Chapter 5.

V-1-15 Activation
There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by
means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.
After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF (refer to Web Content Filter Profile), it
is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.
Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing
http://myvigor.draytek.com.
Item Description
Activate via Interface Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating Web
Content Filter.
Activate The Activate link brings you accessing into www.vigorpro.com
to finish the activation of the account and the router.
Authentication Message As for authentication information of web filter, the process of
authenticating will be displayed on this field for your
reference.

V-1-16 Internal Service User List
User profiles (clients) defined and enabled in User Management>>User Profile will be
displayed in this page.
Such page allows you to turn on or turn off security authentication service (offered by inernal
RADIUS) for each user profile without accessing into the User Management configuration
page.
Item Description
User Name Display the name of the existed user profile. To modify the
detailed settings, simply click the user name link to access
into the web page for modification.
Radius Check the box to turn on the security authentication service
offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.
Uncheck the box to turn off ecurity authentication service
offered by internal RADIUS server for the user profile.
If you check the box next to such item, all of the user profiles
listed in this page will be enabled with RADIUS service
enabled vice versa.
Info For the detailed setting (such as IP address, port number) configuration of
internal RADIUS, refer to Applications>>RADIUS/TACACS+.

V-1-17 Dashboard Control
There are nine groups of setting information which can be displayed on Dashboard as a
reference for administrator/user. Except for Front Panel and System Information, the settings
information regarding to the groups listed on this page can be hidden if required.

V-2 Bandwidth Management
Sessions Limit
A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will
generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications
(e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over
resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can
use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.
Bandwidth Limit
The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of
bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to
make the bandwidth usage more efficient.
Quality of Service (QoS)

Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the
service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed
one important aspect of modern enterprise network.
One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their
transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If
other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in
the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay
or jitter (delay variation).
Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of
interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can
be throttled back to a lower speed. If there’s no defined priority to specify which packets
should be discarded (or in another term “dropped”) from an overflowing queue, packets of
sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect
application performance?
There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:
 Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for
high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.
 Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and
associated service types
The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on
the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the
headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for
HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.
One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated
Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP
Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes,
DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In
a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain
owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define
the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these
domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The
definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best
Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of
drop precedence in each class.

Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header
of bypassing traffic, to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing,
classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking
before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the
whole QoS-enabled network.
However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking
since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It’s not
easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole
network with merely Vigor router’s effort.

Web User Interface
Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.
V-2-1 Sessions Limit

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit.
Item Description
Enable/Disable Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit
session.
Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit
session.
Default Max Sessions - Defines the default session number

used for each computer in LAN.
Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Specific Limitation Start IP- Defines the start IP address for limit session.
End IP - Defines the end IP address for limit session.
Maximum Sessions - Defines the available session number
for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do
not set the session number in this field, the system will use
the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for
each index.
Add - Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allows you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.
Administration Message Type the words which will be displayed when reaches the
maximum number of Internet sessions permitted.
Default Message - Click this button to apply the default
message offered by the router.
Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.

V-2-2 Bandwidth Limit
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.
To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream
and downstream limit.
Item Description
Enable / Disable Enable - Click this button to activate the function of limit
bandwidth.
 IP Routed Subnet – Check this box to apply the
bandwidth limit to the second subnet specified in
LAN>>General Setup. It is available for IPv4 settings
only.
Disable - Click this button to close the function of limit
bandwidth.
Default Limit (Per User) TX Limit - Define the default speed of the upstream for each
computer in LAN.
RX Limit - Define the default speed of the downstream for

each computer in LAN.
Limitation List Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web
page.
Add Entry By – Specify an entry with an IP address (IP
address range) and limit for data transmission.
IP Range– All the IPs within the range defined will be
restricted by bandwidth limit defined by TX Limit and RX
Limit below.
 Start IP - Define the start IP address for limit
bandwidth.
 End IP - Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.
IP Object – All the IPs specified by the selected IP object or
IP group will be restricted by bandwith limit defined by TX
Limit and RX Limit below.
 IP Group – Specify an IP group by using the drop down
list.
 IP Object - Specify an IP object by using the drop down
list.
Each / Shared - Select Each to make each IP within the range
of Start IP and End IP having the same speed defined in TX
limit and RX limit fields; select Shared to make all the IPs
within the range of Start IP and End IP share the speed
defined in TX limit and RX limit fields.
TX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system
will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set
for each index.
RX limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific limitation
you set for each index.
Add - Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.
Edit - Allow you to edit the settings for the selected
limitation.
Delete - Remove the selected settings existing on the
limitation list.
Allow-Adjustment Allow user to use more bandwidth… - Check this box to
make the best utilization of available bandwidth.
Smart Bandwidth Limit Apply the below limit to users not in Limitation List… -
Check this box to apply the following limits to users not in
Limitation List and apply to the user more than sessions
defined.
TX Limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system
will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set
for each index.
RX Limit - Define the limitation for the speed of the
downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the
system will use the default speed for the specific limitation
you set for each index.
Time Schedule Schedule Profile - You can type in four sets of time schedule
for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in
Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the
number that you have set in that web page.

V-2-3 Quality of Service
In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.
Item Description
General Setup Index – Display the WAN interface number link that you can
edit.
Enable – Check the box to enable the QoS function for WAN
interface. If it is enabled, you can configure general QoS
setting for each WAN interface.
 Direction –Define which traffic the QoS Control settings
will apply to.
 IN- apply to incoming traffic only.
 OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.
 BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.
 Inbound/Outbound Bandwidth –Set the connecting
rate of data input/output for other WAN. For example, if
your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K
upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default
value is 10000kbps.
 Class 1 ~ 3 / Others –Define the ratio of bandwidth to
upstream speed and bandwidth to downstream speed.
There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first

Item Description
three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for
your necessity. In which, the “Others” field is used for
the packets which are not suitable for the three class
rules.
Status – Display the online statistics of WAN interface.
Class Rule Set detailed settings for the selected Class.
Index – Display the class number that you can edit.
Enable - Display the status of this class rule.
QoS Class - Display the QoS class level.
Local Address - Display the local IP address for the rule.
Remote Address - Display the remote IP address for the rule.
DSCP - Display the levels of the data for processing with QoS
control.
Service Type – Display detailed settings for the service type.
Add - Click it to create a class rule for QoS.
VoIP Prioritization Enable the First Priority for VoIP SIP/RTP - When this feature
is enabled, the VoIP SIP/UDP packets will be sent with highest
priority.
SIP UDP Port – Set a port number used for SIP.
Tag Outbound Traffic Add DSCP or Precedence Value for Class 1 to Class 3 - Check
the box to add DSCP or Precedence value to Class 1 to Class 3.
You can configure general setup for the WAN/LTE interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the
Service Type for the Class Rule for your request. Click the link (WAN1 to WAN8) under Index to
access into next page for the general setup of WAN interface. As to class rule, simply click the
Add link to access into next page for configuration.
Online Statistics
Display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference. This feature is available
only when the Quality of Service for WAN interface is enabled.

General Setup for WAN Interface
Click WAN interface number link to configure the limited bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN
interface.
Item Description
Enable UDP Bandwidth Set the limited bandwidth ratio. This is a protection of TCP
Control application traffic since UDP application traffic such as
streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.
Limited_bandwidth Ratio - The ratio typed here is reserved
for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
Outbound TCP ACK The difference in bandwidth between download and upload
Prioritize are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed
might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check
this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network
traffic.
Info The rate of outbound/inbound must be smaller than the real bandwidth to
ensure correct calculation of QoS. It is suggested to set the bandwidth value
for inbound/outbound as 80% - 85% of physical network speed provided by
ISP to maximize the QoS performance.

Edit the Class Rule for QoS
1. The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. To add,
edit or delete the class rule, please click the Add / Edit link of that one.
2. For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.
Item Description
Enable Check this box to invoke these settings.
IP Version Please specify which protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) will be used for
this rule.

Local IP Address Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for
the rule.
Remote IP Address Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on
LAN/WAN) for the rule.
Address Type – Determine the address type for the source

address.
For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.
For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
End IP address.
For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and
Subnet Mask.
DiffServ CodePoint All the packets of data will be divided with different levels
and will be processed according to the level type by the
system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for
processing with QoS control.
Service Type It determines the service type of the data for processing with
QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the
predefined service type from the Service Type drop down
list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the
one that you want for using by current QoS.
QoS Class Specify the QoS class (1, 2 or 3) for this rule.

By the way, you can set up to 20 rules for one Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please
select the radio button of that one and click Edit to open the rule edit page for modification.

Retag the Packets for Identification
Packets coming from LAN IP can be retagged through QoS setting. When the packets sent out
through WAN interface, all of them will be tagged with certain header and that will be easily
to be identified by server on ISP.
For example, in the following illustration, the VoIP packets in LAN go into Vigor router
without any header. However, when they go forward to the Server on ISP through Vigor router,
all of the packets are tagged with AF (configured in Bandwidth >>QoS>>Class) automatically.

V-3 User Management
User Management is a security feature which disallows any IP traffic (except DHCP-related
packets) from a particular host until that host has correctly supplied a valid username and
password. Instead of managing with IP address/MAC address, User Management function
manages hosts with user account. Network administrator can give different firewall policies
or rules for different hosts with different User Management accounts. This is more flexible
and convenient for network management. Not only offering the basic checking for Internet
access, User Management also provides additional firewall rules, e.g. CSM checking for
protecting hosts.
Info Filter rules configured under Firewall usually are applied to the host (the
one that the router installed) only. With user management, the rules can be
applied to every user connected to the router with customized profiles.

Web User Interface
V-3-1 General Setup

General Setup can determine the standard (rule-based or user-based) for the users controlled
by User Management. The mode (standard) selected here will influence the contents of the
filter rule(s) applied to every user.
Item Description
Mode Selection There are two modes offered here for you to choose. Each
mode will bring different filtering effect to the users
involved.
User-Based - If you choose such mode, the router will apply
the filter rules configured in User Management>>User

Profile to the users.
Rule-Based –If you choose such mode, the router will apply
the filter rules configured in Firewall>>General Setup and
Filter Rule to the users.
Authentication page Web Authentication - Choose the protocol for web
authentication.
Login Page Logo – A logo which can be used as an
identification of enterprise can be uploaded and displayed
on the login page. You can use the default one, blank page or
upload other image files (the size no mare than 524 × 352
pixel) to have an image of enterprise or have the effect of
advertisement.
Login Page Greeting - Such link allows you to access into the
setting page for login greeting. For detailed information,
refer to System Maintenance>>Login Page Greeting.
Display IP Address on tracking window – Check the box to
display the IP address of the client on the tracking window.
Landing Page Type the information to be displayed on the first web page
when the LAN user accessing into Internet via such router.

V-3-2 User Profile
This page allows you to set customized profiles (up to 200) which will be applied for users
controlled under User Management. Simply open User Management>>User Profile.
To set the user profile, please click any index number link to open the following page. Notice
that profile 1 (admin) and profile 2 (Dial-In User) are factory default settings. Profile 2 is
reserved for future use.

Item Description
Common Settings Enable this account - Check this box to enable such user
profile.
Username - Type a name for such user profile (e.g.,
LAN_User_Group_1, WLAN_User_Group_A,
WLAN_User_Group_B, etc). When a user tries to access
Internet through this router, an authentication step must be
performed first. The user has to type the User Name
specified here to pass the authentication. When the user
passes the authentication, he/she can access Internet via
this router. However the accessing operation will be
restricted with the conditions configured in this user profile.
characters.
Password - Type a password for such profile (e.g., lug123,
wug123,wug456, etc). When a user tries to access Internet
through this router, an authentication step must be
performed first. The user has to type the password specified
here to pass the authentication. When the user passes the

authentication, he/she can access Internet via this router
with the limitation configured in this user profile.
characters.
Confirm Password - Type the password again for
confirmation.
External Service Authentication - The router will
authenticate the dial-in user by itself or by external service
such as LDAP server or RADIUS server or TACACS+ server. If
LDAP, Radius or TACACS+ is selected here, it is not necessary
to configure the password setting above.
Login Settings Allow Authentication via- Any user (from LAN side or WLAN
side) tries to connect to Internet via Vigor router must be
authenticated by the router first. There are three ways
offered by the router for the user to choose for
authentication.
 Web – If it is selected, the user can type the URL of the
router from any browser. Then, a login window will be
popped up and ask the user to type the user name and
password for authentication. If succeed, a Welcome
Message (configured in User Management >> General
Setup) will be displayed. After authentication, the
destination URL (if requested by the user) will be
guided automatically by the router.
 Alert Tool – If it is selected, the user can open Alert
Tool and type the user name and password for
authentication. A window with remaining time of
connection for such user will be displayed. Next, the
user can access Internet through any browser on
Windows. Note that Alert Tool can be downloaded from
DrayTek web site.
 Telnet – If it is selected, the user can use Telnet
command to perform the authentication job.
Show Landing Page After Login - When a user tries to access
into the web user interface of Vigor router series with the
user name and password specified in this profile, he/she will
be lead into the web page configured in Landing Page field in
User Management>>General Setup. Check this box to
enable such function.
Idle Timeout - If the user is idle over the limitation of the
timer, the network connection will be stopped for such
user. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 10 minutes.
Auto Logout After – Such account will be forced to logout
after a certain time set here.
Pop up Time-Tracking Window - If such function is enabled,
a pop up window will be displayed on the screen with time
remaining for connection if Idle Timeout is set. However, the
system will update the time periodically to keep the
connection always on. Thus, Idle Timeout will not interrupt
the network connection.
Login Permission Schedule - You can type in four sets of
time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set
previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can
use the number that you have set in that web page.

Policy Max Login Devices - Such profile can be used by many users.
You can set the limitation for the number of users accessing
Internet with the conditions of such profile. The default
setting is 0 which means no limitation in the number of
users.
Enable Time Quota - Time quota means the total connection
time allowed by the router for the user with such profile.
Check the box to enable the function of time quota. The first
box displays the remaining time of the network connection.
The second box allows to type the number of time (unit is
minute) which is available for the user (using such profile) to
access Internet.
– Click this box to set and increase the time quota for
such profile.
– Click this box to decrease the time quota for such

profile.
Note: A dialog will be popped up to notify how many time
remained when a user accesses into Internet through
Vigor router successfully.
When the time is up, all the connection jobs including
network, IM, social media, facebook, and etc. will be
terminated.
Enable Data Quota - Data Quota means the total amount for
data transmission allowed for the user. The unit is MB/GB.
– Click this box to set and increase the data quota for
such profile.
– Click this box to decrease the data quota for such

profile.
Reset Quota Automaticlly To - Set default time quota and
data quota for such profile. When the scheduling time is up,
the router will use the default quota settings automatically.
Check it to use the default setting for time quota and data
quota.
 Time Limit – Type the value for the time manually.
 Data Limit – Type the value for the data manually.
Login Permission Schedule - When the scheduling time is
up, the router will reset the quota with user-defined
time/data values automatically.
Schedule – The router will reset the quota with user-defined
time/data values at the starting time configured in the
selected schedule profile.

PPPoE Login Setting Such user account will be used (1) by the client with the IP
address specified or (2) by the client with the MAC address
bound with the IP address, for accessing into Vigor3910 web
user interface.
PPPoE MAC Bind – Specify a MAC address which is limited and
used for such PPPoE account.
 Enable/Disable - Click it to enable/disable the function
of PPPoE MAC Bind.
MAC Address – Type the MAC address to be bound with the IP
address set below if PPPoE MAC Bind is enabled.
DHCP From – Use the drop down list to specify LAN/DMZ
interface. The IP address for binding with the MAC address
(above) set in the selected interface will be assigned from
the IP address set in the selected interface.
Static IP Address (optional)– Type an IP address.
V-3-3 User Group

This page allows you to bind several user profiles into one group. These groups will be used in
Firewall>>General Setup as part of filter rules.
Please click any index number link to open the following page.

Default object –
1 and 2
User defined
object – others
Item Description
Name Type a name for this user group.
Available User Objects You can gather user profiles (objects) from User Profile page
within one user group. All the available user objects that you
have created will be shown in this box. Notice that user
object, Admin and Dial-In User are factory settings. User
defined profiles will be numbered with 3, 4, 5 and so on.
Selected Keyword Objects
Click button to add the selected user objects in this
box.

V-3-4 User Online Status
This page displays the user(s) connected to the router and refreshes the connection status in
an interval of several seconds.
Item Description
Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of
refreshing data flow that will be done by the system
automatically.
Refresh Click this link to refresh this page manually.
Index Display the number of the data flow.
User Display the users which connect to Vigor router currently.
You can click the link under the username to open the user
profile setting page for that user.
IP Address Display the IP address of the device.
Profile Display the authority of the account.
Last Login Time Display the login time that such user connects to the router
last time.
Expired Time Display the expired time of the network connection for the
user.
Data Quota Display the quota for data transmission.
Idle Time Display the idle timeout setting for such profile.
Action Block - can avoid specified user accessing into Internet.
Unblock – allow the user to access into Internet.
Logout – the user will be logged out forcefully.

V-3-5 PPPoE User Online Status
PPPoE User Online Status displays connection information (including IP address, MAC
address,user name, transmitted bytes, received bytes, up time and so on) for the LAN client
who accesses Internet via the built-in PPPoE server of Vigor router.
Item Description
automatically.
IP Address Displays the IP address of the client in LAN.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the client in LAN.
User Name Displays the name of user connecting to Vigor router
currently. You can click the link under the username to open
the user profile setting page for that user.
Rx Bytes Displays the speed of octets received through such PPPoE
user.
Tx Bytes Displays the speed of octets transmitted through such PPPoE
user.
Up Time Displays the connection time of such PPPoE user.

Application Notes
A-1 How to authenticate clients via User Management

Before using the function of User Management, please make sure User-Based has been
selected as the Mode in the User Management>>General Setup page.
With User Management authentication function, before a valid username and password have
been correctly supplied, a particular client will not be allowed to access Internet through the
router. There are three ways for authentication: Web, Alert Tool and Telnet.
Authentication via Web

 If a LAN client who hasn’t passed the authentication opens an external web site in his
browser, he will be redirected to the router’s Web authentication interface first. Then,
the client is trying to access http://www.draytek.com and but brought to the Vigor
router. Since this is an SSL connection, some web browsers will display warning
messages.
 With Microsoft Internet Explorer, you may get the following warning message.
Please press Continue to this website (not recommended).

 With Mozilla Firefox, you may get the following warning message. Select I
Understand the Risks.

 With Chrome browser, you may get the following warning. Click Proceed
anyway.
After that, the web authentication window will appear. Input the user name and the
password for your account (defined in User Management) and click Login.

If the authentication is successful, the client will be redirected to the original web site
that he tried to access. In this example, it is http://www.draytek.com . Furthermore, you
will get a popped up window as the following. Then you can access the Internet.
Note, if you block the web browser to pop up any window, you will not see such window.
If the authentication is failed, you will get the error message, The username or password
you entered is incorrect. Please login again.
 In above description, you access an external web site to trigger the authentication. You
may also directly access the router’s Web UI for authentication. Both HTTP and HTTPS
are supported, for example http://192.168.1.1 or https://192.168.1.1 . Replace
192.168.1.1 with your router’s real IP address, and add the port number if the default
management port has been modified.
If the authentication is successful, you will get the Welcome Message that is set in the
User Management >> General Setup page.

With the default setup <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>
window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>, you will be redirected to
http://www.draytek.com . You may change it if you want. For example, you will get the
following welcome message if you enter Login Successful in the Welcome Message table.
Also you will get a Tracking Window if you don’t block the pop-up window.
 Don’t setup a user profile in User Management and a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile
with the same Username. Otherwise, you may get unexpected result. It is because the
VPN Remote Dial-in User profiles can be extended to the User profiles in User
Management for authentication.
There are two different behaviors when a User Management account and a VPN profile
share the same Username:

 If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is enabled in the VPN profile, the user profile in
User Management will always be invalid for Web authentication. For example, if
you create a user profile in User Management with chaochen/test as
username/password, while a VPN Remote Dial-in user profile with the same
username “chaochen” but a different password “1234”, you will always get error
message The username or password you entered is incorrect when you use
chaochen/test via Web to do authentication.
 If SSL Tunnel or SSL Web Proxy is disabled in the VPN profile, a User
Management account and a remote dial-in VPN profile can use the same
Username, even with different passwords. However, we recommend you to use
different usernames for different user profiles in User Management and VPN
profiles.

Authentication via Telnet
The LAN clients can also authenticate their accounts via telnet.
1. Telnet to the router’s LAN IP address and input the account name for the
authentication:
2. Type the password for authentication and press Enter. The message User login
successful will be displayed with the expired time (if configured).
Info Here expired time is “Unlimited” means the Time Quota function is not
enabled for this account. After login, this account will not be expired
until it is logout.
3. In the Web interface of router, the configuration page of Time Quota is shown as below.

4. If the Time Quota is set with “0” minute, you will get the following message which
means this account has no time quota.
If the Time Quota is enabled and time is not 0 minute,
You will get the following message. The expired time is shown after you login.
After you run out the available time, you can’t use this account any more until the
administrator manually adds additional time for you.

Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool
Authentication via Web or Telnet is convenient for users; however, it has some limitations.
The most advantage with VigorPro Alert Notice Tool to operate the authentication is the
ability to do auto login. If the timeout value set on the router for the user account has been
reached, the router will stop the client computer from accessing the Internet until it does an
authentication again. Authentication via VigorPro Alert Notice Tool allows user to setup the
re-authentication interval so that the utility will send authentication requests periodically.
This will keep the client hosts from having to manually authenticate again and again.
The configuration of the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool is as follows:
1. Click Authenticate Now!! to start the authentication immediately.
2. You may get the VigorPro Alert Notice Tool from the following link:
http://www.draytek.com/user/SupportDLUtility.php
Info 1 Any modification to the Firewall policy will break down the
connections of all current users. They all have to authenticate again
for Internet access.
Info 2 The administrator may check the current users from User Online
Status page.

A-2 How to use Landing Page Feature
Landing Page is a special feature configured under User Management. It can specify the
message, content to be seen or specify which website to be accessed into when users try to
access into the Internet by passing the authentication. Here, we take Vigor3910 Series router
as an example.
Example 1：Users can see the message for landing page after logging into Internet
successfully
1. Open the web user interface of Vigor3910.
2. Open User Management -> General Setup to get the following page. In the field of
Landing Page, please type the words of “Login Success”. Please note that the
maximum number of characters to be typed here is 255.
3. Now you can enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile
and click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.

4. In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.
5. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and
asks for username and password. Please enter the correct username and password.
6. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will see the message of Login Success from
the browser you use.

Example 2：The system will connect to http://www.draytek.com automatically after
logging into Internet successfully
1. In the field of Landing Page, please type the words as below:
“ <body stats=1><script language='javascript'>
window.location='http://www.draytek.com'</script></body>”
2. Next, enable the Landing Page function. Open User Management -> User Profile and
click one of the index number (e.g., index number 3) links.

3. In the following page, check the box of Landing page and click OK to save the settings.
4. Open any browser (e.g., FireFox, Internet Explorer). The logging page will appear and
asks for username and password. Please enter the correct username and password.
5. Click Login. If the logging is successful, you will be directed into the website of
www.draytek.com.

V-4 Hotspot Web Portal
The Hotspot Web Portal feature allows you to set up profiles so that LAN users could either be
redirected to specific URLs, or be shown messages when they first attempt to connect to the
Internet through the router. Users could be required to read and agree to terms and
conditions, or authenticate themselves prior to gaining access to the Internet. Other
potential uses include the serving of advertisements and promotional materials, and
broadcast of public service announcements.

Web User Interface
V-4-1 Profile Setup

Select Profile Setup to create or modify Portal profiles. Up to 4 profiles can be created to
meet different requirements according to LAN subnets, WLAN SSIDs, origin and destination IP
addresses, etc.
Item Description
Index Click the index number link to view or update the profile
settings.
Enable Check the box to enable the profile.
Comments Shows the description of the profile.
Login Mode Shows the login mode used by the profile. See the section
Login Mode for details.
Applied Interface Shows the interfaces to which this profile applies.
Preview Click this button to preview the Hotspot Web Portal page that
will be displayed to users.
V-4-1-1 Login Method

There are five login methods to choose from for authenticating network clients: Skip Login,
Click Through, Social Login, PIN Login, and Social or PIN Login. Each login mode will present
a different web page to users when they connect to the network.
(A) Skip Login, landing page only

This mode does not perform any authentication. The user will be redirected to the landing
page. The user can then leave the landing page to visit other websites.
(B) Click-through
The following page will be shown to the users when they first attempt to access the Internet
through the router. After clicking Accept on the page, users will be directed to the landing
page (defined in Captive Portal URL) and be granted access to the Internet.
(C) Various Hotspot Login

An authentication page will appear when users attempt to access the Internet for the first
time via the router. After authenticating themselves using a Facebook account, Google
account, PIN code, password for RADIUS sever, they will be directed to the landing page and
be granted access to the Internet.
(D) External Portal Server

External RADIUS server will authenticate the users when they attempt to access the Internet
for the first time via the router.

V-4-1-2 Steps for Configuring a Web Portal Profile
Login Method
Click the index link (e.g., #1) of the selected profile to display the following page.
Item Description
Enable this profile Check to enable this profile.
Comments Enter a brief description to identify this profile.
Portal Server
Portal Method There are four methods to be selected as for portal server.
When Skip Loging, landing page only or Click through is selected as Portal Method
Captive Portal URL Enter the captive portal URL.

When Various Hotspot Login is selected as Portal Method
Login Methods This setting is available when Various Hotspot Login is selected as
the portal method.
Choose Login Method - Select one or more desired login methods.
 Login with Facebook
 Login with Google
 Receive PIN via SMS
 Login with RADIUS
Facebook This setting is available when Login with Facebook is selected as
(Login with the login method.
Facebook) Facebook APP ID - Enter a valid Facebook developer app ID.
If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-1 How to
create a Facebook App ID for Web Portal Authentication for
instructions on obtaining an APP ID.
Facebook APP Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID
entered above.
Refer to section A-1 How to create a Facebook App ID for Web
Portal Authentication for details.
Google This setting is available when Login with Google is selected as the
(Login with Google) login method.
Google App ID - Enter a valid Google app ID.
If you do not already have an app ID, refer to section A-2 How to
create a Google App ID for Web Portal Authentication for
instructions on obtaining an APP ID.
Google App Secret - Enter the secret configured for the APP ID
entered above.
Refer to section A-2 How to create a Google APP ID for Web Portal
Authentication for details.
SMS Provider This setting is available when Receive PIN via SMS is selected as
(Receive PIN via SMS) the login method.
Receiving PIN via SMS Provider - Select the SMS Provider used to
send PIN notifications SMS providers are configured in Objects
Setting >> SMS / Mail Service Object.
Radius Server This setting is available when Login with RADIUS is selected as the
(Login with RADIUS) login method.
Authentication Method – Click link to configure the external
RADIUS server for authenticating web portal clients.
RADIUS MAC Authentication – Check Enable to activate user
authentication by MAC address.
MAC Address Format – Select the MAC address format that is used
by the RADIUS server.
RADIUS NAS-Identifier - It is an attribute of the RADIUS server,
used by a client as an identification on a RADIUS server. Enter a
string with less than 32 characters.
When External Portal Server is selected as Portal Method
Redirection URL Enter the URL to which the client will be redirected.
RADIUS Server Authentication Method - To configure the RADIUS server, click the
External RADIUS Server link and you will be presented with the

configuration page.
RADIUS MAC Authentication - If the RADIUS server supports
authentication by MAC address, enable RADIUS MAC
Authentication and select the MAC address format that is used by
the RADIUS server.
RADIUS NAS-Identifier - It is an attribute of the RADIUS server,
used by a client as an identification on a RADIUS server. Enter a
string with less than 32 characters.
Save and Next Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
Cancel Click to save the configuration on this page and proceed to the
next page.
If you have chosen Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal
method, skip to step 4 Whitelisting below.
Otherwise, proceed to configure the login page by following steps 2 and 3.

Background
If you have selected a Login Mode that requires authentication, select a background for the
login page.
Item Description
Choose Login Select either Color Background or Image Background as the login
Background page background scheme.
Browser Tab Title Enter the text to be shown as the webpage title in the browser.

Logo Image The DrayTek Logo will be displayed by default. However, you can
enter HTML text or upload an image to replace the default logo.
Login Method Select the background color of the login panel from the predefined
Background Color color list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value.
Click Preview to preview the selected color.
Opacity (10 ~ 100) Available when Image Background is selected. Set the opacity of
the background image.
Background Image Available when Image Background is selected. Click Browse… to
select an image file (.JPG or .PNG format), then click Upload to
upload it to the router.
next page.
Cancel Click to abort the configuration process and return to the profile
summary page.
If you have selected Skip Login, landing page only or External Portal Server as the portal
method, proceed to Step 4 Whitelist Setting; otherwise, continue to Step 3 Login Page Setup.

Login Page Setup
In this step you can configure settings for the login page.
Click Through
This section describes the Login Page setup if you have selected Click Through as the Login
Method.
Item Description
Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.
Terms and Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions

Conditions hyperlink text.
Description
Terms and Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up
Conditions Content window.
Accept Button Enter the text to be displayed on the accept button
Description
Accept Button Color Select the color of the accept button from the predefined color
list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click
Preview to preview the selected color.
next page.
summary page.

Various Hotspot Login
This section describes the Login Page setup step if you have selected Various Hotspot Login
the login method. You will see only settings that are relevant to the selected login method(s).
Settings that are common to Facebook, Google, PIN, and RADIUS authentication are:
Item Description
Welcome Message Enter the text to be displayed as the welcome message.
Terms and Enter the text to be displayed as the Terms and Conditions
Conditions hyperlink text.
Description
Terms and Enter the text to be displayed in the Terms and Conditions pop-up
Conditions Content window.

If you have selected Facebook login, the setting will appear:
Item Description
Facebook Login Enter the text to be displayed on the Facebook login button.
Description
If you have selected Google login, the setting will appear:
Item Description
Google Login Enter the text to be displayed on the Google login button.
Description

If you have selected PIN login, these settings will appear:
Item Description
Hint Message for PIN Enter the text used to suggest users to choose SMS authentication.
Receiving PIN via Enter the text to be displayed on the button that the user clicks to
SMS Description receive an SMS PIN.
Receiving PIN via Enter the message to be sent by SMS to inform the user of the PIN.
SMS Content The PIN variable is specified by <PIN> within the message.
Enter PIN Enter message to be displayed in the PIN textbox to prompt the
Description user to enter the PIN.
Submit Button Enter the text to be displayed on the submit PIN button
Description
Submit Button Color Select the color of the submit button from the predefined color
list, or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click
Preview to preview the selected color.

If you have selected RADIUS account login, these settings will appear:
Item Description
Hint Message for Enter the text used to prompt the user to login.
RADIUS
RADIUS Account Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the username.
Description
RADIUS Password Enter the text to prompt the user to enter the password.
Description
Login Button Enter the text to be displayed on the login button.
Description
Login Button Color Select the color of the login button from the predefined color list,
or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview
to preview the selected color.
And finally, the save and cancel buttons are always displayed.
Item Description
next page.
summary page.

2nd-stage Page for PIN Login
If you have selected PIN Login as the login method, you will also need to configure the page
that is displayed to users when they request a PIN.
Item Description
Back Button Enter text for the label of the hyperlink to return to the previous
Description page.
PIN Code Message Enter text to be displayed as the body text on the page.
Default Country Select the default country code to be displayed using the dropdown

Code menu.
Enter Mobile Enter message to be displayed in the mobile number textbox to
Number Description prompt the user to enter the mobile number.
Send Button Enter the label text of the send button.
Description
Send Button Color Select the color of the send button from the predefined color list,
or select Customize Color and enter the RGB value. Click Preview
to preview the selected color.
Send Succeeded Enter text to be displayed to notify the user after the PIN has been
Message sent.
next page.
summary page.

Whitelist Setting
In this step you can configure the whitelist settings. Users are allowed to send and receive
traffic that satisfies whitelist settings.
Item Description
NAT Rules To prevent web portal settings from conflicting with NAT rules
resulting in unexpected behavior, select the NAT rules that are
allowed to bypass the web portal. Hosts listed in selected NAT
rules can always access the Internet without being intercepted by
the web portal.
Dest Domain Enter up to 30 destination domains that are allowed to be
accessed.
Dest IP Enter up to 30 destination IP addresses that are allowed to be
accessed.
Dest Port Enter up to 30 destination protocols and ports that are allowed
through the router.
Source IP Enter up to 30 source IP addresses that are allowed through the
router.
next page.
summary page.

More Options
In this step you can configure advanced options for the Hotspot Web Portal.
Item Description
Quota Management
Expired Time After Enter the time duration that users are allowed to have Internet
Activation access after logging in.

Quota Policy Profile Choose a policy profile to apply to web portal clients.
Web Portal Options
HTTPS Redirection If this option is selected, unauthenticated clients accessing HTTPS
websites will be redirected to the login page, but the browser may
alert the user of certificate errors. If this option is not selected,
attempts to access to HTTPS website will time out without
redirection.
Captive Portal If this option is selected, the web portal page is triggered
Detection automatically when an unauthenticated client tries to access the
Internet. This function is not available when the Login Mode is
Social Login, as the web portal page may not be shown correctly
due to the limitations of the operating system’s built-in Captive
Portal Detection.
Landing Page After Authentication
Fixed URL Specifies the webpage that will be displayed after the user has
successfully authenticated.
The user will be redirected to the specified URL. This could be used
for displaying advertisements to users, such as guests requesting
wireless Internet access in a hotel.
User Requested URL The user will be redirected to the URL they initially requested.
Bulletin Message The message configured here will be briefly shown for a few
seconds to the user.
Default Message – This button is enabled when Bulletin Message is
selected. Click to load the default text into the bulletin message
textbox.
Force Landing Page This option is useful for mobile phone user.
Stay The mobile phone users can access into Internet by means of Wi-Fi
connection. In general, when Captive Portal Detection is enabled
on Vigor router, the login page will appear once the mobile phone
detects the Wi-Fi signal. After entering the username and password
(for authentication), the landing page will appear first on the
screen of the mobile phone.
Yet, some mobile phone will skip the landing page and access the
Internet instead. This feature can force the landing page to stay on
the screen of the mobile phone for a while.
Enable - Select it to enter the period of time for keeping the
landing page.
Applied Interfaces
Subnet The current Hotspot Web Portal profile will be in effect for the
selected subnets.
Finish Click to complete the configuration.
summary page.

V-4-2 Quota Management
The system administrator can specify bandwidth and sessions quota which is only applicable
to the web portal clients.
Settings configured in Quota Management will override the policies set in Bandwidth
Management>>Bandwidth Limit and Bandwidth Management>>Limit.
Item Description
Bandwidth Limit Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth
Management>>Bandwidth Limit.
Session Limit Check the box to override the policy configured in Bandwidth
Management>>Session Limit.
Quota Policy Profile Add - Create up to 20 policy profiles in such page.

To create a new quotal policy profile, click Add to open the followining page.
Item Description
Profile Name Enter a name for a new profile.
Account Validity Set the duration for which the login is valid.
Expired Time After the First Login – Sets the days, hours, and
minutes. After the login has expired, Vigor router will block the
client from accessing the network/Internet.
Idle Timeout – When this option is selected, Vigor router will
terminate the network connection if the is no activity from the
user after the specified idle time has passed.
Device Control Set the maximum number of devices that can be connected for
each account, and the time restriction for the client accessing
Internet via the web portal.
Devices Allowed per account – Use the drop-down list to select
the maximum number of devices that can be connected to the
network using the same account.
Reconnection Time Restriction – Blocks the account from being
used to connect devices to the network in one of two ways:
 At …. Everyday – After the login expires, the account cannot
be used to connect devices to the network until the set time
of day.
 Hours.. min – After the login expires, the account cannot be
used to connect devices to the network for a set period of
time.
Bandwidth and Bandwidth Limit – Check the box to configure bandwidth limit for

Session Limit web portal client.
 Download/Upload Limits – Set the maximum upload and
download speeds.
Session Limit- Check the box to configure a maximum session limit
for web portal clients.

Application Notes
A-1 How to allow users login to Vigor’s Hotspot with their social media accounts
(e.g., Facebook & Google)
Vigor Router supports Hotspot Web Portal function. The network administrator can set Vigor
Router as a Hotspot provider with web authentication and allow users to log in with their
social media accounts, such as Facebook and Google. We demonstrate how to set up the
hotspot web portal with Facebook login in the following paragraphs.
Vigor Router Setup

1. Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.
2. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available index.

3. Enter the values as the following figure.
(a) Click Enable this profile.

(b) Enter the comments.
(c) Select Various Hotspot Login for Portal Method.
(d) Choose Login with Facebook or Login with Google as Login Method.
If Login with Facebook is selected, the protocol of the Captive Portal URL need
to be changed to HTTPS instead of HTTP because Facebook force to use HTTPS
URL in their policy.
(e) Enter the APP ID and secret.
(f) Click Save and Next.

4. Choose the Color Background, customize the information a logo color, and click Save
and Next.
You can click the Step Icon on the top of the page to go to the step you want. The router
will save your setting automatically.

Or choose the Image Background, customize the information and background image,
and click Save and Next.

5. Customize the descriptions on the login page, then click Save and Next.
6. You can set the Whitelist for the profile here to allow specific clients to access the
internet or certain websites can be visited without login.

7. Set up the Expired Time After Activation and Landing Page After Activation that
Hotspot clients will see after they login successfully. Finally, select the interfaces to
which you would like this hotspot profile apply to, then click Finish to save the setting.
8. Then the Hotspot setup is finished. You may click Preview to check the login page.

Hotspot Clients Login
9. Now, when clients connect to the selected router interface, and try to access internet,
they will be redirected to "portal.draytek.com".
 Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot verify server
identity, the clients would need to tap "Continue" before they can proceed to
portal.draytek.com.
 The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this domain name
is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS to make sure the domain
name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.
10. Tap on a login method, and it will open the social media login page. Enter the social
media accounts and password to log in.

11. If the credentials are correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page and be
able to access the Internet afterward.
User Information
Network administrator can plug the USB disk to router, to record the basic information of the
users who connect to the Wi-Fi and login with their social media accounts. The users' basic
information will be listed on Hotspot Web Portal >> Users Information page.

A-2 How to allow hotspot clients to get login PIN code via SMS?
Since 3.8.4.3 version firmware, Vigor Router can act as a hotspot gateway and provide
internet access only to the authenticated clients. Network Administrator may set up the
router to allow hotspot client to get the login PIN code from an SMS message. This note is
going to demonstrate how to set up Vigor Router as a hotspot gateway and be able to send the
PIN code to clients by SMS messages.
Vigor Router Setup

1. Make sure the router is connected to the Internet.
2. Create an SMS Object to send SMS messages. Go to Objects Setting >> SMS Service
Object, and click on an available profile.

3. Enter the Service Provider details, and click OK to apply.
4. Go to Hotspot Web Portal >> Profile Setup, click on an available profile.
5. Enable the profile, give a comment, and choose “PIN Code Login”. Then click Next.

6. Choose a login page design, customize the details, and click Next.
7. Edit the message on the login page, and click Next.
8. Edit the details for SMS settings, then click Next.

9. Edit the landing page, choose the interfaces to which the SMS login should apply, and then
click Finish.
10. Now, the hotspot settings are applied to the selected interfaces. You may click Preview
to check how the login page looks.

Hotspot Client Login
11. If the client connected to the selected interface of the router and try to open a webpage,
they will be redirected to hotspot login page. If they do not have a password yet, they can
click on the button to get a password.

Info  Due to security concerns, the browser might warns that it cannot
verify server identity, the clients would need to tap "continue" before
they can proceed to portal.draytek.com.
 The client might not be able to access "portal.draytek.com" if this
domain name is resolved by a DNS server on LAN. If so, set up LAN DNS
to make sure the domain name will be resolved to the router's LAN IP.
12. Enter the mobile phone number to receive the SMS message.

13. The number will get a message about the password.
14. Enter the password on the login page, and click Login.

15. If the password is correct, the client will be redirected to the landing page, and after that,
they will be able to surf the Internet.

Part VI Others
Define objects such as IP address, service type,

keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.

VI-1 Objects Settings
Define objects such as IP address, service type, keyword, file extension and others. These
pre-defined objects can be applied in CSM.

Web User Interface
VI-1-1 IP Object
For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring
router’s settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for
using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all
the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address).
You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.

Item Description
View Use the drop down list to choose a type (Single Address,
Range Address, Subnet Address, Mac Address or all) that IP
object with the selected type will be shown on this page.
Search Type a string of the IP object that you want to search.
Index Display the profile number that you can configure.
Name Display the name of the object profile.
Address Display the IP address configured for the object profile.
Export IP Object Usually, the IP objects can be created one by one through
the web page of Objects>>IP Object. However, to a user
who wants to save more time in bulk creating IP objects, a
quick method is offered by Vigor router to modify the IP
objects with a single file, a CSV file.
All of the IP objects (or the template) can be exported as a
file by clicking Download. Then the user can open the CSV
file through Microsoft Excel and modify all the IP objects at
the same time.
Backup the current IP Objects with a CSV file – Click it to
backup current IP objecsts as a CSV file. Such file can be

restored for future use.
Download the default CSV template to edit – After clicking
it, press Download to store the default CSM template (a table
without any input data) to your hard disk.
Download – Download the CSV file from Vigor router and
store in your hard disk.
Restore IP Object Select – Click it to specify a predefined CSV file.
Restore – Import the selected CSV file onto Vigor router.
To set a new profile, please do the steps listed below:

1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for configuration in details.
2. The configuration page will be shown as follows:
Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface Choose a proper interface.
For example, the Direction setting in Edit Filter Rule will
ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN/RT/VPN or any
IP address. If you choose LAN/RT/VPN as the Interface here,
and choose LAN/RT/VPN as the direction setting in Edit
Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses specified with LAN
/RT/VPN interface will be opened for you to choose in Edit
Filter Rule page.
Address Type Determine the address type for the IP address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IP address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPs
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
IP address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IP address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address Type the start IP address for Single Address type.

End IP Address Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected.
Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.
Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
4. After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to save the configuration. Below is
an example of IP objects settings.

VI-1-2 IP Group
This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.
Item Description
Name Display the name of the group profile.


Item Description
Name Enter a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Interface Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP
objects with the specified interface.
Available IP Objects All the available IP objects with the specified interface
chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IP Objects Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
VI-1-3 IPv6 Object

You can set up to 64 sets of IPv6 Objects with different conditions.
Item Description

Item Description
allowed.
Address Type Determine the address type for the IPv6 address.
Select Single Address if this object contains one IPv6 address
only.
Select Range Address if this object contains several IPv6s
within a range.
Select Subnet Address if this object contains one subnet for
IPv6 address.
Select Any Address if this object contains any IPv6 address.
Select Mac Address if this object contains Mac address.
Mac Address Type the MAC address of the network card which will be
controlled.
Start IP Address Type the start IP address for Single Address type.
End IP Address Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is
selected.
Prefix Length Type the number (e.g., 64) for the prefix length of IPv6
address.
Invert Selection If it is checked, all the IPv6 addresses except the ones listed
above will be applied later while it is chosen.
3. After finishing all the settings, please click OK to save the configuration.

VI-1-4 IPv6 Group
This page allows you to bind several IPv6 objects into one IPv6 group.
Item Description


Item Description
allowed.
Available IPv6 All the available IPv6 objects with the specified interface
Objects chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IPv6 Objects Click >> button to add the selected IPv6 objects in this box.
VI-1-5 Service Type Object

You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.
Item Description

Item Description
allowed.
Protocol Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.
Source/Destination Source Port and the Destination Port columns are available
Port for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols.
The filter rule will filter out any port number.
(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
one port; when the first and last values are different, it
indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates
all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and
last values are different, it indicates that all the ports
except the range defined here are available for this service
type.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this
profile.

VI-1-6 Service Type Group
This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.
Item Description

1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Group column for configuration in details.

Item Description
allowed.
Available Service All the available service objects that you have added on
Type Objects Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this
box.
Selected Service Type Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.
Objects

VI-1-7 Keyword Object
You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web
Content Filter Profile.
Item Description

Item Description
Name Type a name for this profile, e.g., game. Maximum 15
characters are allowed.
Contents Type the content for such profile. For example, type
gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the
page with gambling information will be watched out and be
passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall
settings.

VI-1-8 Keyword Group
This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set
here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL /Web Content Filter Profile.
Item Description


Item Description
Name Type a name for this group. Maximum 15 characters are
allowed.
Available Keyword You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page
Objects within one keyword group. All the available Keyword
objects that you have created will be shown in this box.
Selected Keyword
Objects Click button to add the selected Keyword objects in
this box.
VI-1-9 File Extension Object

This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter.
All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to
the chosen action.
Item Description

1. Click the number (e.g., #1) under Profile column for configuration in details.
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for this profile. The maximum length of the
3. Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be
processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.

VI-1-10 SMS/Mail Service Object
SMS Service Object

This page allows you to set ten profiles which will be applied in Application>>SMS/Mail Alert
Service.
Item Description
settings.
Profile Display the name for such SMS profile.
SMS Provider Display the service provider which offers SMS service.

1. Click the SMS Provider tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for
configuration in details.

Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such SMS profile. The maximum length of
the name you can set is 31 characters.
Service Provider Use the drop down list to specify the service provider which
offers SMS service.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to
selected SMS provider.
characters.
Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to
characters.
Quota Type the number of the credit that you purchase from the
service provider chosen above.
Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the
standard route.
Sending Interval To avoid quota being exhausted soon, type time interval for
sending the SMS.

Customized SMS Service
Vigor router offers several SMS service provider to offer the SMS service. However, if your
service provider cannot be found from the service provider list, simply use Index 9 and Index
10 to make customized SMS service. The profile name for Index 9 and Index 10 are fixed.
You can click the number (e.g., #9) under Index column for configuration in details.
Item Description
Profile Name Display the name of this profile. It cannot be modified.
Service Provider Type the website of the service provider.
Type the URL string in the box under the filed of Service
Provider. You have to contact your SMS provider to obtain
the exact URL string.
Username Type a user name that the sender can use to register to

characters.
Password Type a password that the sender can use to register to
characters.
Quota Type the total number of the messages that the router will
send out.
Sending Interval Type the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
Mail Service Object

Service.
Item Description
settings.
Profile Display the name for such mail server profile.

1. Click the Mail Server tab, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index column for
configuration in details.
Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such mail service profile. The maximum
length of the name you can set is 31 characters.
SMTP Server Type the IP address of the mail server.
SMTP Port Type the port number for SMTP server.
Sender Address Type the e-mail address of the sender.
Use SSL Check this box to use port 465 for SMTP server for some
e-mail server uses https as the transmission method.
Authentication The mail server must be authenticated with the correct
username and password to have the right of sending message
out. Check the box to enable the function.
Username – Type a name for authentication. The maximum
Password – Type a password for authentication. The
maximum length of the password you can set is 31
characters.
Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out.

VI-1-11 Notification Object

Service.
You can set an object with different monitoring situation.

1. Open Object Setting>>Notification Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index
column for configuration in details.

Item Description
Profile Name Type a name for such notification profile. The maximum
Category Display the types that will be monitored.
Status Display the status for the category. You can check the box
you want to be monitored.
For example, the check box of CPE firmware Upgrade Fail
under the category of Central VPN Management is checked.
Once such profile is enabled, Vigor router system will send
out notification to the recipient via SMS.

VI-1-12 String Object
This page allows you to set string profiles which will be applied in route policy (domain name
selection for destination), hotspot web portal and etc.
Item Description
Add Click it to open the following page for adding a new string
object.
Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all of the settings in this page.
Index Display the number link of the string profile.
String Display the string defined.
Clear Choose the string that you want to remove. Then click this
check box to delete the selected string.
Below shows an example to apply string object (in Route Policy):

VI-1-13 Country Object
The country object profile can determine which country/countries shall be blocked by the
Vigor router’s Firewall.
The country object, by grouping IP addresses for multiple countries, can be applied by other
functions such as router policy destination (refer to the following figure for example).

1. Open Object Setting>>Country Object, and click the number (e.g., #1) under Index
column for configuration in details.

Item Description
Name Type a name for such profile. The maximum length of the
Available Country / Select any country from Available Country. Click >> to move
Selected Country the selected country and place on Selected Country.
Check the box(es) for the country/countries to be blocked by
Firewall.
Note that one country profile can contain 1 up to 16
countries.

Application Notes
A-1 How to Send a Notification to Specified Phone Number via SMS Service in
WAN Disconnection
Follow the steps listed below:
2. Configure relational objects first. Open Object Settings>>SMS/Mail Server Object to
get the following page.
Index 1 to Index 8 allows you to choose the built-in SMS service provider. If the SMS
service provider is not on the list, you can configure Index 9 and Index 10 to add the new
service provider to Vigor router.
3. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure the SMS Provider
setting. In the following page, type the username and password and set the quota that
the router can send the message out.

4. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. Now you have finished
the configuration of the SMS Provider profile setting.
5. Open Object Settings>>Notification Object to configure the event conditions of the

notification.
6. Choose any index number (e.g., Index 1 in this case) to configure conditions for sending
the SMS. In the following page, type the name of the profile and check the Disconnected
and Reconnected boxes for WAN to work in concert with the topic of this paper.

7. After finished the settings, click OK to return to previous page. You have finished the
configuration of the notification object profile setting.
8. Now, open Application >> SMS / Mail Alert Service. Use the drop down list to choose
SMS Provider and the Notify Profile (specify the time of sending SMS). Then, type the
phone number in the field of Recipient (the one who will receive the SMS).
9. Click OK to save the settings. Later, if one of the WAN connections fails in your router,
the system will send out SMS to the phone number specified. If the router has only one
WAN interface, the system will send out SMS to the phone number while reconnecting
the WAN interface successfully.

Remark: How the customize the SMS Provider
Choose one of the Index numbers (9 or 10) allowing you to customize the SMS Provider. In the
web page, type the URL string of the SMS provider and type the username and password. After
clicking OK, the new added SMS provider will be added and will be available for you to specify
for sending SMS out.


Part VII Troubleshooting
This part will guide you to solve abnormal situations if
you cannot access into the Internet after installing
the router and finishing the web configuration.

VII-1Diagnostics
This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet
after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to
check your basic installation status stage by stage.
 Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.
 Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.
 Pinging the router from your computer.
 Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.
 Backing to factory default setting if necessary.
If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to
contact your dealer or DrayTek technical support for advanced help.

Web User Interface
Fisrt, take a look at the menu items under Diagnostics. Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way
to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router.
VII-1-1 Dial-out Triggering

Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Triggering to open the web page. The internet
connection (e.g., PPPoE) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.
Item Description
Decoded Format It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP
(remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.
Refresh Click it to reload the page.

VII-1-2 Routing Table
Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.
Item Description

VII-1-3 ARP Cache Table
Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an
Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.
Item Description

VII-1-4 IPv6 Neighbour Table
The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IPv6
address. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address
conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click IPv6 Neighbour Table to open the web page.
Item Description

VII-1-5 DHCP Table
The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in
diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.
Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page.
Item Description
Index It displays the connection item number.
IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified
PC.
MAC Address It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP
assigned IP address for it.
Leased Time It displays the leased time of the specified PC.
HOST ID It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.

VII-1-6 NAT Sessions Table
Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the list page.
Item Description
Private IP:Port It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.
#Pseudo Port It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.
Peer IP:Port It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote
host.
Interface It displays the representing number for different interface.

VII-1-7 DNS Cache Table
Click Diagnostics and click DNS Cache Table to open the web page.
The record of domain Name and the mapping IP address for answering the DNS query from
LAN will be stored on Vigor router’s Cache temporarily and displayed on Diagnostics >> DNS
Cache Table.
Item Description
Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.
When an entry’s TTL is Check the box the type the value of TTL (time to live) for
larger than…. each entry. Click OK to enable such function.
It means when the TTL value of each DNS query reaches the
threshold of the value specified here, the corresponding
record will be deleted from router’s Cache automatically.

VII-1-8 Ping Diagnosis
Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to open the web page.
or
Item Description
IPV4 / IPV6 Choose the interface for such function.
Ping through Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you
want to ping through or choose Auto to be determined by the
router automatically.
Ping to Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you

want to ping.
IP Address Type the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.
Ping IPv6 Address Type the IPv6 address that you want to ping.
Run Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be
displayed on the screen.

VII-1-9 Data Flow Monitor
This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data
in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth
Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoking Data
Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.
Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address,
TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.
Item Description
Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function.

automatically.
Index Display the number of the data flow.
IP Address Display the IP address of the monitored device.
TX rate (kbps) Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.
RX rate (kbps) Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.
Sessions Display the session number that you specified in Limit
Session web page.
Action Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet
within 5 minutes.
Unblock –The device with the IP address will be blocked for
five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the
session column. Click it to cancel the IP address blocking.
Current /Peak/Speed Current means current transmission rate and receiving rate
for WAN interface.
Peak means the highest peak value detected by the router in
data transmission.
Speed means line speed specified in WAN>>General Setup.
If you do not specify any rate at that page, here will display
Auto for instead.

VII-1-10 Traffic Graph
Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to open the web page. Choose
WAN1/WAN3/WAN5/WAN6/WAN7/WAN8 Bandwidth, Sessions, daily or weekly for viewing
different traffic graph. Click Reset to zero the accumulated RX/TX (received and transmitted)
data of WAN. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.
The horizontal axis represents time. Yet the vertical axis has different meanings. For
WAN1/WAN3/WAN5/WAN6/WAN7/WAN8 Bandwidth chart, the numbers displayed on vertical
axis represent the numbers of the transmitted and received packets in the past.
For Sessions chart, the numbers displayed on vertical axis represent the numbers of the NAT
sessions during the past.

VII-1-11 Trace Route
Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace
the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click
Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen.
or
Item Description
IPv4 / IPv6 Click one of them to display corresponding information for it.
Trace through Use the drop down list to choose the interface that you want
to ping through.

Protocol Use the drop down list to choose the protocol that you want
to ping through.
Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host.
Trace Host/IP Address It indicates the IPv6 address of the host.
Run Click this button to start route tracing work.
VII-1-13 Syslog Explorer

Such page provides real-time syslog and displays the information on the screen.
For Web Syslog

This page displays the time and message for User/Firewall/call/WAN/VPN settings. You can
check Enable Web Syslog, specify the type of Syslog and choose the display mode you want.
Later, the event of Syslog with specified type will be shown for your reference.
Item Description
Enable Web Syslog Check this box to enable the function of Web Syslog.
Syslog Type Use the drop down list to specify a type of Syslog to be
displayed.
Export Click this link to save the data as a file.
Clear Click this link to clear information on this page.
Display Mode There are two modes for you to choose.
Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of syslog is full,

the system will stop recording.
Always record the new event – only the newest events will
be recorded by the system.
Time Display the time of the event occurred.
Message Display the information for each event.

VII-1-14 IPv6 TSPC Status
IPv6 TSPC status web page could help you to diagnose the connection status of TSPC.
If TSPC has configured properly, the router will display the following page when the user
connects to tunnel broker successfully.
Item Description

VII-1-15 High Availability Status
All of the routers under the same DARP (DrayTek Address Resolution Protocol) group can be
viewed in such page. However, only partial information of the router status will be displayed.
Vigor routers with the following condtions will be treated as the same DARP group:
 HA enabled
 the same Redundancy method
 the same Group ID
 the same Authentication Key
 the same Management Interface
Open Diagnostics>>High Availablity Status.
Item Description
Details/Back Details – Click it to display detailed status about HA
configuration for the selected router.
Back – Return to previous page.
HA Setup Click it to open Applications>>High Availability for modifying
the configuration.
Renew Click it to get the newest status of other router (except the
primary router).
Refresh Click it to get the newest status of the primary router.
Status “!” means an error has occurred. Refer to Detailed
information and modify HA settings if required.
Router Name Display the name of the device.
IP Display the IPv4 address of such router.
Role “Down” means the function of HA is disabled.
“Primary” means such router stands for the primary router in
HA.
“Secondary” means such router stands for the secondary
router in HA.
Stable “No” means the primary router has not been determined yet.
DARP is negotiating.
“YES” means the primary router is determined.
WAN “At Least One UP” means that at least one WAN interface
connects to Internet.

“All WANs Down” means that no WAN interface connects to
Internet.
Sync Status “Not Ready” means configuration synchronization is unable to
execute, or configuration synchronization is disabled, or
synchronization initialization executes but fails.
“Ready” means configuration synchronization is ready to
execute.
“Progressing” means configuration synchronization is
operating.
“Fail” means configuration synchronization executed and
failed; or wrong model name.
“Equal” means the corresponding settings are equal to the
primary router.
Cached Time Display the time period since the last time to get the newest
status of other router (except the primary router).
Cick the link of Status, Router Name, IPv4 or Details, the following page will be displayed on
the screen.

VII-1-16 Authentication Information
Authentication User List

Such page displays authentication jobs made by Internal RADIUS or Local 802.1X.
When the mouse cursor moves to the name link under User Name, the connection message
(including authentication failed information) about internal RADIUS or local 802.1X service
will be shown by a popped up dialog box.
Authentication Information Log

This page will display the complete authentication log information.
Item Description
Enable Check the box to enable such function.
Refresh Click it to update current page.
Clear Click it to remove all of the records.
Syslog Type Specify RADIUS, 802.1X or All to display related authentication
information log.
Display Mode Choose the mode you want to display the related information
on the following table.
 Stop record when fulls – when the capacity of CVM log is
full, the system will stop recording.
 Always record the new event – only the newest events
will be recorded by the system.
Time Display the time the user authenticated by Vigor3910 series.
Message Display authentication information done by Vigor3910 series.

VII-1-17 DoS Flood Table
This page can display content of IP connection detected by DoS Flooding Defense mechanism.
It is useful and convenient for network engineers (e.g., MIS engineer) to inspect the network
environment to find out if there is any abnormal connection.
Information of IP traced and destination port used for SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood
attacks will be detected and shown respectively on different pages.
Moreover, IP address detected and suspected to attack the network system can be blocked
shortly by clicking the Block button shown on pages of SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP Flood.
Info The icon - - means there is something wrong (e.g., attacking the
system) with that IP address.

VII-1-18 Route Policy Diagnosis
With the analysis done by such page, possible path (static route, routing table or policy route)
of the packets sent out of the router can be traced.
or
Item Description
Mode Analyze a single packet – Choose such mode to make Vigor
router analyze how a single packet will be sent by a route
policy.
Analyze multiple packets… - Choose such mode to make Vigor
router analyze how multiple packets in a specified file will be
sent by a route policy.
Packet Information Specify the nature of the packets to be analyzed by Vigor
router.
ICMP/UDP/TCP/ANY- Specify a protocol for diagnosis.
Src IP – Type an IP address as the source IP.
Dst IP – Type an IP address as the destination IP.
Dst Port – Use the drop down list to specify the destination
port.
analyzed result will be shown on the page..

Input File It is available when Analyze multiple packets.. is selected as
Mode.
Select – Click the download link to get a blank example file.
Then, click such button to select that blank “.csv” file for
saving the result of analysis.

Note that the analysis was based on the current

"load-balance/route policy" settings, we do not guarantee it
will be 100% the same as the real case.

VII-2 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not
Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.

1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections.
Refer to “I-2 Hardware Installation” for details.
2. Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent
LAN LED is bright.
3. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to
“I-2 Hardware Installation” to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try
again.

VII-3 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your
Computer Is OK or Not
Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying
the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure
the network connection settings is OK.
For Windows
Info The example is based on Windows 7. As to the examples for other operation
systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in
www.DrayTek.com.
1. Open All Programs>>Getting Started>>Control Panel. Click Network and Sharing

Center.
2. In the following window, click Change adapter settings.
3. Icons of network connection will be shown on the window. Right-click on Local Area
Connection and click on Properties.

4. Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.
5. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address

automatically. Finally, click OK.

For Mac OS
1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.
2. Open the Application folder and get into Network.
3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.

VII-4 Pinging the Router from Your Computer
The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need
to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is
that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP
address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP
automatically. (Please refer to the section VIII-3)
Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.
For Windows
1. Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).
2. Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista/7/8).
The DOS command dialog will appear.
3. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “Reply from
192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255” will appear.
4. If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.
For Mac OS (Terminal)

1. Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.
2. Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.
3. Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.
4. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of “64 bytes from
192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms” will appear.

VII-5 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not
If WAN connection cannot be up, check if the LEDs (according to the LED explanations listed
on section I-1) are correct or not. If the LEDs are off, please:
 Change the Physical Type from Auto negotiation to other values (e.g., 100M full duplex).
 Next, change the physical type of modem (e.g., DSL/FTTX(GPON)/Cable modem) offered
by ISP with the same value configured in Vigor router. Check if the LEDs on Vigor router
are on or not.
 If not, please install an additional switch for connecting both Vigor router and the modem
offered by ISP. Then, check if the LEDs on Vigor router are on or not.
 If the problem of LEDs cannot be solved by the above measures, please contact with the
nearest reseller, or send an e-mail to DrayTek FAE for technical support.
 Check if the settings offered by ISP are configured well or not.
When the LEDs are on and correct, yet the WAN connection still cannot be up, please:
 Open WAN >> Internet Access page and then check whether the ISP settings are set
correctly. Click Details Page of WAN1~WAN8 to review the settings that you configured
previously.

VII-6 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary
Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to
reset the router by software or hardware. Such function is available in Admin Mode only.
Info After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did
before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing.
The password of factory default is null.
Software Reset
You can reset the router to factory default via Web page. Such function is available in Admin
Mode only.
Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen
will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click Reboot Now. After few
seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.

Hardware Reset
While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for
more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button.
Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.
After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again
to fit your personal request.
VII-7 Contacting DrayTek
If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer
for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to
support@DrayTek.com.

Part VIII DrayTek Tools

VIII-1 SmartVPN Client
VIII-1-1 DrayTek Android-based SmartVPN APP for the

establishment of SSL VPN connection
DrayTek has been the world-leading company to integrate VPN with Vigor SOHO routers to
serve professionals and business customers with secure data transactions over Internet. The
facilities of VPN let businesses are able to receive and send data over Internet with secure
tunnels. We provide multiple protocol VPN connections such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP protocols
for secure data exchange and communication. With SSL VPN embedded on Vigor routers,
teleworkers can have convenient and simple access to central site VPN. The teleworkers do
not need to install any VPN software manually. From regular web browser, you can establish
VPN connection back to your main office even in a guest network or web cafe.
DrayTek provided free SmartVPN for Windows-based users to easily establish VPN tunnels.
There were million downloads. Now, DrayTek released Android-based SmartVPN app for those
who would like to set up SSL VPN connection with the VPN server working at the main office.
The SmartVPN app is available for your free download! Then, you can use the SmartVPN App
on smartphone/tablet PC to establish SSL VPN tunnels with your main office.

VIII-1-2 How to Use SmartVPN Android APP to Establish SSL VPN
T u n n e l?
SmartVPN APP for Android is now available on Google play. This document demonstrates how
to use the APP to establish a SSL VPN tunnel.
1. On VPN server, create a SSL user account. Please refer to “How to Set up SSL VPN” on
www.draytek.com for detailed instructions.
2. Download the APP from Google play, and run the APP.
3. Click “+” to add a new profile.

4. Edit the profile.
a. Enter description of this profile.
b. Enter VPN Server's IP in Server.
c. Enter Port as the port which VPN server uses for SSL VPN; for Vigor Routers, it is 443
by default.
d. Tap SAVE to save the profile or “<” to cancel.
Info Installation of relevant Root CA is required to enable server certificate

authentication.
If you check “Use default gateway on remote network”, all the traffic of this
smart device will be forwarded to the remote gateway.
5. Tap the profile bar to establish SSL VPN tunnel.
6. Enter Username and Password, then tap Dial.

7. When the tunnel is up, the profile will turn green. Tap the bar again will disconnect the
tunnel.
8. Tap the pencil icon to edit or remove the profile.


Part IX Telnet Commands

Accessing Telnet of Vigor3910
This chapter also gives you a general description for accessing telnet and describes the
firmware versions for the routers explained in this manual.
Info For Windows 7 user, please make sure the Windows Features of Telnet
Client has been turned on under Control Panel>>Programs.
Type cmd and press Enter. The Telnet terminal will be open later.
In the following window, type Telnet 192.168.1.1 as below and press Enter. Note that the IP
address in the example is the default address of the router. If you have changed the default,
enter the current IP address of the router.
Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password. Then, type ?. You will see a list of
valid/common commands depending on the router that your use.

For users using previous Windows system (e.g., 2000/XP), simply click Start >> Run and type
Telnet 192.168.1.1 in the Open box as below. Next, type admin/admin for Account/Password.
And, type ? to get a list of valid/common commands.

Telnet Command: csm appe prof
Commands under CSM allow you to set CSM profile to define policy profiles for different policy
of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer) application.
“csm appe prof “ is used to configure the APP Enforcement Profile name. Such profile will be
applied in Default Rule of Firewall>>General Setup for filtering.
Syntax
csm appe prof -i INDEX [-v | -n NAME|setdefault]
Syntax Description
Parameter Description
INDEX Specify the index number of CSM profile, from 1 to 32.
-v View the configuration of the CSM profile.
-n Set a name for the CSM profile.
NAME Specify a name for the CSM profile, less then 15 characters.
setdefault Reset to default settings.
Example
> csm appe prof -i 1 -n games
The name of APPE Profile 1 was setted.
Telnet Command: csm appe set

It is used to configure group settings for IM/P2P/Protocol and Others in APP Enforcement
Profile.
Syntax
csm appe set -i INDEX [-v GROUP| -e AP_IDX | -d AP_IDX| -a AP_IDX [ACTION]]
Syntax Description
-v View the IM/P2P/Protocol and Others configuration of the CSM
profile.
-e Enable to block specific application.
-d Disable to block specific application.
-a Set the action of specific application
GROUP Specify the category of the application. Available options are: IM,
P2P, Protocol and Others.
AP_IDX Each application has independent index number for identification in
CLI command.
Specify the index number of the application here. If you have no
idea of the inex number, do the following (Take IM as an example):
Type “csm appe set –I 1 –v IM”, the system will list all of the index
numbers of the applications categorized under IM.
ACTION Specify the action of the application, 0 or 1.
0: Block. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be blocked.
1: Pass. All of the applications meet the CSM rule will be passed.

Example
>csm appe set -i 1 -a 1 1
Profile 1 - : <NULL> action set to Pass.
>
Telnet Command: csm appe show

It is used to display group (IM/P2P/Protocol and Others) information APP Enforcement Profile.
Syntax
csm appe show [-a|-i|-p|-t|-m]
Syntax Description
-a View the configuration status for All groups.
-i View the configuration status of IM group.
-p View the configuration status of P2P group.
-t View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m View the configuration status of Others group.
Example
>csm appe show -t
Type Index Name Version Advance

Advanced Option: (M)essage, (F)ile Transfer, (G)ame, (C)onference, and (O)ther
Activities
-------------------------------------------------------------
PROTOCOL 52 DB2
PROTOCOL 53 DNS
PROTOCOL 54 FTP
PROTOCOL 55 HTTP 1.1
PROTOCOL 56 IMAP 4.1
PROTOCOL 57 IMAP STARTTLS 4.1
PROTOCOL 58 IRC 2.4.0 …………
Telnet Command: csm appe config

It is used to display the configuration status (enabled or disabled) for IM/P2P/Protocol/Other
applications.
Syntax
csm appe config -v INDEX [-i|-p|-t|-m]
Syntax Description
-i View the configuration status of IM group.
-p View the configuration status of P2P group.

-t View the configuration status of protocol group.
-m View the configuration status of Others group.
Example
> csm appe config -v 1 -m
Group Type Index Name Enable A

vance Enable
Advance abbreviation: Message, File Transfer, Game, Conference, and Other
Advance abbreviation: : M, F, G, C, and O
-------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHERS TUNNEL 75 DNSCrypt Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 76 DynaPass Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 77 FreeU Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 78 HTTP Proxy Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 79 HTTP Tunnel Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 80 Hamachi Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 81 Hotspot Shield Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 82 MS Teredo Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 83 PGPNet Disable
OTHERS TUNNEL 84 Ping Tunnel Disable
.
.
.
------------------------------------------------------------------
Total 66 APPs
>
Telnet Command: csm appe interface

It is used to configure APPE signature download interface.
Syntax
csm appe interface [AUTO/WAN#]
Syntax Description
AUTO Vigor router specifies WAN interface automatically.
WAN Specify the WAN interface for signature downloading.
Example
> csm appe interface wan1
Download interface is set as "WAN1" now.
> csm appe interface auto
Download interface is set as "auto-selected" now.
Telnet Command: csm appe email

It is used to set notification e-mail for APPE signature based on the settings configured in
System Maintenance>>SysLog/Mail Alert Setup (in which, the box of APPE Signature is
checkd under Enable E-Mail Alert).
Syntax
csm appe email [-e|-d|-s]
Syntax Description

-e Enable notification e-mail mechanism.
-d Disable notification e-mail mechanism.
-s Send an example e-mail.
Example
> csm appe email -e
Enable APPE email.
Telnet Command: csm ucf

It is used to configure settings for URL control filter profile.
Syntax
csm ucf show
csm ucf setdefault
csm ucf msg MSG
csm ucf obj INDEX [-n PROFILE_NAME | -l [P|B|A|N] | uac | wf ]
csm ucf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm ucf obj INDEX -p VALUE
csm ucf obj INDEX -l P|B|A|N
csm ucf obj INDEX uac
csm ucf obj INDEX wf
Syntax Description
show Display all of the profiles.
setdefault Return to default settings for all of the profile.
msg MSG Set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message
itself.
obj Specify the object for the profile.
-n Set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)
-p Set the priority (defined by the number specified in VALUE) for the
profile.
VALUE Number 0 to 3 represent different conditions.
0: It means Bundle: Pass.
1: It means Bundle: Block.
2: It means Either: URL Access Control First.
3: It means Either: Web Feature First.
-l It means the log type of the profile. They are:
P: Pass,
B: Block,
A: All,

N: None
MSG Specify the Administration Message, less then 255 characters
uac Set URL Access Control part.
wf Set Web Feature part.
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 -n game -l B
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]
Priority Select : [Bundle : Pass]
[ ]Enable URL Access Control

Action:[pass]
[ ]Prevent web access from IP address.
No Obj NO. Object Name
--- -------- ---------------------------------
No Grp NO. Group Name

--- -------- ---------------------------------
Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX uac

It means to configure the settings regarding to URL Access Control (uac).
Syntax
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -v
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -e
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -d
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -a P|B
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -i E|D
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -o KEY_WORD_Object_Index
csm ucf obj INDEX uac -g KEY_WORD_Group_Index
Syntax Description
-v View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.
-e Enable the function of URL Access Control.
-d Disable the function of URL Access Control.
-a Set the action of specific application, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be
blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the URL Access Control will be passed.
-i Prevent the web access from any IP address.
E: Enable the function. The Internet access from any IP address will

be blocked.
D: Disable the function.
-o Set the keyword object.
KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile.
-g Set the keyword group.
KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile.
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 uac -i E
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]

Action:[pass]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
--- -------- ---------------------------------

--- -------- ---------------------------------
> csm ucf obj 1 uac -a B

Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]

Action:[block]
[v]Prevent web access from IP address.
--- -------- ---------------------------------

--- -------- ---------------------------------

Telnet Command: csm ucf obj INDEX wf
It means to configure the settings regarding to Web Feature (wf).
Syntax
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -v
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -e
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -d
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -a P|B
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -s WEB_FEATURE
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -u WEB_FEATURE
csm ucf obj INDEX wf -f File_Extension_Object_index
Syntax Description
-v View the protocol configuration of the CSM profile.
-e Enable the restriction of web feature.
-d Disable the restriction of web feature.
-a Set the action of web feature, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.
-s Enable the the Web Feature configuration.
Features available for configuration are:
c: Cookie
p: Proxy
u: Upload
-u Cancel the web feature configuration.
-f Set the file extension object index number.
File_Extension_Object_inde Type the index number (1 to 8) for the file extension object.
x
Example
> csm ucf obj 1 wf -s c
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[game]
Log:[none]

Action:[block]
[v] Prevent web access from IP address.
--- -------- ---------------------------------

--- -------- ---------------------------------

[ ]Enable Restrict Web Feature
Action:[pass]
File Extension Object Index : [0] Profile Name : []
[V] Cookie [ ] Proxy [ ] Upload
Telnet Command: csm wcf

It means to configure the settings regarding to web control filter (wcf).
Syntax
csm wcf show
csm wcf look
csm wcf cache
csm wcf server WCF_SERVER
csm wcf msg MSG
csm wcf setdefault
csm wcf obj INDEX -v
csm wcf obj INDEX -a P|B
csm wcf obj INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm wcf obj INDEX -l N|P|B|A
csm wcf obj INDEX -o KEY_WORD Object Index
csm wcf obj INDEX -g KEY_WORD Group Index
csm wcf obj INDEX -w E|D|P|B
csm wcf obj INDEX -s CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP
csm wcf obj INDEX -u CATEGORY|WEB_GROUP
Syntax Description
show Display the web content filter profiles.
Look Display the license information of WCF.
Cache Set the cache level for the profile.
Server WCF_SERVER Set web content filter server.
Msg MSG Set the administration message.
MSG means the content (less than 255 characters) of the message
itself.
setdefault Return to default settings for all of the profile.
obj Specify the object profile.
INDEX Specify the index number of web content filter profile, from 1 to 8.
-v View the web content filter profile.
-a Set the action of web content filter profile, P or B.
B: Block. The web access meets the web feature will be blocked.
P: Pass. The web access meets the web feature will be passed.
-n Set the profile name.
PROFILE_NAME Specify the name of the profile (less than 16 characters)
-l It means the log type of the profile. They are:
P: Pass,

B: Block,
A: All,
N: None
-o Set the keyword object.
KEY_WORD_Object_Index Specify the index number of the object profile.
-g Set the keyword group.
KEY_WORD_Group_Index Specify the index number of the group profile.
-w Set the action for the black and white list.
E:Enable,
D:Disable,
P:Pass,
B:Block
-s It means to choose the items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
-u It means to discard items under CATEGORY or WEB_GROUP.
WEB_GROUP Child_Protection, Leisure, Business, Chating, Computer Internet,
Other
CATEGORY Includes:
Alcohol & Tobacco, Criminal Activity, Gambling, Hate & Intoleranc,
Illegal Drug, Nudity, Pornography/Sexually Explicit, Weapons,
Violence, School Cheating,Sex Education, Tasteless, Child Abuse
Imges, Entertainment, Games, Sports, Travel, Leisure & Recreation,
Fashin & Beauty, Business, Job Search, Web-based Emai, Chat,
Instant Messaging, Anonymizers, Forums & Newsgroups, Computers
& Technology, Download Sites, Streaming Media & Downloads,
Phishing & Fraud, Search Engines & Portals, Social Networking,
Spam Sites,Malware, Botnets, Hacking, Illegal Software,
Information Security,Peer-to-eer, Advertisements & Pop-Ups, Arts,
Transportation, Compromised, Dating & Personals, , Education,
Finance, Government,Health & Medcine, News, Non-profits &
NGOs, Personal Sites,Politics, Real Estate, Rligion, Restaurants &
Dining,Shopping, Translators, General, Cults,Greetig cards, Image
Sharing, Network Errors, Parked Domains, Private IP Addresses)

Example
> csm wcf obj 1 -n test_wcf
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[test_wcf]
[]White/Black list
Action:[block]
--- -------- ---------------------------------
--- -------- ---------------------------------
Action:[block]
Log:[block]
------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
child Protection Group:
[v]Alcohol & Tobacco [v]Criminal & Activity [v]Gambling
[v]Hate & Intolerance [v]Illegal Drug [v]Nudity
[v]Pornography & Sexually explicit [v]Violence
[v]Weapons
[v]School Cheating [v]Sex Education [v]Tasteless

[v]Child Abuse Images
------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------
leisure Group:
[ ]Entertainment [ ]Games [ ]Sports
[ ]Travel [ ]Leisure & Recreation [ ]Fashion & Beauty
.
.
>
Telnet Command: csm dnsf

It means to configure the settings regarding to DNS filter.
Syntax
csm dnsf enable ON|OFF
csm dnsf syslog N|P|B|A
csm dnsf service WCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf service_ucf UCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf time CACHE_TIME
csm dnsf blockpage show/on/off
csm dnsf profile_show
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -n PROFILE_NAME
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -l N|P|B|A

csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -w WCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -u UCF_PROFILE
csm dnsf profile_edit INDEX -c CACHE_TIME
Syntax Description
enable Enable or disable DNS Filter.
ON: enable.
OFF: disable.
syslog Determine the content of records transmitting to Syslog.
P: Pass. Records for the packets passing through DNS filter will be
sent to Syslog.
B: Block. Records for the packets blocked by DNS filter will be
sent to Syslog.
A: All. Records for the packets passing through or blocked by DNS
filter will be sent to Syslog.
N: None. No record will be sent to Syslog.
service WCF_PROFILE WCF_PROFILE: Specify a WCF profile as the base of DNS filtering.
Type a number to indicate the index number of WCF profile (1 is
first profile, 2 is second profile, and so on ...).
time CACHE_TIME CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available
values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for
DNS filter.
blockpage DNS sends block page for redirect port. When a web page is
blocked by DNS filter, the router system will send a message page
to describe that the page is not allowed to be visisted.
ON: Enable the function of displaying message page.
OFF: Disable the function of displaying message page.
SHOW: Display the function of displaying message page is ON or
OFF.
profile_show Display the table of the DNS filter profile.
profile_edit Modify the content of the DNS filter profile.
-n PROFILE_NAME PROFILE_NAME: Type the name of the DNS filter profile that you
want to modify.
-l N|P|B|A Specify the log type of the profile.
P: Pass.
B: Block.
A: All.
N: None.
-w WCF_PROFILE WCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the WCF profile.
-u UCF_PROFILE UCF_PROFILE: Type the index number of the UCF profile.
-c CACHE_TIME -c means to set the cache time for DNS filter.
CACHE_TIME: It means to set the time for cache to live (available
values are 1 to 24; 1 is one hour, 2 is two hours, and so on ...) for
DNS filter.
Example
> csm dnsf service 2
dns service set up!!!
>csm dnsf service 3
wcf profile 3 is empty.....
>csm dnsf cachetime 1

dns cache time set up!!!
Telnet Command: ddns enable

This command allows users to enable or disable the DDNS service.
Syntax
ddns enable [0/1]
Syntax Description
0/1 0 – Disable the DDNS service.
1 – Enable the DDNS service.
Example
> ddns enable 1
Enable Dynamic DNS Setup
>
Telnet Command: ddns set

This command allows users to set Dynamica DNS account.
Syntax
ddns set [option]
ddns set -i [account index] -S [service provider] -T [service type] -D [hostname] -L [username]
-P [password]
Syntax Description
-i [value] It means index number of Dynamic DNS Account.
value: 1-6
-E [value] It means to enable /disable Dynamic DNS Account.
value: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-W [value] It means to specify WAN Interface.
[value]: Must be between 1-8
1: WAN1 First
2: WAN1 Only
3: WAN2 First
4: WAN2 Only
example: To set WAN Interface: WAN1 First
-L [value] It means to type Login Name.
[value]: limit up to 64 characters
-P [value] It means to type Password.
-C [value] It means to enable /disable Wildcards.
[value]: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-B [value] It means to enable / disable Backup MX.

[value]: 0: Disable, 1:Enable
-M [value] It means to type Mail Extender.
-R [value] It means to type Determine Real WAN IP.
[value]: 0: WAN IP, 1: Internet IP
-S [value] It means to specify Servive Provider.
If user want to set User-Defined page, value must select 1.
[value]: value must be between 1-19.
1 >> User-Defined
2 >> 3322 DDNS (www.3322.org)
3 >> ChangeIP.com (www.changeip.com)
4 >> ddns.com.cn (www.ddns.com.cn)
5 >> DtDNS (www.dtdns.com)
6 >> dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
7 >> DynAccess (www.dynaccess.com)
8 >> dynami.co.za (www.dynami.co.za)
9 >> freedns.afraid.org (freedns.afraid.org)
10 >> NO-IP.COM Free (www.no-ip.com)
11 >> opendns.com (www.opendns.com)
12 >> OVH (www.ovh.com)
13 >> Strato (www.strato.eu)
14 >> TwoDNS (www.twodns.de)
15 >> TZO (www.tzo.com)
16 >> ubddns.org (ubddns.org)
17 >> Viettel DDNS (vddns.vn)
18 >> vigorddns.com (www.vigorddns.com)
19 >> ZoneEdit DDNS (dynamic.zoneedit.com)
T [value] It means to type Servive Type.
[value]: value must be between 1-3.
1: Dynamic 2: Custom 3: Static
-D <Host Name> <sub Domain It means to type Domain Name.
Name> i.e: Account index 1 setting Domain Name for Dynamic Service
Type
>> ddns set -i 1 -T 1 -D "host ddns.com.cn"
i.e: Account index 2 setting Domain Name for Custom Service Type
>> ddns set -i 2 -T 2 -D "domain name"
i.e: Account index 3 setting Domain Name for Static Service Type
>> ddns set -i 3 -T 3 -D "domain name"
-H [value] It means to type User-Defined Provider Host.
-A [value] It means to type User-Defined Service API.
-a [value] It means to type User-Defined Auth Type.
[value]: 0: basic 1: URL
-N [value] It means to type User-Defined Connection Type.
[value]: 0: Http 1: Https
-O [value] It means to type User-Defined Server Response.
Example

> ddns set -i 1 -S 6 -T 1 -D "hostname dnsalias.net" -L user1 -P pwd1
> Save OK
Telnet Command: ddns log

Displays the DDNS log.
Example
>ddns log
>
Telnet Command: ddns time

Sets and displays the DDNS time.
Syntax
ddns time <update in minutes>
Syntax Description
Update in minutes Type the value as DDNS time. The range is from 1 to 14400.
Example
> ddns time
Valid: 1 ~ 14400
%Now: 14400
> ddns time 1000
Valid: 1 ~ 14400
%Now: 1000
Telnet Command: ddns forceupdate

This command will update DDNS automatically.
Example
> ddns forceupdate
Now updating DDNS ...
Please check result by using command "ddns log"
Telnet Command: ddns setdefault

This command will return DDS with factory default settings.
Example
>ddns setdefault
>Set to Factory Default.
Telnet Command: ddns show

This command allows users to check the content of selected DDNS account.
Syntax
ddns show -i [value]
Syntax Description
-I [value] Display the content of selected DDNS account.
[value]: value must be between 1-6
Example
> ddns show -i 1
--------------------------------------------------
Index: 1
[ ] Enable Dynamic DNS Account
WAN Interface: WAN1 First
Service Provider: dyn.com (www.dyn.com)
Service Type: Dynamic
Domain Name: [].[]
Login Name:
[ ] Wildcards
[ ] Backup MX
Mail Extender:
Determine Real WAN IP: WAN IP
DrayTek>
Telnet Command: dos

This command allows users to configure the settings for DoS defense system.
Syntax
dos [-V | D | A]
dos [-s ATTACK_F [THRESHOLD][ TIMEOUT]]
dos [-a | e [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0] | d [ATTACK_F][ATTACK_0]]
Syntax Description
-V View the configuration of DoS defense system.
-D Deactivate the DoS defense system.
-A Activate the DoS defense system.
-s Enable the defense function for a specific attack and set its
parameter(s).
ATTACK_F Specify the name of flooding attack(s) or portscan, e.g., synflood,
udpflood, icmpflood, or postscan.
THRESHOLD It means the packet rate (packet/second) that a flooding attack will
be detected. Set a value larger than 20.
TIMEOUT It means the time (seconds) that a flooding attack will be blocked.

Set a value larger than 5.
-a Enable the defense function for all attacks listed in ATTACK_0.
-e Enable defense function for a specific attack(s).
ATTACK_0 Specify a name of the following attacks: ip_option, tcp_flag, land,
teardrop, smurf, pingofdeath, traceroute, icmp_frag, syn_frag,
unknow_proto, fraggle.
-d Disable the defense function for a specific attack(s).
Example
>dos –A
The Dos Defense system is Activated
>dos –s synflood 50 10
Synflood is enabled! Threshold=50 <pke/sec> timeout=10 <pke/sec>

Telnet Command: exit
Type this command will leave telnet window.
Telnet Command: Internet

This command allows you to configure detailed settings for WAN connection.
Syntax
internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-W n W means to set WAN interface.
1=WAN1, 2=WAN2,…. Default is WAN1.
-M n M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means
different modes (represented by 0 – 3)
n=0: Offline
n=1: PPPoE
n=2: Dynamic IP
n=3: Static IP
n=4: PPTP with Dynamic IP,
n=5: PPTP with Static IP,
n=6: L2TP with Dynamic IP
n=7: L2TP with Static IP
n=A: 3G/4G USB Modem(PPP mode),
n=B: 3G/4G USB Modem(DHCP mode)
<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.
[…] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-S <isp name> Set ISP Name (max. 23 characters).
-P <on/off> Enable PPPoE Service.
-u <username> Set username (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.
-p <password> Set password (max. 49 characters) for Internet accessing.
-a n It means to set PPP Authentication Type and n means different
types (represented by 0-1).
n=0: PAP/CHAP (this is default setting)
n=1: PAP Only
-t n Set connection duration and n means different conditions.
n=-1: Always-on
n=1 ~ 999: Idle time for offline (default 180 seconds)
-i <ip address> It means that PPPoE server will assign an IP address specified here
for CPE (PPPoE client).
If you type 0.0.0.0 as the <ip address>, ISP will assign suitable IP
address for you. However, if you type an IP address here, the router
will use that one as a fixed IP.
-w <ip address> It means to assign WAN IP address for such connection. Please type
an IP address here for WAN port.
-n <netmask> It means to assign netmask for WAN connection. You have to type
255.255.255.xxx (x is changeable) as the netmask for WAN port.
-g <gateway> Assign gateway IP for such WAN connection.

-V View Internet Access profile.
-C <sim pin code> Set (PPP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 15 characters).
-O <init string> Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String (max. 47 characters).
-T <init string2> Set (PPP mode) Modem Initial String2 (max. 47 characters)
-D <dial string> Set (PPP mode) Modem Dial String (max. 31 characters).
-v <service name> Set (PPP mode) Service Name (max. 23 characters).
-m <ppp username> Set (PPP mode) PPP Username (max. 63 characters).
-o <ppp password> Set (PPP mode) PPP Password (max. 62 characters).
-e n Set (PPP mode) PPP Authentication Type.
n= 0: PAP/CHAP (default),
1: PAP Only
-q n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-One
-x n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Two
-y n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Three
-z n (PPP mode) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup-Four
-Q <mode> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Mode.
<mode>
0: ARP Detect;
1: Ping Detect
-I <ping ip> Set (PPP mode or DHCP mode) WAN Connection Detection Ping IP.
<ping ip>= ppp.qqq.rrr.sss: WAN Connection Detection Ping IP
-L n Set (PPP mode) WAN Connection Detection TTL (1-255) value.
-E <sim pin code> Set (DHCP mode) SIM PIN code (max. 19 characters).
-G <mode> Set (DHCP mode) Network Mode.
<mode>
0: 4G/3G/2G;
1: 4G Only;
2: 3G Only;
3: 2G Only
-N <apn name> Set (DHCP mode) APN Name (max. 47 characters)
-U n (DHCP mode) MTU(1000-1440)
Example
>internet -M 1 -S tcom -u username -p password -a 0 -t -1 -i 0.0.0.0
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 ISP Name set to tcom
WAN1 Username set to username
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
WAN1 Idle timeout set to always-on
WAN1 Gateway IP set to 0.0.0.0
> internet -V
WAN1 Internet Mode:PPPoE
ISP Name: tcom
Username: username
Authentication: PAP/CHAP

Idle Timeout: -1
WAN IP: Dynamic IP
> internet -W 1 -M 1 -u link1 -p link1 -a 0
You are going to watching and setting in WAN 1
WAN1 Internet Mode set to PPPoE/PPPoA
WAN1 Username set to link1
WAN1 Password set successful
WAN1 PPP Authentication Type set to PAP/CHAP
>
Telnet Command: ip pubsubnet

This command allows users to enable or disable the IP routing subnet for your router.
Syntax
ip pubsubnet <Enable/Disable>
Syntax Description
Enable Enable the function.
Disable Disable the function.
Example
> ip 2ndsubnet enable
public subnet enabled!
Telnet Command: ip pubaddr

This command allows to set the IP routed subnet for the router.
Syntax
ip pubaddr ?
ip pubaddr <public subnet IP address>
Syntax Description
? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet IP
address.
public subnet IP address Specify an IP address. The system will set the one that you specified
as the public subnet IP address.
Example
> ip pubaddr ?
% ip addr <public subnet IP address>
% Now: 192.168.0.1
> ip pubaddr 192.168.2.5

% Set public subnet IP address done !!!
Telnet Command: ip pubmask

This command allows users to set the mask for IP routed subnet of your router.
Syntax
ip pubmask ?
ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
Syntax Description
? Display an IP address which allows users set as the public subnet
mask.
public subnet IP address Specify a subnet mask. The system will set the one that you
specified as the public subnet mask.
Example
> ip pubmask ?
% ip pubmask <public subnet mask>
% Now: 255.255.255.0
> ip pubmask 255.255.0.0

% Set public subnet mask done !!!
Telnet Command: ip lanalias

This command is used for configuring LAN IP Alias.
Syntax
ip lanalias [idx] [-e / -a / -w / -r]
Syntax Description
idx Enter the index number (from 1 to 5) of the table displayed on your
screen.
-e [0/1] Enable / disable the IP alias.
-a [address] Set an IP alias.
[address] - Enter the IPv4 address (x.x.x.x)
-w [1/0] Specify a number of WAN interface. "0" means no WAN.
-r Delete an existed WAN IP address.
Example
> ip lanalias 1 -a 192.168.1.56
>
Telnet Command: ip addr

This command allows users to set/add a specified LAN IP your router.
Syntax
ip addr [IP address]

Syntax Description
IP address The LAN IP address.
Example
>ip addr 192.168.50.1
% Set IP address OK !!!
Info When the LAN IP address is changed, the start IP address of DHCP server are
still the same. To make the IP assignment of the DHCP server being
consistent with this new IP address (they should be in the same network
segment), the IP address of the PC must be fixed with the same LAN IP
address (network segment) set by this command for accessing into the web
user interface of the router. Later, modify the start addresses for the DHCP
server.
Telnet Command: ip nmask

This command allows users to set/add a specified netmask for your router.
Syntax
ip nmask [IP netmask]
Syntax Description
IP netmask The netmask of LAN IP.
Example
> ip nmask 255.255.0.0
% Set IP netmask OK !!!
Telnet Command: ip arp

ARP displays the matching condition for IP and MAC address.
Syntax
ip arp add [IP address] [MAC address] [LAN or WAN]
ip arp del [IP address] [LAN or WAN]
ip arp flush
ip arp status
ip arp accept [0/1/2/3/4/5status]
ip arp setCacheLife [time]
In which, arp add allows users to add a new IP address into the ARP table; arp del allows users
to remove an IP address; arp flush allows users to clear arp cache; arp status allows users to
review current status for the arp table; arp accept allows to accept or reject the source
/destination MAC address; arp setCacheLife allows users to configure the duration in which
ARP caches can be stored on the system. If ip arp setCacheLife is set with “60”, it means you
have an ARP cache at 0 second. Sixty seconds later without any ARP messages received, the

system will think such ARP cache is expired. The system will issue a few ARP request to see if
this cache is still valid.
Syntax Description
IP address It means the LAN IP address.
MAC address It means the MAC address of your router.
LAN or WAN It indicates the direction for the arp function.
0/1/2/3/4/5 0: disable to accept illegal source mac address
1: enable to accept illegal source mac address
2: disable to accept illegal dest mac address
3: enable to accept illegal dest mac address
4: Decline VRRP mac into arp table
5: Accept VRRP mac into arp table
status: display the setting status.
Time Available settings will be 10, 20, 30,....2550 seconds.
Example
> ip arp status
[ARP Table]
Index IP Address MAC Address Netbios Name Interface VLAN
Port
1 192.168.1.5 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE LAN1
VLAN0 P1
>
Telnet Command: ip dhcpc

This command is available for WAN DHCP.
Syntax
ip dhcpc option
ip dhcpc option -h|l
ip dhcpc option -d [idx]
ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -v [option value]
ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -x "[option value]"
ip dhcpc option -e [1 or 0] -w [wan unmber] -c [option number] -a [option value]
ip dhcpc option -u [idx unmber]
ip dhcpc release [wan number]
ip dhcpc renew [wan number]
ip dhcpc status
Syntax Description
option It is an optional setting for DHCP server.

-h: display usage
-l: list all custom set DHCP options
-d: delete custom dhcp client option by index number
-e: enable/disable option feature, 1:enable, 0:disable
-w: set WAN number (e.g., 1=WAN1)
-c: set option number: 0~255
-v: set option value by string
-x: set option value by raw byte (hex)
-u: update by index number
release It means to release current WAN IP address.
renew It means to renew the WAN IP address and obtain another new one.
status It displays current status of DHCP client.
Example
>ip dhcpc status
I/F#3 DHCP Client Status:
DHCP Server IP : 172.16.3.7

WAN Ipm : 172.16.3.40
WAN Netmask : 255.255.255.0
WAN Gateway : 172.16.3.1
Primary DNS : 168.95.192.1
Secondary DNS : 0.0.0.0
Leased Time : 259200
Leased Time T1 : 129600
Leased Time T2 : 226800
Leased Elapsed : 259194
Leased Elapsed T1 : 129594
Leased Elapsed T2 : 226794
Telnet Command: ip ping

This command allows users to ping IP address of WAN1/WAN2 for verifying if the WAN
connection is OK or not.
Syntax
ip ping [IP address] [WAN1/WAN2]
Syntax Description
IP address It means the WAN IP address.
WAN1/WAN2 It means the WAN interface that the above IP address passes
through.
Example
>ip ping 172.16.3.229 WAN1
Pinging 172.16.3.229 with 64 bytes of Data:
Receive reply from 172.16.3.229, time=0ms

Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <0% loss>
Telnet Command: ip tracert

This command allows users to trace the routes from the router to the host.
Syntax
ip tracert [Host/IP address] [WAN1 / WAN2 / WAN3 / WAN4 / WAN5 / WAN6 / WAN7 / WAN8
/ WAN9 / WAN10 / WAN11 / WAN12] [Udp/Icmp]
Syntax Description
IP address The target IP address.
WAN1 ~ WAN12 It means the WAN port that the above IP address passes through.
Udp/Icmp The UDP or ICMP.
Example
>ip tracert 22.128.2.62 WAN1
Traceroute to 22.128.2.62, 30 hops max
1 172.16.3.7 10ms
2 172.16.1.2 10ms
3 Request Time out.
4 168.95.90.66 50ms
5 211.22.38.134 50ms
6 220.128.2.62 50ms
Trace complete
Telnet Command: ip telnet

This command allows users to access specified device by telnet.
Syntax
ip telnet [IP address][Port]
Syntax Description
IP address Type the WAN or LAN IP address of the remote device.
Port Type a port number (e.g., 23).
Available settings: 0 ~65535.
Example
> ip telnet 172.17.3.252 23
>
Telnet Command: ip rip

This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of IP.
Syntax

ip rip [0/1/2]
Syntax Description
0/1/2 0 means disable;
1 means LAN1 and 2 means IP Routed.
Example
> ip rip 1
%% Set RIP LAN1.
Telnet Command: ip wanrip

This command allows users to set the RIP (routing information protocol) of WAN IP.
Syntax
ip wanrip [ifno] -e [0/1]
Syntax Description
ifno It means the connection interface.
1: WAN1,2: WAN2, 3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
Note: PVC3 ~PVC5 are virtual WANs.
-e It means to disable or enable RIP setting for specified WAN
interface.
1: Enable the function of setting RIP of WAN IP.
0: Disable the function.
Example
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:
WAN[1] Rip Protocol disable
> ip wanrip 5 -e 1
> ip wanrip ?
Valid ex:ip wanrip <ifno> -e <0/1>
<ifno> 1: WAN1,2: WAN2
3: PVC3,4: PVC4,5: PVC5
-e <0/1> 0: disable, 1: enable
Now status:

WAN[5] Rip Protocol enable
>
Telnet Command: ip route

This command allows users to set static route.
Syntax
ip route add [dst] [netmask][gateway][ifno][rtype]
ip route del [dst] [netmask][rtype]
ip route status
ip route cnc
ip route default [wan1/wan2/off/?]
ip route clean [1/0]
Syntax Description
add It means to add an IP address as static route.
del It means to delete specified IP address.
status It means current status of static route.
dst It means the IP address of the destination.
netmask It means the netmask of the specified IP address.
gateway It means the gateway of the connected router.
3=WAN1, 4=WAN2, 5=WAN3, 6=WAN4
rtype It means the type of the route.
default : default route;
static: static route.
cnc It means current IP range for CNC Network.
default Set WAN1/WAN2/off as current default route.
clean Clean all of the route settings.
1: Enable the function.
Example
> ip route add 172.16.2.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.2.4 3 static
> ip route status
Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private

C~ 192.168.9.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, DMZ
C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN1
S 172.16.2.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 172.16.2.4, WAN1

Telnet Command: ip igmp_proxy
This command allows users to enable/disable igmp proxy server.
Syntax
ip igmp_proxy set
ip igmp_proxy reset
ip igmp_proxy wan
ip igmp_proxy query
ip igmp_proxy ppp [0/1]
ip igmp_proxy status
Syntax Description
set It means to enable proxy server.
reset It means to disable proxy server.
wan It means to specify WAN interface for IGMP service.
query It means to set IGMP general query interval.
The default value is 125000 ms.
ppp 0 – No need to set IGMP with PPP header.
1 – Set IGMP with PPP header.
status It means to display current status for proxy server.
Example
This command is for setting IGMP General Query Interval
The default value is 125000 ms
Current Setting is:130000 ms
> ip igmp_proxy set
% ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON
> ip igmp_proxy status
%% ip igmp_proxy [set|reset|wan|status], IGMP Proxy is ON
%%% igmp_proxy WAN:
239.255.255.250 state=1
239.255.255.250 timer=0

Telnet Command: ip igmp_snoop
This command is used to enable/disable igmp snoop server.
Syntax
ip igmp_snoop enable
ip igmp_snoop disable
ip igmp_snoop status
ip igmp_snoop table
ip igmp_snoop txquery [on|off] [v2|v3]
ip igmp_snoop mode [hw/sw]
ip igmp_snoop chkleave [on|off]
ip igmp_snoop separate [on|off]
ip igmp_snoop portchk [on|off]
Syntax Description
enable It means to enable proxy server.
disable It means to disable proxy server.
status It means to display current status for proxy server.
table Display the whole table of IGMP Snoop configuration.
txquery [on|off] [v2|v3] IGMP query will be sent out to LAN periodically.
mode [hw/sw] Make IGMP snooping work on software or hardware.
chkleave [on|off] Off – Vigor router will drop LEAVE if clients still on the same group.
separate [on|off] On – IGMP packets will be separated by NAT/Bridge mode.
Example
> ip igmp_snoop mode sw
igmp snooping works on SW mode now.
Telnet Command: ip session

This command allows users to set maximum session limit number for the specified IP; set
message for exceeding session limit and set how many seconds the IP session block works.
Syntax
ip session on
ip session off
ip session default [num]
ip session defaultp2p [num]
ip session status
ip session show
ip session timer [num]
ip session [block/unblock][IP]

ip session [add/del][IP1-IP2][num][p2pnum]
Syntax Description
on Turn on session limit for each IP.
off Turn off session limit for each IP.
default [num] Set the default number of session num limit.
Defautlp2p [num] Set the default number of session num limit for p2p.
status Display the current settings.
show Display all session limit settings in the IP range.
timer [num] Set when the IP session block works.
The unit is second.
[block/unblock][IP] Block/unblock the specified IP address.
Block: The IP cannot access Internet through the router.
Unblock: The specified IP can access Internet through the router.
add Add the session limits in an IP range.
del Delete the session limits in an IP range.
IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command.
num It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 100.
p2pnum It means the number of the session limits, e.g., 50 for P2P.
Example
>ip session default 100
> ip session add 192.168.1.5-192.168.1.100 100 50
> ip session on
> ip session status
IP range:
192.168.1.5 - 192.168.1.100 : 100
Current ip session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
Telnet Command: ip bandwidth

This command allows users to set maximum bandwidth limit number for the specified IP.
Syntax
ip bandwidth on
ip bandwidth off
ip bandwidth default [tx_rate][rx_rate]
ip bandwidth status
ip bandwidth show
ip bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2][tx][rx][shared]

Syntax Description
on Turn on the IP bandwidth limit.
off Turn off the IP bandwidth limit.
default [tx_rate][rx_rate] Set default tx and rx rate of bandwidth limit. The range is from 0 –
65535 Kpbs.
status Display the current settings.
show Display all the bandwidth limits settings within the IP range.
add Add the bandwidth within the IP range.
del Delete the bandwidth within the IP range.
IP1-IP2 It means the range of IP address specified for this command.
tx Set transmission rate for bandwidth limit.
rx Set receiving rate for bandwidth limit.
shared It means that the bandwidth will be shared for the IP range.
Example
> ip bandwidth default 200 800
> ip bandwidth add 192.168.1.50-192.168.1.100 10 60
> ip bandwidth status
IP range:
192.168.1.50 - 192.168.1.100 : Tx:10K Rx:60K
Current ip Bandwidth limit is turn off
Auto adjustment is off
Telnet Command: ip bindmac

This command allows users to set IP-MAC binding for LAN host.
Syntax
ip bindmac on
ip bindmac off
ip bindmac strict_on
ip bindmac show
ip bindmac add [IP][MAC][Comment]
ip bindmac del [IP]/all
Syntax Description
on Turn on IP bandmac policy. Even the IP is not in the policy table, it
can still access into network.
off Turn off all the bindmac policy.

strict_on It means that only those IP address in IP bindmac policy table can
access into network.
show Display the IP address and MAC address of the pair of binded one.
add Add one IP bindmac.
del Delete one IP bindmac.
IP Type the IP address for binding with specified MAC address.
MAC Type the MAC address for binding with the IP address specified.
Comment Type words as a brief description.
All Delete all the IP bindmac settings.
Example
> ip bindmac add 192.168.1.46 00:50:7f:22:33:55 just for test
> ip bindmac show
ip bind mac function is turned ON
IP : 192.168.1.46 bind MAC : 00-50-7f-22-33-55 Comment : just
Telnet Command: ip bgp

This command allows users to configure settings for BGP.
Syntax
ip bgp mode [0/1]
ip bgp as [value]
ip bgp hold [value]
ip bgp retry [value]
ip bgp id [value]
ip bgp show
ip bgp neighbor [idx] mode [0/1]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] name [max len: 20]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] ip [x.x.x.x]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] as [1~4294967295]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] md5 <0/1>
ip bgp neighbor [idx] key [max len: 20]
ip bgp neighbor [idx] show
ip bgp neighbor show all
ip bgp static [sidx][ip][<netmask]
ip bgp static [sidx] delete
ip bgp static show
Syntax Description
mode <0/1> It means to enable / disable BGP mode.
0: disable
1: enable

as <value> It means to set the AS number for local router.
<value>: Available number is between 0 and 4294967295.
hold <value> It means to set the time interval to determine the peer is dead
when the router is unable to receive any keepalive message from
the peer within the time.
<value>: Available number is between 10 and 65535 (unit: second).
The default is 180 (seconds).
retry <value> It means to set a period of time to reconnect if the router fails to
connect to the neighboring router.
<value>: Available number is between 3 and 255 (unit: second). The
default is 120 (seconds).
id <value> It means to specify the LAN subnet <1~16> as router ID.
show It means to display information related to BGP settings.
neighbor <idx> mode <0/1> It means to enable / disable the basic BGP function for neighboring
router.
<idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<0/1>: 0- disable; 1- enable
neighbor <idx> name <max It means to define a profile name for neighboring router.
len: 20> <idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
<max len>: The maximum name length shall not be over 20
characters.
neighbor <idx> ip <x.x.x.x> It means to set the IP address specified for the neighboring router.
<x.x.x.x>: Enter the IP address, e.g., 100.100.100.100.
neighbor <idx> as It means to set the AS number for the neightboring router.
<1~4294967295> <idx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 8.
neighbor <idx> md5 <0/1> It means to enable or disable (1/0) for MD5 function for the
neightboring router.
neighbor <idx> key <max It menas to define a key for the neightboring router.
len: 20> <max len>: The maximum name length shall not be over 20
characters.
neighbor <idx> show It means to display information for the specified profile.
neighbor show all It means to display information for all neighboring routers.
static <sidx> <ip> <netmask> It means to configure the neighboring router(s) for exchanging the
routing information with the local router.
<sidx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 16.
<ip>: Enter the IP address, e.g., 100.100.100.200.
<netmask>: Enter the subnet mask for the neighboring router, e.g.,
255.255.255.0.
static <sidx> delete It means to delete static network settings for neighboring router.
<sidx>: Available profile number is between 1 and 16.
static show It means to display setting information for exchanging the routing
information with the local router.
Example
> ip bgp static 1 192.168.2.56 255.255.255.0
Set static network index: 1

IP addr: 192.168.2.56
Net mask: 255.255.255.0
> ip bgp static show
BGP static networks:
Index: 1, IP addr: 192.168.2.56, mask: 255.255.255.0

Telnet Command: ip maxnatuser
This command is used to set the maximum number of NAT users.
Syntax
ip maxnatuser user no
Syntax Description
User no A number specified here means the total NAT users that Vigor router
supports.
0 – It means no limitation.
Example
> ip maxnatuser 100
% Max NAT user = 100
Telnet Command: ip policy_rt

This command is used to set the IP policy route profile.
Syntax
ip policy_rt [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
General Setup for Policy Route
-i [value] Specify an index number for setting policy route profile.
Value: 1 to 60. “-1” means to get a free policy index automatically.
-e [0/1] 0: Disable the selected policy route profile.
1: Enable the selected policy route profile.
-o [value] Determine the operation of the policy route.
Value:
add – Create a new policy rotue profile.
del – Remove an existed policy route profile.
edit – Modify an existed policy route profile.
flush – Reset policy route to default setting.
-1 [any/range] Specify the source IP mode.
Range: Indicate a range of IP addresses.
Any: It means any IP address will be treated as source IP address.
-2 Specify the destination IP mode.
[any/ip_range/ip_subnet/do Any: No need to specify an IP address for any IP address will be
main] treated as destination IP address.
ip_range: Indicates a range of IP addresses.
ip_subnet: Indicates the IP subnet.
domain: Indicates the domain name.
-3 [any/range] Specify the destination port mode.
Range: Indicate a range of port number.

Any: It means any port number can be used as destination port.
-G [default/specific] Specify the gateway mode.
-L [default/specific] Specify the failover gateway mode.
-s [value] Indicate the source IP start.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g, 192.168.1.0)
-S [value] Indicate the source IP end.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,
192.168.1.100)
-d [value] Indicate the destination IP start.
-D [value] Indicate the destination IP end.
Value: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,
192.168.2.100)
-p [value] Indicate the destination port start.
Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port start (e.g., 1000).
-P [value] Indicate the destination port end.
Value: Type a number (1 ~ 65535) as the port end (e.g., 2000).
-y [value] Indicate the priority of the policy route profile.

Value: Type a number (0 ~ 250). The default value is “150”.
-I [value] Indicate the interface specified for the policy route profile.
Value: Available interfaces include,
LAN1 ~ LAN8, IP_Routed_Subnet,
DMZ_Subnet,
WAN1 ~ WAN5,
VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,
WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8
-g [value] Indicate the gateway IP address.
-l [value] Indicate the failover IP address.

-t [value] It means “protocol”.

Value: Available settings include “TCP”, “UDP”, “TCP/UDP”, “ICMP”
and “Any”.
-n [0/1] Indicates the function of “Force NAT”.

-a [0/1] Indicates to enable the function of failover.
-f [value] It means to specify the interface for failover.
Value: Avaialbe interfaces include,
NO_FAILOVER,
Default_WAN,
Policy1 ~ Policy60
LAN1 ~ LAN8
IP_Routed_Subnet,
DMZ_Subnet,
WAN1 ~ WAN5,
VPN_PROFILE_1 ~ VPN_PROFILE_100,
WAN_1_IP_ALIAS_1 ~ WAN_4_IP_ALIAS_8
-b [value] It means “failback”.

Value: Available settings include,
0: Disable the function of “failback”.
1: Enable the function of “failback”.
-v: View current failback setting.
Diagnose for Policy Route
-s [value] It means “source IP”.
Value: Available settings include:
Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as source IP address.
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: The type format (e.g, 192.168.1.0).
-d [value] It means “destination IP”.
Value : Available settings include:
Any: It indicates any IP address can be used as destination IP address.
“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”: Specify an IP address.
-p [value] It means “destination port”.
Value: Specify a number or type Any (indicating any number).
-t [value] It means “protocol”.
Value: Available settings include “ICMP”, “TCP”, “UDP” and “Any”.
Example
> ip policy_rt diagnose -s 192.168.1.100 -d any -p any -t ICMP
-------------------------------------------------
Matched Route (Priority)
-------------------------------------------------
* No_Match
-------------------------------------------------
Matched Policy (Priority)
-------------------------------------------------
* Policy_1 (200)
* Conclusion:The packet was dropped because the send-to interface

of the mat
ched policy "policy 1" was inactive and there was no failover setting
> ip policy_rt -i -1 -o add -1 range -s 192.168.1.10 -S 192.168.1.20 -2
ip_range –d 202.211.100.10 -D 202.211.100.20 -g 202.211.100.1 -I WAN2

Telnet Command: ip lanDNSRes
This command is used to set LAN DNS profile.
Syntax
ip lanDNSRes [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-a <IP Address> Set IP Address that domain name mapped.
-c <CNAME> Set CNAME value.
-d <address mapping index Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.
number>
-e <0/1> 0: disable the selected LAN DNS profile.
1: enable the selected LAN DNS profile.
-i <profile setting index Type the index number of the profile.
number>
-l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP
address and message).
-n <domain name> Set domain name.
-p <profile name> Set profile name for LAN DNS.
-r Reset the settings for selected profile.
-s <0/1> 0:reply all
1:reply only same subnet packet.
-z Update LAN DNS config to DNS Cache.
Example
>
ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -p test
% Configure Set1's Profile:test
> ip lanDNSRes -i 1 -l
% Idx: 1
% State: Disable
% Profile: test
% Domain Name:
% -------- Address Mapping Table --------
% Not Set Address Mapping.
>
Telnet Command: ip dnsforward

This command is used to set LAN DNS profile for conditional DNS forwarding.
Syntax
ip dnsforward [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description

[<command><parameter>|… The available commands with parameters are listed below.
] […] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-a <IP Address> Set forwarded DNS server IP Address.
-d <DNS server mapping Delete the selected LAN DNS profile.
index number>
-e <0/1> 0: disable such function.
1: enable such function.
-i <profile setting index Type the index number of the profile.
number>
-l List the content of LAN DNS profile (including domain name, IP
address and message).
-n <domain name> Set domain name.
-p <profile name> Set profile name for LAN DNS.
-r Reset the settings for selected profile.
Example
> ip dnsforward -i 1 -n ftp.drayTek.com
% Configure Set1's DomainName:ftp.drayTek.com
> ip dnsforward -i 1 -a 172.16.1.1
% Configure Set1's IP:172.16.1.1
> ip dnsforward -i 1 -l
% Idx: 1
% State: Disable
% Profile: test
% Domain Name: ftp.drayTek.com
% DNS Server IP: 172.16.1.1
>
Telnet Command: ip6 addr

This command allows users to set the IPv6 address for your router.
Syntax
ip6 addr -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
ip6 addr -d [prefix] [prefix-length] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
ip6 addr -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
Syntax Description
-s It means to add a static ipv6 address.
-d It means to delete an ipv6 address.
-a It means to show current address(es) status.
-u It means to show only unicast addresses.
prefix It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.
prefix-length It means to type a fixed value as the length of the prefix.
LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface# It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.

Example
> ip6 addr -a
LAN
Unicast Address:
FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/64 (Link)
Multicast Address:
FF02::2
FF02::1:FF00:0
FF02::1
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp req_opt

This command is used to configure option-request settings for DHCPv6 client.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp req_opt [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
req_opt It means option-request.
-a It means to show current DHCPv6 status.
-s It means to ask the SIP.
-S It means to ask the SIP name.
-d It means to ask the DNS setting.
-D It means to ask the DNS name.
-n It means to ask NTP.
-i It means to ask NIS.
-I It means to ask NIS name.
-p It means to ask NISP.
-P It means to ask NISP name.
-b It means to ask BCMCS.
-B It means to ask BCMCS name.
-r It means to ask refresh time.
Parameter 1: the parameter related to the request will be displayed.
0: the parameter related to the request will not be displayed.
Example
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -S 1
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -r 1
> ip6 dhcp req_opt WAN2 -a
% Interface WAN2 is set to request following DHCPv6 options:
% sip name

>
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp client

This command allows you to use DHCPv6 protocol to obtain IPv6 address from server.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp client [WAN1|WAN2|iface#] [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
client It means the dhcp client settings.
[<command><parameter>|…] The available commands with parameters are listed below.
-p [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Prefix Delegation.
-n [IAID] It means to request identity association ID for Non-temporary
Address.
-c [parameter] It means to send rapid commit to server.
-i [parameter] It means to send information request to server.
-e[parameter] It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 client.
1: Enable
0: Disable
Example
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –p 2008::1
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_PD whose IAID equals to 2008
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –n 1023456
> ip6 dhcp client WAN2 –a
Interface WAN2 has following DHCPv6 client settings:
DHCPv6 client enabled
request IA_NA whose IAID equals to 2008
> system reboot
Telnet Command: ip6 dhcp server

This command allows you to configure DHCPv6 server.
Syntax
ip6 dhcp server [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description
server It means the dhcp server settings.
[<command> The available commands with parameters are listed below.
<parameter>|…] […] means that you can type in several commands in one line.

-i<pool_min_addr> It means to set the start IPv6 address of the address pool.
-x<pool_max_addr> It means to set the end IPv6 address of the address pool.
-d<addr> It means to set the first DNS IPv6 address.
-D<addr> It means to set the second DNS IPv6 address.
-c<parameter> It means to send rapid commit to server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
-e<parameter> It means to enable or disable the DHCPv6 server.
1: Enable
0: Disable
Example
> ip6 dhcp server -d FF02::1
> ip6 dhcp server -i ff02::1
> ip6 dhcp server -x ff02::3
> ip6 dhcp server -a
% Interface LAN has following DHCPv6 server settings:
% DHCPv6 server disabled
% maximum address of the pool: FF02::3
% minimum address of the pool: FF02::1
% 1st DNS IPv6 Addr: FF02::1
Telnet Command: ip6 internet

This command allows you to configure settings for accessing Internet.
Syntax
ip6 internet -W n -M n [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-W n W means to set WAN interface and n means different selections.
Default is WAN1.
n=1: WAN1
n=2: WAN2
n=3: WAN3
.
.
n=X: WANx
-M n M means to set Internet Access Mode (Mandatory) and n means
different modes (represented by 0 – 5)
n= 0: Offline,
n=1: PPP,
n=2: TSPC,
n=3: AICCU,
n=4: DHCPv6,

n=5: Static
n=6:6in4-Static
n=7:6rd
-m n It means to set IPv6 MTU.
N = any value (0 means “unspecified”).
-u <username> It means to set Username.
<username>= type a name as the username (maximum 63
characters).
-p <password> It means to set Password.
<password> = type a password (maximum 63 characters).
-s <server> It means to set Tunnel Server IP.
<server>= IPv4 address or URL (maximum 63 characters).
-d <server> It means to set the primary DNS Server IP.
<server>= type an IPv6 address for first DNS server.
-D <server> It means to set the secondary DNS Server IP.
<server>= type an IPv6 address for second DNS server.
-t <dhcp/ra/none> It means to set IPv6 PPP WAN test mode for DHCP or RADVD.
<dhcp/ra/none>= type IPv6 address.
-V It means to view IPv6 Internet Access Profile.
-o It means to set AICCU always on.
1=On,
0=Off
Example
> ip6 internet -W 2 -M 2 -u 88886666 -p draytek123456 –s
amsterdam.freenet6.net
This setting will take effect after rebooting.
Please use "sys reboot" command to reboot the router.
> system reboot
Telnet Command: ip6 neigh

This command allows you to display IPv6 neighbour table.
Syntax
ip6 neigh -s[ inet6_addr] [eth_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 neigh -d [inet6_addr] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 neigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
Syntax Description
-s It means to add a neighbour.
-d It means to delete a neighbour.
-a It means to show neighbour status.
inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address
eth_addr Type submask address.

LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the neighbor.
Example
> ip6 neigh -s 2001:2222:3333::1111 00:50:7F:11:ac:22:WAN2
Neighbour 2001:2222:3333::1111 successfully added!
> ip6 neigh -a
I/F ADDR MAC STATE

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LAN FF02::1 33-33-00-00-00-01 CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:2222:3333::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED
WAN2 2001:2222:6666::1111 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED
WAN2 :: 00-00-00-00-00-00 CONNECTED
LAN :: NONE
>

Telnet Command: ip6 pneigh
This command allows you to add a proxy neighbour.
Syntax
ip6 pneigh -s inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 pneigh -d inet6_addr [LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
ip6 pneigh -a [inet6_addr] [-N LAN|WAN1|WAN2]
Syntax Description
-s It means to add a proxy neighbour.
-d It means to delete a proxy neighbour.
-a It means to show proxy neighbour status.
inet6_addr Type an IPv6 address
LAN|WAN1|WAN2 Specify an interface for the proxy neighbor.
Example
> ip6 neigh -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 LAN
% Neighbour FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:300 successfully added!
Telnet Command: ip6 route

This command allows you to
Syntax
ip6 route -s [prefix] [prefix-length] [gateway] [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#> [-D]
ip6 route -d [prefix] [prefix-length]
ip6 route -a [LAN|WAN1|WAN2|iface#]
Syntax Description
-s It means to add a route.
-d It means to delete a route.
-a It means to show the route status.
-D It means that such route will be treated as the default route.
prefix It means to type the prefix number of IPv6 address.
gateway It means the gateway of the router.
Example
> ip6 route -s FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500 16 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100 LAN
% Route FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:500/16 successfully added!
> ip6 route -a LAN

PREFIX/PREFIX-LEN _EXPIRES_ _NEXT-HOP_ I/F METRIC STATE FLAGS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
FE80::/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U
0 ::
FE80::250:7FFF:FE00:0/128 LAN 0 UNICAST U
0 ::
FE80::/64 LAN 256 UNICAST U
0
FE80::/16 LAN 1024 UNICAST UGA
0 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:100
FF02::1/128 LAN 0 UNICAST UC
0 FF02::1
FF00::/8 LAN 256 UNICAST U
0
::/0 LAN -1 UNREACHABLE !
0
Telnet Command: ip6 ping

This command allows you to pin an IPv6 address or a host.
Syntax
ip6 ping [IPV6 address/Host] [LAN/WAN1/WAN2]
Syntax Description
IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
LAN/WAN1/WAN2 It means to specify LAN or WAN interface for such address.
Example
> ip6 ping 2001:4860:4860::8888 WAN2
Pinging 2001:4860:4860::8888 with 64 bytes of Data:
Receive reply from 2001:4860:4860::8888, time=330ms

Packets: Sent = 5, Received = 5, Lost = 0 <% loss>

>

Telnet Command: ip6 tracert
This command allows you to trace the routes from the router to the host.
Syntax
ip6 tracert [IPV6 address/Host]
Syntax Description
IPV6 address/Host It means to specify the IPv6 address or host for ping.
Example
> ip6 tracert 2001:4860:4860::8888
traceroute to 2001:4860:4860::8888, 30 hops max through protocol ICMP
1 2001:5C0:1400:B::10B8 340 ms
2 2001:4DE0:1000:A22::1 330 ms
3 2001:4DE0:A::1 330 ms
4 2001:4DE0:1000:34::1 340 ms
5 2001:7F8:1: :A501:5169:1 330 ms
6 2001:4860::1:0:4B3 350 ms
7 2001:4860::8:0:2DAF 330 ms
8 2001:4860::2:0:66E 340 ms
9 Request timed out. *
10 2001:4860:4860::8888 350 ms
Trace complete.
>
Telnet Command: ip6 tspc

This command allows you to display TSPC status.
Syntax
ip6 tspc [ifno]
Syntax Description
Ifno=1 (means WAN1)
Info=2 (means WAN2)
Example
> ip6 tspc 2
Local Endpoint v4 Address : 111.243.177.223
Local Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b9
Router DNS name : 8886666.broker.freenet6.net
Remote Endpoint v4 Address :81.171.72.11
Remote Endpoint v6 Address : 2001:05c0:1400:000b:0000:0000:0000:10b8
Tspc Prefixlen : 56
Tunnel Broker: Amsterdam.freenet.net

Status: Connected
>
Telnet Command: ip6 radvd

This command allows you to enable or disable RADVD server.
Syntax
Ip6 radvd –s [1|0] [lifetime]
ip6 radvd –V
Syntax Description
-s It means to enable or disable the default lifetime of the RADVD
server.
1: Enable the RADVD server.
0: Disable the RADVD server.
Lifetime It means to set the lifetime.
The lifetime associated with the default router in units of seconds.
It’s used to control the lifetime of the prefix. The maximum value
corresponds to 18.2 hours. A lifetime of 0 indicates that the router
is not a default router and should not appear on the default router
list.
Type the number (unit: second) you want.
-V It means to show the RADVD configuration.
-r It means RA default test.
-r [num] It means RA test for item [num].
Example
> ip6 radvd -s 1 1800
> ip6 radvd -V
% IPv6 Radvd Config:
Radvd : Enable, Default Lifetime : 1800 seconds
Telnet Command: ip6 mngt

This command allows you to manage the settings for access list.
Syntax
ip6 mngt list
ip6 mngt list [add<index> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <index>|flush]
ip6 mngt status
ip6 mngt [http|telnet|ping|https|ssh] [on|off]
Syntax Description
list It means to show the setting information of the access list.
status It means to show the status of IPv6 management.
add It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute

management through Internet.
index It means the number (1, 2 and 3) allowed to be configured for IPv6
management.
prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing
Internet.
remove It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6
settings.
flush It means to clear the IPv6 access table.
http|telnet|ping|https|ssh These protocols are used for accessing Internet.
on|off It means to enable (on) or disable (off) the Internet accessing
through http/telnet/ping.
Example
> ip6 mngt list add 1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128
> ip6 mngt list
% IPv6 Access List :
Index IPv6 Prefix Prefix Length
========================================
1 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1010 128
2 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:1020 128
3 FE80::250:7FFF:FE12:2080 128
> ip6 mngt status

% IPv6 Remote Management :
telnet : off, http : off, ping : off
Telnet Command: ip6 online

This command allows you to check the online status of IPv6 LAN /WAN.
Syntax
ip6 online [ifno]
Syntax Description
0=LAN1
1=WAN1
2=WAN2
Example
> ip6 online 0
% LAN 1 online status :
% Interface : UP
% IPv6 DNS Server: :: Static

% Tx packets = 408, Tx bytes = 32160, Rx packets = 428, Rx bytes =
33636
> ip6 online 1

% WAN 1 online status :
% IPv6 WAN1 Disabled
% Default Gateway : ::
% UpTime : 0:00:00
% Interface : DOWN
% Tx packets = 0, Tx bytes = 0, Rx packets = 0, Rx bytes = 0
Telnet Command: ip6 aiccu

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for WAN interface with connection type of
AICCU.
Syntax
ip6 aiccu [ifno]
ip6 aiccu subnet [add <ifno> <prefix> <prefix-length>|remove <ifno>|show <info>]
Syntax Description
1=WAN1
2=WAN2
add It means to add an IPv6 address which can be used to execute
management through Internet.
prefix It means to type the IPv6 address which will be used for accessing
Internet.
remove It means to remove (delete) the specified index number with IPv6
settings.
show It means to display the AICCU status.
Example
> ip6 aiccu subnet add 2 2001:1111:0000::1111 64
> ip6 aiccu 2
Status: Connecting
>ip6 aiccu subnet show 2

IPv6 WAN2 AICCU Subnet Prefix Config:
2001:1111::1111/64
>
Telnet Command: ip6 ntp

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for NTP (Network Time Protocols) server.
Syntax

ip6 ntp –h
ip6 ntp –v
ip6 ntp –p [0/1]
Syntax Description
–h It is used to display the usage of such command.
-v It is used to show the NTP state.
-p <0/1> It is used to specify NTP server for IPv6.
0 – Auto
1 – First Query IPv6 NTP Server.
Example
> ip6 ntp -p 1
% Set NTP Priority: IPv6 First
Telnet Command: ip6 lan

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings for LAN interface.
Syntax
ip6 lan -l n [-<l:w:d:D:m:o:s> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
–h It is used to display the usage of such command.
-l n It means to selete LAN interface to be set.
n= 1: LAN1
n= 2: LAN2, ... x: LANx. Default is LAN1
-w n It means to selete WAN interface to be primary interface.
n= 0: None,
n=1: WAN1 ,
n=2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-d <server> It means to set 1st DNS Server IP.

<server>= IPv6 Address
-D <server> It means to set 2nd DNS Server IP.

<server>= IPv6 Address
-m n It means to set ipv6 LAN management.

n=0:OFF
n=1:SLAAC. Default is SLAAC
n=2:DHCPv6
-o n It means to enable Other option(O-bit) flag. (O-bit is redundant

when management is DHCPv6)
n=0: Disable

n=1: Enable.
-e n It means to add an extension WAN.

n: 1: WAN1, 2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-E n It means to delete an extension WAN.

n: 1: WAN1 ,2: WAN2, ... x: WANx.
-b map It means to set bit map(decimal) for extension WAN.

map:
bit 0: WAN1
bit 1: WAN2, ... bit n: WAN(n+1).
-f n It means to disable IPv6.

n= 1: Disable IPv6,
n=0: Enable IPv6.
-R n It means to enable /disable RIPng.

n=1: Enable RIPng,
n=0: Disable RIPng.
-s n It means to show IPv6 LAN setting.

n=0:show all. Default is show all.
n=1: LAN1
n=2: LAN2, ... 50: LAN50,
n=51: DMZ.
Example
> ip6 lan -l 1 -w 1 -d 2001:4860:4860::8888 -o 1 -f 0 -s 2
% Set LAN1!
% Set primary WAN1!
% Set 1st DNS server 2001:4860:4860::8888
% Set Other Option Enable!
% [LAN1] support ipv6!
% [LAN2] setting:
% Primary WAN : WAN1
% Management : SLAAC
% Other Option : Disable
% WAN Exten : None
% Subnet ID : 2
% Static IP(0) : ::/0
% [ifno: 0, enable: 0]
% Static IP(1) : ::/0
% Static IP(2) : ::/0
% Static IP(3) : ::/0
% DNS1 : 2001:4860:4860::8888

% DNS2 : 2001:4860:4860::8844
% ULA Type : OFF
% RIPng : Enable
Telnet Command: ip6 session

This command allows you to set sessions limit for IPv6 address.
Syntax
ip6 session [on/off/default num/status/show]
ip6 session [add/del] [IP1-IP2] [num]
Syntax Description
on It means to turn on session limit for each IP.

off It means to turn off session limit for each IP.
default <num> It means to set the default number of session num limit.
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all IP range session limit settings.
add It means to add the session limit for an IPv6 range.
<IP1-IP2> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
del It means to delete the session limit for an IPv6 range by first IP (IP1)
or 'del all'.
Example
> ip6 session on
> ip6 session add 2100:ABCD::2-2100:ABCD::10 100
> ip6 session status
IPv6 range:
2100:ABCD::2 - 2100:ABCD::10 : 100
Current ip6 session limit is turn on
Current default session number is 100
Telnet Command: ip6 bandwidth

This command allows you to set IPv6 settings
Syntax
ip6 Bandwidth [on/off/default tx_rate rx_rate/status/show]
ip6 Bandwidth [add/del] [IP1-IP2] [tx][rx][shared]
Syntax Description
on It means to turn on bandwidth limit for each IP.
off It means to turn off bandwidth limit for each IP.

default <tx> <rx> It means to set the default transmission (tx), receiving (rx) rate of
bandwidth limit (0-30000 Kbps/Mbps).
status It means to display the current settings.
show It means to display all IP range bandwidth limit settings.
add It means to add the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range.
<IP1-IP2> - Specify a range for IPv6 addresses.
del It means to delete the bandwidth limit for an IPv6 range by first IP
(IP1) or 'del all'.
Example
> ip6 bandwidth on
> ip6 bandwidth add 2001:ABCD::2-2001:ABCD::10 512 5M shared
> ip6 bandwidth status
IPv6 range:
2001:ABCD::2 - 2001:ABCD::10 : Tx:512K Rx:5M shared
Current ip6 Bandwidth limit is turn on
Current default ip6 Bandwidth rate is Tx:2000K Rx:8000K bps
Telnet Command: ipf view

IPF users to view the version of the IP filter, to view/set the log flag, to view the running IP
filter rules.
Syntax
ipf view [-VcdhrtzZ]
Syntax Description
-V It means to show the version of this IP filter.
-c It means to show the running call filter rules.
-d It means to show the running data filter rules.
-h It means to show the hit-number of the filter rules.
-r It means to show the running call and data filter rules.
-t It means to display all the information at one time.
-z It means to clear a filter rule’s statistics.
-Z It means to clear IP filter’s gross statistics.
Example
> ipf view -V -c -d
ipf: IP Filter: v3.3.1 (1824)

Kernel: IP Filter: v3.3.1
Running: yes
Log Flags: 0x80947278 = nonip
Default: pass all, Logging: available
Telnet Command: ipf set

This command is used to set general rule for firewall.
Syntax
ipf set [Options]
ipf set [SET_NO] rule [RULE_NO] [Options]
Syntax Description
Options There are several options provided here, such as -v, -c [SET_NO], -d
[SET_NO],… and etc.
SET_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 12) of filter set.
RULE_NO It means to specify the index number (from 1 to 7) of filter rule set.
-v Type “-v” to view the configuration of general set.
-c [SET_NO] It means to setup Call Filter, e.g., -c 2. The range for the index
number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).
-d [SET_NO] It means to setup Data Filter, e.g., -d 3. The range for the index
number you can type is “0” to “12” (0 means “disable).
-l [VALUE] It means to setup Log Flag, e.g., -l 2
Type “0” to disable the log flag.
Type “1” to display the log of passed packet.
Type “2” to display the log of blocked packet.
Type “3” to display the log of non-matching packet.
- p [VALUE] It means to setup actions for packet not matching any rule, e.g., -p
1
Type “0” to let all the packets pass;
Type “1” to block all the packets.
-M [P2P_NO] It means to configure IM/P2P for the packets not matching with any
rule, e.g., -M 1
-U [URL_NO] It means to configure URL content filter for the packets not
matching with any rule, e.g., -U 1
-a [AD_SET] It means to configure the advanced settings.
-f [VALUE] It means to accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets.
-E [VALUE] It means to set the maximum count for session limitation.
-F [VALUE] It means to configure the load-balance policy.
-Q [VALUE] It means to set the QoS class.
Example
> ipf set -c 1 #set call filter start from set 1

Setting saved.
> ipf set -d 2 #set data filter start from set 2

Setting saved.
> ipf set -v
Call Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 1)

Data Filter: Enable (Start Filter Set = 2)
Log Flag : None
Actions for packet not matching any rule:

Pass or Block : Pass
CodePage : ANSI(1252)-Latin I
Max Sessions Limit: 60000
Current Sessions : 0
Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict
QOS Class : None
APP Enforcement : None
URL Content Filter: None
Load-Balance policy : Auto-select
--------------------------------------------------------------
Window size : 65535
Session timeout : 1440
DrayTek Banner : Enable
---------------------------------------------------------------
Apply IP filter to VPN incoming packets : Enable
Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets: Enable
----------------------------------------------------------------
Strict Security Checking
[ ]APP Enforcement
>
Telnet Command: ipf rule

This command is used to set filter rule for firewall.
Syntax
ipf rule s r [-<command> <parameter> | ...
ipf rule s r -v
Syntax Description
s Such word means Filter Set, range form 1~12.
r Such word means Filter Rule, range from 1~7.
[<command><parameter>|… The available commands with parameters are listed below.
] […] means that you can type in several commands in one line.
-e It means to enable or disable the rule setting.
0- disable
1- enable

-s o:g <obj> It means to specify source IP object and IP group.
o - indicates “object”.
g - indicates “group”.
obj - indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-s g 3" means
the third source IP group profile.
–s u <Address Type> <Start IP It means to configure source IP address including address type,
Address> <End IP Address> | start IP address, end IP address and address mask.
<Address Mask> u – It means “user defined”.
Address Type - Type the number (representing different address
type).
0 - Subnet Address
1 - Single Address
2 - Any Address
3 - Range Address
Example:
Set Subnet Address => -s u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0
Set Single Address => -s u 1 192.168.1.10
Set Any Address => -s u 2
Set Range Address => -s u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15
–d u <Address Type> <Start IP It means to configure destination IP address including address type,
Address> <End IP Address> | start IP address, end IP address and address mask.
<Address Mask> u – It means “user defined”.
Address Type - Type the number (representing different address
type).
0 - Subnet Address
1 - Single Address
2 - Any Address
3 - Range Address
Example:
Set Subnet Address => -d u 0 192.168.1.10 255.255.255.0
Set Single Address => -d u 1 192.168.1.10
Set Any Address => -d u 2
Set Range Address => -d u 3 192.168.1.10 192.168.1.15
-d o:g <obj> It means to specify destination IP object and IP group.
o – indicates “object”.
g – indicates “group”
<obj>– indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-192. For example, “-d g 1" means
the first destination IP group profile.
-S o:g <obj> It means to specify Service Type object and IP group.
o – indicates “object”.
g – indicates “group”
<obj> – indicates index number of object or index number of group.
Available settings range from 1-96. For example, “-S 0 1" means the
first service type object profile.
-S u <protocol> It means to configure advanced settings for Service Type, such as
<source_port__value> protocol and port range.
<destination_port_vale> u – it means “user defined”.
<protocol> – It means TCP(6),UDP(17), TCP/UDP(255).
<source_port__value> –
1 – Port OP, range is 0-3. 0:= =, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<
3 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is

1-65535.
5 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.
<destination_port_value>:
2 – Port OP, range is 0-3, 0:==, 1:!=, 2:>, 3:<
4 – Port range of the Start Port Number, range is
1-65535.
6 – Port range of the End Port Number, range is 1-65535.
-F It means the Filter action you can specify.
0 –Pass Immediately,
1 – Block Immediately,
2 – Pass if no further match,
3 – Block if no further match.
-q It means the classification for QoS.
1– Class 1,
2 – Class 2,
3 – Class 3,
4 – Other
-l It means load balance policy.
Such function is used for “debug” only.
-E It means to enable APP Enforcement.
-a<index> It means to specify which APP Enforcement profile will be applied.
<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 32. “0” means no profile
will be applied.
-u<index> It means to specify which URL Content Filter profile will be applied.
<index> – Available settings range from 0 ~ 8. “0” means no profile
will be applied.
-c It means to set code page. Different number represents different
code page.
0. None
1. ANSI(1250)-Central Europe
2. ANSI(1251)-Cyrillic
3. ANSI(1252)-Latin I
4. ANSI(1253)-Greek
5. ANSI(1254)-Turkish
6. ANSI(1255)-Hebrew
7. ANSI(1256)-Arabic
8. ANSI(1257)-Baltic
9. ANSI(1258)-Viet Nam
10. OEM(437)-United States
11. OEM(850)-Multilingual Latin I
12. OEM(860)-Portuguese
13. OEM(861)-Icelandic
14. OEM(863)-Canadian French
15. OEM(865)-Nordic
16. ANSI/OEM(874)-Thai
17. ANSI/OEM(932)-Japanese Shift-JIS
18. ANSI/OEM(936)-Simplified Chinese GBK
19. ANSI/OEM(949)-Korean
20. ANSI/OEM(950)-Traditional Chinese Big5
-C <Windows Size> It means to set Window size and Session timeout (Minute).
<Session_Timeout> <Windows Size> - Available settings range from 1 ~ 65535.

<Session_Timeout> - Make the best utilization of network resources.
-v It is used to show current filter/rule settings.
Example
> ipf rule 2 1 -e 1 -s "o 1" -d "o 2" -S "o 1" -F 2
> ipf rule 2 1 -v
Filter Set 2 Rule 1:
Status : Enable
Comments: xNetBios -> DNS
Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: <null>, <null>, <null>, <null>
Direction : LAN -> WAN

Source IP : Group1,
Destination IP: Group2,
Service Type : TCP/UDPGroup1,
Fragments : Don't Care
Pass or Block : Block Immediately

Branch to Other Filter Set: None
Max Sessions Limit : 32000
Current Sessions : 0
Mac Bind IP : Non-Strict
Qos Class : None
APP Enforcement : None
URL Content Filter : None
Load-Balance policy : Auto-select
Log : Disable
------------------------------------------------------------------
----
Window size : 65535
Session timeout : 1440
DrayTek Banner : Enable
------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Strict Security Checking
[ ]APP Enforcement
Telnet Command: ipf flowtrack

This command is used to set and view flowtrack sessions.
Syntax
ipf flowtrack set [-re]
ipf flowtrack view [-f]

ipf flowtrack [-i][-p][-t]
Syntax Description
-r It means to refresh the flowtrack.
-e It means to enable or disable the flowtrack.
-f It means to show the sessions state of flowtrack. If you do not
specify any IP address, then all the session state of flowtrack will be
displayed.
-b It means to show all of IP sessions state.
- i [IP address] It means to specify IP address (e.g,, -i 192.168.2.55).
-p[value] It means to type a port number (e.g., -p 1024).
Available settings are 0 ~ 65535.
-t [value] It means to specify a protocol (e.g., -t tcp).
Available settings include:
tcp
udp
icmp
Example
>ipf flowtrack set -r
Refresh the flowstate ok
> ipf flowtrack view -f
Start to show the flowtrack sessions state:
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:59939 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0

REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:59939 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93023180(3920), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11:15073 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11:15073 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93025100(2000), flag=203
ORIGIN>> 192.168.1.11: 7247 -> 8.8.8.8: 53 ,ifno=0
REPLY >> 8.8.8.8: 53 -> 192.168.1.11: 7247 ,ifno=3
proto=17, age=93020100(7000), flag=203
End to show the flowtrack sessions state
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Current flow_enable=0
> ipf flowtrack set -e
Curretn flow_enable=1
Telnet Command: Log

This command allows users to view log for WAN interface such as call log, IP filter log, flush
log buffer, etc.
Syntax
log [-cfhiptwx?] [-F a| c | f | w]
Syntax Description

-c It means to show the latest call log.
-f It means to show the IP filter log.
-F It means to show the flush log buffer.
a: flush all logs
c: flush the call log
f: flush the IP filter log
w: flush the WAN log
-h It means to show this usage help.
-p It means to show PPP/MP log.
-t It means to show all logs saved in the log buffer.
-w It means to show WAN log.
-x It means to show packet body hex dump.
Example
> log -w
25:36:25.580 ---->DHCP (WAN-5) Len = 548XID = 0x7880fdd4
Client IP = 0.0.0.0
Your IP = 0.0.0.0
Next server IP = 0.0.0.0
Relay agent IP = 0.0.0.0
Client IP = 0.0.0.0
Your IP = 0.0.0.0
Client IP = 0.0.0.0
Your IP = 0.0.0.0
Client IP = 0.0.0.0
Your IP = 0.0.0.0
Client IP = 0.0.0.0
Your IP = 0.0.0.0
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page]
---
Telnet Command: ldap user

This command is used to configure the LDAP profile.
Syntax
ldap user [INDEX][OPTION]
Syntax Description

INDEX Specify the index number (1 to 8) of the LDAP profile.
OPTION
-n VALUE Setup Profile Name.
-b VALUE Setup Base Distinguished Name.
-a VALUE If you have added containers to be published, you may need to
specify additional LDAP filters for each class of objects included in
these containers.
Creating LDAP filters is a fairly complex task that should be
performed by advanced users only. LDAP filters must be
RFC2254-compliant.
For example, to exclude from publication all users who either
belong to the HR department of your company or are members of
the HR Group. For example:
>ldap user 1 -a
"(!(|(department=HR)(memberOf=CN=HRGroup,OU=Groups,
DC=acme,DC=com)))"
Additional Filter has been updated.
-g VALUE Setup Group Distinguished Name.
-c VALUE Setup Common Name Identifier.
-v View detail information of the LDAP profile.
Example
>ldap user 1 -n LD_user_test1
Profile Name has been updated!
> ldap user 1 -v
Profile Index:1
Profile Name:LD_user_test1
Common Name Identifier:
Base Distinguished Name:
Additional Filter:
Group distinguished Name:
>ldap user 1 -b ou=People,dc=example,dc=com
Telnet Command: ldap set

This command is used to set general settings (e.g., IP address, port number) for LDAP server.
Syntax
ldap set [Options][Value]
Syntax Description
enable [0-1] Enable or disable LDAP function.
0 – Disable the function.
1 – Enable the function.
type [0-2] Set the bind type as Simple(0),Anonymous(1), and Regular(2).
ssl [0-1] Enable or disable LDAP function via SSL tunnel.
0 – Disable the function.
1 – Enable the function.
IP <VALUE> Set IP address for LDAP server.

port <VALUE> Set port number for LDAP server.
dn <VALUE> Set Regular DN value
PWD <VALUE> Set Regular password value.
Example
>ldap set enable 1
>ldap enabled.
> ldap set ssl 1
LDAP with SSL has been enabled!
> ldap set IP 192.168.100.155
LDAP Server IP has been setting.
> ldap set port 389
LDAP Server Port has been setting.
> ldap set dn dc=example,dc=com
LDAP Regular DN has been setting.
> ldap set PWD 123456
LDAP Regular Password has been setting.
Telnet Command: ldap view

This command is used to check current status of LDAP settings configuration.
Syntax
ldap view
Example
> ldap view ?
LDAP Enable:Disabled.
LDAP Bind Type:Simple
LDAP with SSL:Disabled
LDAP Regular DN:
LDAP Regular Password:
LDAP Server IP:
LDAP Server Port:389
Telnet Command: tacacsplus set

This command allows users to configure general settings for TACACS+ server
Syntax
tacacspluse set [Options][Value]
Syntax Description
enable [0-1] Disable (0)/enable(1) the TACACS+ server.
IP <VALUE> Set the IP address of TACACS+ server.
port <VALUE> Set the port number of TACACS+ server.
shared_secret <VALUE> Set the Shared Secret value of TACACS+ Server.
Example

> tacacsplus set enable 1
TACACS+ enabled!
> tacacsplus set IP 192.168.1.59

TACACS+ Server IP has been setting.
> tacacsplus view
TACACS+ Enable:Enable.
TACACS+ Server IP:192.168.1.59
TACACS+ Server Port:49
TACACS+ Type:ASCII
TACACS+ Shared Secret:
Telnet Command: tacacsplus view

This command allows users to check the general settings for TACACS+ server
Syntax
tacacspluse view
Example
> tacacsplus view
TACACS+ Enable:Enable.
TACACS+ Server IP:192.168.1.59
TACACS+ Server Port:49
TACACS+ Type:ASCII
TACACS+ Shared Secret:
Telnet Command: mngt ftpport

This command allows users to set FTP port for management.
Syntax
mngt ftpport [FTP port]
Syntax Description
FTP port It means to type the number for FTP port. The default setting is
21.
Example
> mngt ftpport 21
% Set FTP server port to 21 done.
Telnet Command: mngt httpport

This command allows users to set HTTP port for management.
Syntax
mngt httpport [Http port]

Syntax Description
Http port It means to enter the number for HTTP port. The default setting is
80.
Example
> mngt httpport 80
% Set web server port to 80 done.
Telnet Command: mngt httpsport

This command allows users to set HTTPS port for management.
Syntax
mngt httpsport [Https port]
Syntax Description
Https port It means to type the number for HTTPS port. The default setting is
443.
Example
> mngt httpsport 443
% Set web server port to 443 done.
Telnet Command: mngt telnetport

This command allows users to set telnet port for management.
Syntax
mngt telnetport [Telnet port]
Syntax Description
Telnet port It means to type the number for telnet port. The default setting is
23.
Example
> mngt telnetport 23
% Set Telnet server port to 23 done.
Telnet Command: mngt sshport

This command allows users to set SSH port for management.
Syntax
mngt sshport [ssh port]
Syntax Description

ssh port It means to type the number for SSH port. The default setting is
22.
Example
> mngt sshport 23
% Set ssh port to 23 done.
Telnet Command: mngt ftpserver

This command can enable/disable FTP server.
Syntax
mngt ftpserver [enable]
mngt ftpserver [disable]
Syntax Description
enable It means to activate FTP server function.
disable It means to inactivate FTP server function.
Example
> mngt ftpserver enable
%% FTP server has been enabled.
> mngt ftpserver disable

%% FTP server has been disabled.
Telnet Command: mngt noping

This command is used to pass or block Ping from LAN PC to the internet.
Syntax
mngt noping [on]
mngt noping [off]
mngt noping [viewlog]
mngt noping [clearlog]
Syntax Description
on All PING packets will be forwarded from LAN PC to Internet.
off All PING packets will be blocked from LAN PC to Internet.
viewlog It means to display a log of ping action, including source MAC and
source IP.
clearlog It means to clear the log of ping action.
Example
> mngt noping off

No Ping Packet Out is OFF!!

Telnet Command: mngt defenseworm
This command can block specified port for passing through the router.
Syntax
mngt defenseworm [on]
mngt defenseworm [off]
mngt defenseworm [add port]
mngt defenseworm [del port]
mngt defenseworm [viewlog]
mngt defenseworm [clearlog]
Syntax Description
on It means to activate the function of defense worm packet out.
off It means to inactivate the function of defense worm packet out.
add port It means to add a new TCP port for block.
del port It means to delete a TCP port for block.
viewlog It means to display a log of defense worm packet, including source
MAC and source IP.
clearlog It means to remove the log of defense worm packet.
Example
> mngt defenseworm add 21
Add TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445, 21
> mngt defenseworm del 21
Delete TCP port 21
Block TCP port list: 135, 137, 138, 139, 445
Telnet Command: mngt rmtcfg

This command can allow the system administrators to login from the Internet. By default, it is
not allowed.
Syntax
mngt rmtcfg [status]
mngt rmtcfg [enable]
mngt rmtcfg [disable]
mngt rmtcfg [http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/tr069] [on/off]
Syntax Description
status It means to display current setting for your reference.
enable It means to allow the system administrators to login from the
Internet.
disable It means to deny the system administrators to login from the

Internet.
http/https/ftp/telnet/ssh/t It means to specify one of the servers/protocols for enabling or
r069 disabling.
on/off on – enable the function.
off – disable the function.
Example
> mngt rmtcfg ftp on
Enable server fail
Remote configure function has been disabled
please enable by enter mngt rmtcfg enable
> mngt rmtcfg enable

%% Remote configure function has been enabled.
> mngt rmtcfg ftp on
%% FTP server has been enabled.
Telnet Command: mngt lanaccess

This command allows users to manage accessing into Vigor router through LAN port.
Syntax
mngt lanaccess -e [0/1] –s [value] –i [value]
mngt lanaccess –f
mngt lanaccess –d
mngt lanaccess –v
mngt lanaccess –h
Syntax Description
-e[0/1] It means to enable/disable the function.
0-disable the function.
1-enable the function.
-s[value] It means to specify service offered.
Available values include:
FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, SSH, None, All
-i[value] It means the interface which is allowed to access.
LAN2~LAN6, DMZ, IP Routed Subnet, None, All
Note: LAN1 is always allowed for accessing into the router.
-f It means to flush all of the settings.
-d It means to restore the factory default settings.
-v It means to view current settings.
-h It means to get the usage of such command.
Example
> mngt lanaccess -e 1
> mngt lanaccess -s FTP,TELNET

> mngt lanaccess -i LAN3
> > mngt lanaccess -v
Current LAN Access Control Setting:
* Enable:Yes
* Service:
- FTP:Yes
- HTTP:No
- HTTPS:No
- TELNET:Yes
- SSH:No
* Subnet:
- LAN 2: disabled
- LAN 3: enabled
- LAN 4: disabled
- LAN 5: disabled
- LAN 6: disabled
- DMZ: disabled
- IP Routed Subnet: disabled
Note: the settings do NOT apply to LAN1, LAN1 is always allowed to access
the router
Telnet Command: mngt echoicmp

This command allows users to reject or accept PING packets from the Internet.
Syntax
mngt echoicmp [enable]
mngt echoicmp [disable]
Syntax Description
enable It means to accept the echo ICMP packet.
disable It means to drop the echo ICMP packet.
Example
> mngt echoicmp enable
%% Echo ICMP packet enabled.
Telnet Command: mngt accesslist

This command allows you to specify that the system administrator can login from a specific
host or network. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.
Syntax
mngt accesslist list
mngt accesslist add [index][ip addr][mask]
mngt accesslist remove [index]
mngt accesslist flush

Syntax Description
list It can display current setting for your reference.
add It means adding a new entry.
index It means to specify the number of the entry.
ip addr It means to specify an IP address.
mask It means to specify the subnet mask for the IP address.
remove It means to delete the selected item.
flush It means to remove all the settings in the access list.
Example
> mngt accesslist add 1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0
%% Set OK.
> mngt accesslist list
%% Access list :
Index IP address Subnet mask
==========================================
1 192.168.1.89 255.255.255.0
Telnet Command: mngt snmp

This command allows you to configure SNMP for management.
Syntax
mngt snmp [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-e <1/2> 1: Enable the SNMP function.
2: Disable the SNMP function.
-g<Community name> It means to set the name for getting community by typing a proper
character. (max. 23 characters)
-s <Community name> It means to set community by typing a proper name. (max. 23
characters)
-m <IP address> It means to set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function.
Please type in IPv4 address to specify certain host.
-t <Community name> It means to set trap community by typing a proper name. (max. 23
characters)
-n <IP address> It means to set the IPv4 address of the host that will receive the
trap community.
-T <seconds> It means to set the trap timeout <0~999>.
-V It means to list SNMP setting.
Example
> mngt snmp -e 1 -g draytek -s DK -m 192.168.1.1 -t trapcom -n 10.20.3.40

-T 88
SNMP Agent Turn on!!!
Get Community set to draytek
Set Community set to DK
Manager Host IP set to 192.168.1.1
Trap Community set to trapcom
Notification Host IP set to 10.20.3.40
Trap Timeout set to 88 seconds
Telnet Command: mngt bfp

This command allows you to configure brute force protect (BFP) for system management.
Syntax
mngt bfp [<command><parameter>|…]
Syntax Description
-e 0/1 Enable / disable the BFP function.
0 – Disable
1 – Enable
-s [service] It means to enable different service.
service - Available types are FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, TELNET, TR069, SSH,
None and All.
-l [failure] It means to set login failure retry times.
failure - Available number is from 1 to 255.
-p [penalty] It means to set penalty time for BFP. The unit is sec.
-v It means to view current settings.
Example
> mngt bfp -e 1
> mngt bfp -s FTP
> mngt bfp -l 10
> mngt bfp -v
Current Brute Force Protection Setting:
* Enable: yes
* Service:
- FTP: yes
- HTTP: no
- HTTPS: no
- TELNET: no
- TR069: no
- SSH: no
* Maximum login failures: 10
* Penalty period: 0
Telnet Command: msubnet switch

This command is used to configure multi-subnet.

Syntax
msubnet switch [2/3/4/5/6][On/Off]
Syntax Description
2/3/4/5/6 It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6
On/Off On means turning on the subnet for the specified LAN interface.
Off means turning off the subnet.
Example
> msubnet switch 2 On
% LAN2 Subnet On!

Telnet Command: msubnet addr

This command is used to configure IP address for the specified LAN interface.
Syntax
msubnet addr [2~50][IP address]
Syntax Description
2 ~50 It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ..............
IP address Type the private IP address for the specified LAN interface.
Example
> msubnet addr 2 192.168.5.1
% Set LAN2 subnet IP address done !!!

Telnet Command: msubnet nmask

This command is used to configure net mask address for the specified LAN interface.

Syntax
msubnet nmask [2~50][IP address]
Syntax Description
2~50 It means LAN interface.
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ....................
IP address Type the subnet mask address for the specified LAN interface.
Example
> msubnet nmask 2 255.255.0.0
% Set 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 subnet mask done !!!

Telnet Command: msubnet status

This command is used to display current status of subnet.
Syntax
msubnet status [2~50]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ..........
Example
> msubnet status 2
% LAN2 Off: 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0, PPP Start IP: 0.0.0.60
% DHCP server: Off
% Dhcp Gateway: 0.0.0.0, Start IP: 0.0.0.10, Pool Count: 50
Telnet Command: msubnet dhcps

This command allows you to enable or disable DHCP server for the subnet.
Syntax
msubnet dhcps [2~50 [On/Off]
Syntax Description

2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 .......................
On/Off On means enabling the DHCP server for the specified LAN interface.
Off means disabling the DHCP server.
Example
> msubnet dhcps 3 off
% LAN3 Subnet DHCP Server disabled!

Telnet Command: msubnet nat

This command is used to configure the subnet for NAT or Routing usage.
Syntax
msubnet nat [2~50] [On/Off]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ..................
On/Off On – It means the subnet will be configured for NAT usage.
Off - It means the subnet will be configured for Routing usage.
Example
> > msubnet nat 2 off
% LAN2 Subnet is for Routing usage!
%Note: If you have multiple WAN connections, please be reminded to setup
a Load-Balance policy so that packets from this subnet will be forwarded
to the right WAN interface!

Telnet Command: msubnet gateway

This command is used to configure an IP address as the gateway used for subnet.
Syntax
msubnet gateway [2~50] [Gateway IP]

Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6.................
Gateway IP Specify an IP address as the gateway IP.
Example
> msubnet gateway 2 192.168.1.13
% Set LAN2 Dhcp Gateway IP done !!!

Telnet Command: msubnet ipcnt

This command is used to defined the total number allowed for each LAN interface.
Syntax
msubnet ipcnt [2~50] [IP counts]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 .....
IP counts Specify a total number of IP address allowed for each LAN interface.
The available range is from 0 to 220.
Example
> msubnet ipcnt 2 15
Telnet Command: msubnet talk

This command is used to establish a route between two LAN interfaces.
Syntax
msubnet talk [2~50] [2~50] [On/Off]
Syntax Description

1=LAN1
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6.....
On/Off On – It means
Off - It means
Example
> msubnet talk 1 2 on
% Enable routing between LAN1 and LAN2 !

> msubnet talk ?
% msubnet talk <1/2/3/4/5/6> <1/2/3/4/5/6> <On/Off>
% where 1:LAN1, 2:LAN2, 3:LAN3, 4:LAN4, 5:LAN5, 6:LAN6
% Now:
% LAN1 LAN2 LAN3 LAN4 LAN5 LAN6
% LAN1 V
% LAN2 V V
% LAN3 V
% LAN4 V
% LAN5 V
% LAN6 V
...
Telnet Command: msubnet startip

This command is used to configure a starting IP address for DCHP.
Syntax
msubnet startip [2~50] [Gateway IP]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ......
Gateway IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for a subnet.
Example
> msubnet startip 2 192.168.2.90
%Set LAN2 Dhcp Start IP done !!!

> msubnet startip ?
% msubnet startip <2/3/4/5/6> <Gateway IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.90; LAN3 192.168.3.10; LAN4 192.168.4.10; LAN5
192.168.5.1
0; LAN6 192.168.6.10
Telnet Command: msubnet pppip

This command is used to configure a starting IP address for PPP connection.
Syntax
msubnet pppip [2~50] [Start IP]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ......
Start IP Type an IP address as the starting IP address for PPP connection.
Example
> msubnet pppip 2 192.168.2.250
% Set LAN2 PPP(IPCP) Start IP done !!!

> msubnet pppip ?

% msubnet pppip <2/3/4/5/6> <Start IP>
% Now: LAN2 192.168.2.250; LAN3 192.168.3.200; LAN4 192.168.4.200; LAN5
192.168.5.200; LAN6 192.168.6.200
Telnet Command: msubnet nodetype

This command is used to specify the type for node which is required by DHCP option.
Syntax
msubnet nodetype [2~50][count]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5

6=LAN6 ......
count Choose the following number for specifying different node type.
1= B-node
2= P-node
4= M-node
8= H-node
0= Not specify any type for node.
Example
> msubnet nodetype ?
% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5/6> <count>
% Now: LAN2 0; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0; LAN6 0
% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
> msubnet nodetype 2 1

% Set LAN2 Dhcp Node Type done !!!
> msubnet nodetype ?

% msubnet nodetype <2/3/4/5/6> <count>
% Now: LAN2 1; LAN3 0; LAN4 0; LAN5 0; LAN6 0
% count: 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
Telnet Command: msubnet primWINS

This command is used to configure primary WINS server.
Syntax
msubnet primWINS [2~50] [WINS IP]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ......
WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP.
Example
> msubnet primWINS ?
% msubnet primWINS
<2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24
/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/
47/48/49/50>
<WINS IP>
% Now: 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 0.0.0.0; 7/48/49/50 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;

0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0
> msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5
DrayTek> msubnet primWINS 2 192.168.3.5
% Set 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 Dhcp Primary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet primWINS ?

% msubnet primWINS
<2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24
/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/
47/48/49/50>
<WINS IP>
% Now: 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 192.168.3.5; 7/48/49/50 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.
0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.
Telnet Command: msubnet secWINS

This command is used to configure secondary WINS server.
Syntax
msubnet secWINS [2~50 [WINS IP]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ......
WINS IP Type the IP address as the WINS IP.
Example
> msubnet secWINS 2 192.168.3.89
% Set 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 Dhcp Secondary WINS IP done !!!
> msubnet secWINS ?

DrayTek> msubnet secWINS ?

% msubnet secWINS
<2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/
25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/
47/48/49/50> <
WINS IP>
% Now: 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 192.168.3.89; 7/48/49/50 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0
.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0; 0.0.0.0;
0.0.0.0; 0.0.0

Telnet Command: msubnet tftp
This command is used to set TFTP server for multi-subnet.
Syntax
msubnet tftp [2~50] [TFTP server name]
Syntax Description
2=LAN2
3=LAN3
4=LAN4
5=LAN5
6=LAN6 ......
TFTP server name Type a name to indicate the TFTP server.
Example
DrayTek> msubnet tftp ?
% msubnet tftp
<2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25/
26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/4
8/49/50> <TFTP server name>
% Now: 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50
7/48/49/50
DrayTek> msubnet tftp 2 publish

% Set 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 TFTP Server Name done !!!
> msubnet tftp ?

DrayTek> msubnet tftp ?
% msubnet tftp
<2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25/
26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/4
8/49/50> <TFTP server name>
% Now: 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 publish
7/48/49/50......
Telnet Command: msubnet mtu

This command allows you to configure MTU value for LAN/DMZ/IP Routed Subnet.
Syntax
msubnet mtu [interface][value]
Syntax Description
interface Available settings include LAN1~LAN50, IP_Routed_Subnet.
value 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)

Example
> msubnet mtu LAN1 1492
> msubnet mtu ?
Usage:
>msubnet mtu <interface> <value>
<interface>: LAN1~LAN6,IP_Routed_Subnet,DMZ
<value>: 1000 ~ 1508 (Bytes), default: 1500 (Bytes)
e.x: >msubnet mtu LAN1 1492
Current Settings:
LAN1 MTU: 1492 (Bytes)

...
IP Routed Subnet MTU: 1500 (Bytes)
Telnet Command: msubnet leasetime

This command allows you to set leasetime for DHCP server. It is helpful to manage the IP
address(es) assigned by DHCP server.
Syntax
msubnet leasetime [1~50][Lease Time (sec.)]
Syntax Description
1~50 1 – 50 represent LAN1 to LAN50.
Lease Time (sec.) Range from 1 to 259200.
If no value specified here, Vigor router system will use the

maximum value, 259200, as the leasetime.
Example
> DrayTek> msubnet leasetime ?
% msubnet leasetime
<1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23
/24/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/4

8/49/50> <Lease Time (sec.)>
% Now:9/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 86400; 3/44/45/46/47/48/49/50
259200; 7/48/49/50 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200; 259200;
259200; 259200
DrayTek> msubnet leasetime 1
% Set 9/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/50 lease time: 259200
Telnet Command: object ip obj

This command is used to create an IP object profile.
Syntax
object ip obj setdefault
object ip obj INDEX -v
object ip obj INDEX -n NAME
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]
Syntax Description
setdefault It means to return to default settings for all profiles.
INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified object profile.
Example: object ip obj 1 -v
-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP object.
NAME: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.
INTERFACE=0, means any
INTERFACE=1, means LAN
INTERFACE=3, means WAN
Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0
-s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INVERT=0, means disableing the function.
INVERT=1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1
-a TYPE It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.
TYPE=0, means Mask
TYPE=1, means Single

TYPE=2, means Any
TYPE=3, means Rang
Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2
[START_IP] When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a
starting point and another IP address as end point.
Type an IP address.
[END/MASK_IP] Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.
Example
> object ip obj 1 -n marketing
> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45
> object ip obj 1 -v
IP Object Profile 1
Name :[marketing]
Interface:[Any]
Address type:[single]
Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]
End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]
Invert Selection:[0]
Telnet Command: object ip grp

This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.
Syntax
object ip grp setdefault
object ip grp INDEX -v
object ip grp INDEX -n NAME
object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
INDEX It means the index number of the specified group profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified group profile.
Example: object ip grp 1 -v
-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group.
Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0
-a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group

under such profile.
Example
> object ip grp 2 -n First
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Any]
Included ip object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
> object ip grp 2 -i 1

> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Lan]
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]

Telnet Command: object ipv6 obj
This comman is used to create an IP object profile.
Syntax
object ip obj setdefault
object ip obj INDEX -v
object ip obj INDEX -n NAME
object ip obj INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip obj INDEX -s INVERT
object ip obj INDEX -a TYPE [START_IP] [END/MASK_IP]
Syntax Description
INDEX It means the index number of the specified object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified object profile.
Example: object ip obj 1 -v
Example: object ip obj 9 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP object.
Example: object ip obj 8 -i 0
-s INVERT It means to set invert seletion for the object profile.
INVERT=0, means disableing the function.
INVERT=1, means enabling the function.
Example: object ip obj 3 -s 1
-a TYPE It means to set the address type and IP for the IP object profile.
TYPE=0, means Mask
TYPE=1, means Single
TYPE=2, means Any
TYPE=3, means Rang
Example: object ip obj 3 -a 2
[START_IP] When the TYPE is set with 2, you have to type an IP address as a
starting point and another IP address as end point.
Type an IP address.
[END/MASK_IP] Type an IP address (different with START_IP) as the end IP address.
Example
> object ip obj 1 -n marketing
> object ip obj 1 -a 1 192.168.1.45
> object ip obj 1 -v
IP Object Profile 1
Name :[marketing]

Interface:[Any]
Address type:[single]
Start ip address:[192.168.1.45]
End/Mask ip address:[0.0.0.0]
Invert Selection:[0]
Telnet Command: object ipv6 grp

This command is used to integrate several IP objects under an IP group profile.
Syntax
object ip grp setdefault
object ip grp INDEX -v
object ip grp INDEX -n NAME
object ip grp INDEX -i INTERFACE
object ip grp INDEX -a IP_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
Example: object ip grp 1 -v
-n NAME It means to define a name for the IP group.
Example: object ip grp 8 -n bruce
-i INTERFACE It means to define an interface for the IP group.
Example: object ip grp 3 -i 0
-a IP_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify IP object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object ip grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The IP object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be group
under such profile.
Example
> object ip grp 2 -n First
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Any]
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]

[7:][0]
> object ip grp 2 -i 1

> object ip grp 2 -a 1 2
IP Group Profile 2
Name :[First]
Interface:[Lan]
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
Telnet Command: object service obj

This command is used to create service object profile.
Syntax
object service obj setdefault
object service obj INDEX -v
object service obj INDEX -n NAME
object service obj INDEX -p PROTOCOL
object service obj INDEX -s CHK [START_P] [END_P]
object service obj INDEX -d CHK [START_P] [END_P]
Syntax Description
INDEX It means the index number of the specified service object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified service object
profile.
Example: object service obj 1 -v
Example: object service obj 9 -n bruce
-i PROTOCOL It means to define a PROTOCOL for the service object profile.
PROTOCOL =0, means any
PROTOCOL =1, means ICMP
PROTOCOL =2, means IGMP
PROTOCOL =6, means TCP
PROTOCOL =17, means UDP
PROTOCOL =255, means TCP/UDP
Other values mean other protocols.
Example: object service obj 8 -i 0
CHK It means the check action for the port setting.
0=equal(=), when the starting port and ending port values are the

same, it indicates one port; when the starting port and ending port
values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available
for this service type.
1=not equal(!=), when the starting port and ending port values are
the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here;
when the starting port and ending port values are different, it
indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are
available for this service type.
2=larger(>), the port number greater than this value is available..
3=less(<), the port number less than this value is available for this
profile.
-s CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set souce port check and configure port range (1~65565)
for TCP/UDP.
END_P, type a port number to indicate source port.
Example: object service obj 3 -s 0 100 200
-d CHK [START_P] [END_P] It means to set destination port check and configure port range
(1~65565) for TCP/UDP.
END_P, type a port number to indicate destination port.
Example: object service obj 3 -d 1 100 200
Example
> object service obj 1 -n limit
> object service obj 1 -p 255
> object service obj 1 -s 1 120 240
> object service obj 1 -d 1 200 220
> object service obj 1 -v
Service Object Profile 1
Name :[limit]
Protocol:[255]
Source port check action:[!=]
Source port range:[120~240]
Destination port check action:[!=]
Destination port range:[200~220]
Telnet Command: object service grp

This command is used to integrate several service objects under a service group profile.
Syntax
object service grp setdefault
object service grp INDEX -v
object service grp INDEX -n NAME
object service grp INDEX -a SER_OBJ_INDEX
Syntax Description
Example: object service grp 1 -v
-n NAME It means to define a name for the service group.

Example: object service grp 8 -n bruce
-a SER_OBJ_INDEX It means to specify service object profiles for the group profile.
Example: :object service grp 3 -a 1 2 3 4 5
The service object profiles with index number 1,2,3,4 and 5 will be
group under such profile.
Example
>object service grp 1 -n Grope_1
Service Group Profile 1
Name :[Grope_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][0]
[1:][0]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
> object service grp 1 -a 1 2

Service Group Profile 1
Name :[Grope_1]
Included service object index:
[0:][1]
[1:][2]
[2:][0]
[3:][0]
[4:][0]
[5:][0]
[6:][0]
[7:][0]
Telnet Command: object kw

This command is used to create keyword profile.
Syntax
object kw obj setdefault
object kw obj show PAGE
object kw obj INDEX -v
object kw obj INDEX -n NAME
object kw obj INDEX -a CONTENTS
Syntax Description
show PAGE It means to show the contents of the specified profile.

PAGE: type the page number.
show It means to show the contents for all of the profiles.
INDEX It means the index number of the specified keyword profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified keyword profile.
-n NAME It means to define a name for the keyword profile.
-a CONTENTS It means to set the contents for the keyword profile.
Example: object kw obj 40 -a test
Example
> object kw obj 1 -n children
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[]
> object kw obj 1 -a gambling
Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
> object kw obj 1 -v

Profile 1
Name :[children]
Content:[gambling]
Telnet Command: object fe

This command is used to create File Extension Object profile.
Syntax
object fe show
object fe setdefault
object fe obj INDEX -v
object fe obj INDEX -n NAME
object fe obj INDEX -e CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
object fe obj INDEX -d CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION
Syntax Description
INDEX It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified file
extension object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified file extension
object profile.
-n NAME It means to define a name for the file extension object profile.
-e It means to enable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION.

-d It means to disable the specific CATEGORY or FILE_EXTENSION
CATEGORY|FILE_EXTENSION CATEGORY:
Image, Video, Audio, Java, ActiveX, Compression, Executation
Example: object fe obj 1 -e Image
FILE_EXTENSION:
".bmp", ".dib", ".gif", ".jpeg", ".jpg", ".jpg2", ".jp2", ".pct",
".pcx", ".pic", ".pict", ".png", ".tif", ".tiff", ".asf", ".avi",
".mov", ".mpe", ".mpeg", ".mpg", ".mp4", ".qt", ".rm", ".wmv",
".3gp", ".3gpp", ".3gpp2", ".3g2", ".aac", ".aiff", ".au", ".mp3",
".m4a", ".m4p", ".ogg", ".ra", ".ram", ".vox", ".wav", ".wma",
".class", ".jad", ".jar", ".jav", ".java", ".jcm", ".js", ".jse",
".jsp", ".jtk", ".alx", ".apb", ".axs", ".ocx", ".olb", ".ole",
".tlb", ".viv", ".vrm", ".ace", ".arj", ".bzip2", ".bz2", ".cab",
".gz", ".gzip", ".rar", ".sit", ".zip", ".bas", ".bat", ".com",
".exe", ".inf", ".pif", ".reg", ".scr"
Example: object fe obj 1 -e .bmp
Example
> object fe obj 1 -n music
> object fe obj 1 -e Audio
> object fe obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[music]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Image category:
[ ].bmp [ ].dib [ ].gif [ ].jpeg [ ].jpg [ ].jpg2 [ ].jp2 [ ].pct
[ ].pcx [ ].pic [ ].pict [ ].png [ ].tif [ ].tiff
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Video category:
[ ].asf [ ].avi [ ].mov [ ].mpe [ ].mpeg [ ].mpg [v].mp4 [ ].qt
[ ].rm [v].wmv [ ].3gp [ ].3gpp [ ].3gpp2 [ ].3g2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Audio category:
[v].aac [v].aiff [v].au [v].mp3 [v].m4a [v].m4p [v].ogg [v].ra
[v].ram [v].vox [v].wav [v].wma
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Java category:
[ ].class [ ].jad [ ].jar [ ].jav [ ].java [ ].jcm [ ].js [ ].jse
[ ].jsp [ ].jtk
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
ActiveX category:
[ ].alx [ ].apb [ ].axs [ ].ocx [ ].olb [ ].ole [ ].tlb [ ].viv
[ ].vrm
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Compression category:
[ ].ace [ ].arj [ ].bzip2 [ ].bz2 [ ].cab [ ].gz [ ].gzip [ ].rar
[ ].sit [ ].zip

-------------------------------------------------------------------------
------
Executation category:
[ ].bas [ ].bat [ ].com [ ].exe [ ].inf [ ].pif [ ].reg [ ].scr
Telnet Command: object sms

This command is used to create short message object profile.
Syntax
object sms show
object sms setdefault
object sms obj INDEX -v
object sms obj INDEX -n NAME
object sms obj INDEX -s Service Provider
object sms obj INDEX -u Username
object sms obj INDEX -p Password
object sms obj INDEX -q Quota
object sms obj INDEX -i Interval
object sms obj INDEX -l URL
Syntax Description
[INDEX] It means the index number (from 1 to 10) of the specified SMS
object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified SMS object
profile.
-n [NAME] It means to define a name for the SMS object profile.
-s [Service Provider] It means to specify the number of the service provider which offers
the service of SMS. Different numbers represent different service
provider.
0 : kotsms.com.tw (TW)
2 : textmarketer.co.uk (UK)
4 : messagemedia.co.uk (UK)
5 : bulksms.com (INT)
6 : bulksms.co.uk (UK)
7 : bulksms.2way.co.za (ZA)
8 : bulksms.com.es (ES)
9 : usa.bulksms.com (US)
10 : bulksms.de (DE)
11 : www.pswin.com (EU)
12 : www.messagebird.com (EU)
13 : www.lusosms.com (EU)
14 : www.vibeactivemedia.com (UK)
-u [Username] It means to define a user name for the SMS object profile.
Type a user name that the sender can use to register to selected
SMS provider.
-p [Password] It means to define a password for the SMS object profile.
Type a password that the sender can use to register to selected SMS
provider.
-q [Quota] Enter the number of the credit that you purchase from the service
provider.

Note that one credit equals to one SMS text message on the
standard route.
-I [Interval] It means to set the sending interval for the SMS to be delivered.
Enter the shortest time interval for the system to send SMS.
-l [URL] It means to set the URL for Custom 1 and Custom 2 profiles.
The profile name for Custom 1 and Custom 2 are defined in default
and can not be changed.
Example
> object sms obj 1 –n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -n CTC
> object sms obj 1 -s 0
> object sms obj 1 -u carrie
> object sms obj 1 -p 19971125cm
> object sms obj 1 -q 2
> object sms obj 1 -i 50
> object sms obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[CTC]
SMS Provider:[kotsms.com.tw (TW)]
Username:[carrie]
Password:[******]
Quota:[2]
Sending Interval:[50(seconds)]
Telnet Command: object mail

This command is used to create mail object profile.
Syntax
object mail show
object mail setdefault
object mail obj INDEX -v
object mail obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX -s SMTP Server
object mail obj INDEX -l Use SSL
object mail obj INDEX -m SMTP Port
object mail obj INDEX -a Sender Address
object mail obj INDEX -t Authentication
object mail obj INDEX -u Username
object mail obj INDEX -p Password
object mail obj INDEX -i Sending Interval
Syntax Description
[INDEX] It means the index number (from 1 to 10) of the specified mail
object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified mail object
profile.
-n [Profile Name] It means to define a name for the mail object profile.
Profile Name: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
-s [SMTP Server] It means to set the IP address of the mail server.

-l [Use SSL] It means to use port 465 for SMTP server for some e-mail server uses
https as the transmission method.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
-m [SMTP Port] It means to set the port number for SMTP server.
-a [Sender Address] It means to set the e-mail address (e.g., johnwash@abc.com.tw) of
the sender.
-t Authentication The mail server must be authenticated with the correct username
and password to have the right of sending message out.
0 – disable
1 – enable to use the port number.
-u Username Type a name for authentication. The maximum length of the name
you can set is 31 characters.
-p Password Type a password for authentication. The maximum length of the
password you can set is 31 characters.
-i Sending Interval Define the interval for the system to send the SMS out. The unit is
second.
Example
> object mail obj 1 –n buyer
> object mail obj 1 -n buyer
> object mail obj 1 -s 192.168.1.98
> object mail obj 1 -m 25
> object mail obj 1 -t 1
> object mail obj 1 -u john
> object mail obj 1 -p happy123456
> object mail obj 1 -i 25
> object mail obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[buyer]
SMTP Server:[192.168.1.98]
SMTP Port:[25]
Sender Address:[]
Use SSL:[disable]
Authentication:[enable]
Username:[john]
Password:[******]
Sending Interval:[25(seconds)]
Telnet Command: object noti

This command is used to create notification object profile.
Syntax
object noti show
object noti setdefault
object noti obj INDEX -v
object noti obj INDEX -n Profile Name
object mail obj INDEX –e Category Status
object mail obj INDEX –d Category Status
Syntax Description

[INDEX] It means the index number (from 1 to 8) of the specified
notification object profile.
-v It means to view the information of the specified notification
object profile.
-n [Profile Name] It means to define a name for the notification object profile.
Profile Name: Type a name with less than 15 characters.
–e It means to enable the status of specified category.
-d It means to disable the status of specified category.
[Category] Available categories are:
1: WAN; 2: VPN Tunnel; 3: Temperature Alert;
4: WAN Budget; 5: CVM; 6: High Availability
[status] For WAN –
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For VPN Tunnel -
1: Disconnected; 2: Reconnected.
For Temperature Alert –
1: Out of Range.
For WAN Budget –
1: Limit Reached.
For CVM –
1: CPE Offline; 2: Backup Fail; 3: Restore Fail; 4: FW Update Fail; 5:
VPN Profile Setup Fail.
For High Availability –
1: Failover Occurred, Config Sync Fail, and Router Unstable
Example
> object noti obj 1 –n markbei
> object noti obj 1 –e 1 1
> object noti obj 1 –v
> object noti obj 1 -e 1 1
> object noti obj 1 -v
Profile Index: 1
Profile Name:[]
Category Status
WAN [v]Disconnected [ ]Reconnected
VPN Tunnel [v]Disconnected [ ]Reconnected
Temperature Alert [ ]Out of Range
WAN Budget Alert [ ]Limit Reached
CVM Alert [ ]CPE Offline
[ ]CPE Config Backup Fail
[v]CPE Config Restore Fail
[ ]CPE Firmware Fpgrade Fail
[ ]CPE VPN Profile Setup Fail
High Availability [ ]Failover Occurred
Config Sync Fail
Router Unstable

Telnet Command: object schedule
This command is used to create schedule object profile.
Syntax
object schedule set INDEX option
object schedule view
object schedule setdefault
Syntax Description
set It means to set the schedule profile.
[INDEX] It means the index number (from 1 to 15) of the specified object
profile.
option Available options for schedule includes:
-e
-e [value] It means to enable the schedule setup.
0 – disable
1 – enable
-c [comment] It means to set brief description for the specified profile.
The length range of the comment: 1 ~ 32 characters.
-D [year][month][day] It means to set the starting date of the profile.
[year] – Must be between 2000-2049.
[month] - Must be between 1-12.
[day] - Must be between 1-31.
For example: To set Start Date 2015/10/6, type
> object schedule set 1 -D "2015 10 6"
-T [hour][minute] It means to set the starting time of the profile.
[hour] - Must be between 0-23.
[minute] - Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Start Time 10:20, type
> object schedule set 1 -T "10 20"
-d [hour][minute] It means to set the duration time of the profile.
[hour] - Must be between 0-23.
[minute] - Must be between 0-59.
For example: To set Duration Time 3:30, type
> object schedule set 1 -d "3 30"
-a [value] It means to set the action used for the profile.
[value] –
0:Force On, 1:Force Down, 2:Enable Dial-On-Demand, 3:Disable
Dial-On-Demand
-I [value] It means to set idle time.
[value] – Must be between 0-255(minute). The default is 0.
-h [option] [day] Set how often the schedule will be applied.
[option] –
0: Once, 1: Weekdays
[day] –
Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat
If the [option] set Weekdays, then must select which days of Week.
example: To select Sunday, Monday, Thursday, type
> object schedule set 1 -h “1 Sun Mon Thu”

view [INDEX] It means to show the content of the profile.
Example
> object schedule set 1 –e 1
> object schedule set 1 –c Working
> object schedule set 1 –D “2016 11 8”
> object schedule set 1 –T “8 1”
> object schedule set 1 –d “2 30”
> object schedule set 1 –a 0
> object schedule set 1 –h “1 Mon Wed”
> object schedule view 1
Index No.1
--------------------------------------------------
[v] Enable Schedule Setup
Comment [ Working ]
Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd) [ 2016 ]-[ 11 ]-[ 8 ]
Start Time (hh:mm) [ 8 ]:[ 1 ]
Duration Time (hh:mm) [ 2 ]:[ 30 ]
Action [ Force On ]
Idle Timeout [ 0 ] minute(s).(max. 255, 0 for
default)
----------------------------------------------------------------
How Often
[ ] Once
[v] Weekdays
[ ]Sun [v]Mon [ ]Tue [v]Wed [ ]Thu [ ]Fri [ ]Sat
>
Telnet Command: port

This command allows users to set the speed for specific port of the router.
Syntax
port [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, all][AN, 100F, 100H, 10F, 10H, status]
port status
port jumbo
port wanfc
Syntax Description
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, It means the number of LAN port and WAN port.
11, 12, all
AN… 10H It means the physical type for the specific port.
AN: auto-negotiate.
100F: 100M Full Duplex.
100H: 100M Half Duplex.
10F: 10M Full Duplex.
10H: 10M Half Duplex.

status It means to view the Ethernet port status.
wanfc It means to set WAN flow control.
Example
> port 1 100F
%Set Port 1 Force speed 100 Full duplex OK !!!
Telnet Command: portmaptime

This command allows you to set a time of keeping the session connection for specified
protocol.
Syntax
portmaptime [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-t <sec> It means “TCP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP session timeout.
-u <sec> It means “UDP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the UDP session timeout.
-i <sec> It means “IGMP” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the IGMP session timeout.
-w <sec> It means “TCP WWW” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP WWW session timeout.
-s <sec> It means “TCP SYN” protocol.
<sec>: Type a number to set the TCP SYN session timeout.
-f It means to flush all portmaps (useful for diagnostics).
-l <List> List all settings.
Example
> portmaptime -t 86400 -u 300 -i 10
> portmaptime -l
------ Current setting ------
TCP Timeout : 86400 sec.
UDP Timeout : 300 sec.
IGMP Timeout : 10 sec.
TCP WWW Timeout: 60 sec.
TCP SYN Timeout: 60 sec.
Telnet Command: prn

This command allows you to view current status (interface and driver) of USB printer.
Syntax
prn status

Example
> prn status ?
Interface: USB bus 2.0
Printer: READY
Connect speed: 0K bps
Status: (null)
Info: (null)
VR9 USB host : USB1: READY , USB2: READY
Telnet Command: qos setup

This command allows user to set general settings for QoS.
Syntax
qos setup [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-h Type it to display the usage of this command.
-m <mode> It means to define which traffic the QoS control settings will apply
to and eable QoS control.
0: disable.
1: in, apply to incoming traffic only.
2: out, apply to outgoing traffic only.
3: both, apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.
Default is enable (for outgoing traffic).
-i <bandwidth> It means to set inbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only)
The available setting is from 1 to 100000.
-o <bandwidth> It means to set outbound bandwidth in kbps (Ethernet WAN only).
The available setting is from 1 to 100000.
-r <index:ratio> It means to set ratio for class index, in %.
-u <mode> It means to enable bandwidth control for UDP.
0: disable
1: enable
Default is disable.
-p <ratio> It means to enable bandwidth limit ratio for UDP.
-t <mode> It means to enable/disable Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize.
0: disable
1: enable
-V Show all the settings.
-D Set all to factory default (for all WANs).
[…] It means that you can type in several commands in one line.
Example
> qos setup -m 3 -i 9500 -o 8500 -r 3:20 -u 1 -p 50 -t 1

WAN1 QOS mode is both
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
Wan 1 is XDSL model ,don,t need to set up
WAN1 class 3 ratio set to 20
WAN1 udp bandwidth control set to enable
WAN1 udp bandwidth limit ratio set to 50
WAN1 Outbound TCP ACK Prioritizel set to enable
QoS WAN1 set complete; restart QoS
>
Telnet Command: qos class

This command allows user to set QoS class.
Syntax
qos class -c [no] –[a|e|d] [no][-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-h Type it to display the usage of this command.
-c <no> Specify the inde number for the class.
Available value for <no> contains 1, 2 and 3. The default setting is
class 1.
-n <name> It means to type a name for the class.
-a It means to add rule for specified class.
-e <no> It means to edit specified rule.
<no>: type the index number for the rule.
-d <no> It means to delete specified rule.
<no>: type the index number for the rule.
-m <mode> It means to enable or disable the specified rule.
0: disable,
1: enable
-l <addr> Set the local address.
Addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address
directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP
addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.
Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l
172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0
any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address
for this command.
-r <addr> Set the remote address.
addr1 – It means Single address. Please specify the IP address
directly, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9”.
addr1:addr2 – It means Range address. Please specify the IP
addresses, for example, “-l 172.16.3.9: 172.16.3.50.”
addr1:subnet – It means the subnet address with start IP address.
Please type the subnet and the IP address, for example, “-l
172.16.3.9:255.255.0.0”.0

any – It means Any address. Simple type “-l” to specify any address
for this command.
-p <DSCP id> Specify the ID.
-s <Service type> Specify the service type by typing the number. The available types
are listed as below:
1:ANY 2:DNS 3:FTP 4:GRE 5:H.323
6:HTTP 7:HTTPS 8:IKE 9:IPSEC-AH 10:IPSEC-ESP
11:IRC 12:L2TP 13:NEWS 14:NFS 15:NNTP
16:PING 17:POP3 18:PPTP 19:REAL-AUDIO 20:RTSP
21:SFTP 22:SIP 23:SMTP 24:SNMP 25:SNMP-TRAPS
26:SQL-NET 27:SSH 28:SYSLOG 29:TELNET 30:TFTP
-S <d/s> Show the content for specified DSCP ID/Service type.
-V <1/2/3> Show the rule in the specified class.
[…] It means that you can type in several commands in one line.
Example
> qos class -c 2 -n draytek -a -m 1 -l 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
Following setting will set in the class2

class 2 name set to draytek
Add a rule in class2
Class2 the 1 rule enabled
Set local address type to Range, 192.168.1.50:192.168.1.80
Telnet Command: qos type

This command allows user to configure protocol type and port number for QoS.
Syntax
qos type [-a <service name> | -e <no> | -d <no>].
Syntax Description
-a <name> It means to add rule.
-e <no> It means to edit user defined service type. “no” means the index
number. Available numbers are 1~40.
-d <no> It means to delete user defined service type. “no” means the index
number. Available numbers are 1~40.
-n <name> It means the name of the service.
-t <type> It means protocol type.
6: tcp(default)
17: udp
0: tcp/udp
<1~254>: other
-p <port> It means service port. The typing format must be [start:end] (ex.,
510:330).
-l List user defined types. “no” means the index number. Available
numbers are 1~40.

Example
> qos type -a draytek -t 6 -p 510:1330
service name set to draytek

service type set to 6:TCP
Port type set to Range
Service Port set to 510 ~ 1330
>
Telnet Command: quit

This command can exit the telnet command screen.
Telnet Command: show lan

This command displays current status of LAN IP address settings.
Example
> show lan
The LAN settings:
ip mask dhcp star_ip pool gateway
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----
[V]LAN1 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.1.10 200
192.168.1.1
[X]LAN2 192.168.2.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.2.10 100
192.168.2.1
[X]LAN3 192.168.3.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.3.10 100
192.168.3.1
[X]LAN4 192.168.4.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.4.10 100
192.168.4.1
[X]LAN5 192.168.5.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.5.10 100
192.168.5.1
[X]LAN6 192.168.6.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 192.168.6.10 100
192.168.6.1
[X]Route 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.0 [V] 0.0.0.0 0 192.168.0.1

Telnet Command: show dmz
This command displays current status of DMZ host.
Example
> show dmz
% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 172.16.3.221
2 Disable 192.168.1.65
Telnet Command: show dns

This command displays current status of DNS setting
Example
> show dns
%% Domain name server settings:
% Primary DNS: [Not set]
% Secondary DNS: [Not set]
Telnet Command: show openport

This command displays current status of open port setting.
Example
> show openport
%% Openport settings:
Index Status Comment Local IP Address
********************************************************
No data entry.
Telnet Command: show nat

This command displays current status of NAT.
Example
> show nat
Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port

1 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
Telnet Command: show portmap

This command displays the table of NAT Active Sessions.
Example
> show portmap
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Private_IP:Port Pseudo_IP:Port Peer_IP:Port [Timeout/Protocol/Flag]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Telnet Command: show pmtime

This command displays the reuse time of NAT session.
Level0: It is the default setting.
Level1: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than 25% of the default setting.
Level2: It will be applied when the NAT sessions are smaller than the eighth of the default
setting.
Example
> show pmtime
Level0 TCP=86400001 UDP=300001 ICMP=10001
Telnet Command: show session

This command displays current status of current session.
Example
> show session
% Maximum Session Number: 10000
% Maximum Session Usage: 49
% Current Session Usage: 0
% Current Session Used(include waiting for free): 0
% WAN1 Current Session Usage: 0
Telnet Command: show status

This command displays current status of LAN and WAN connections.

Example
> show status
System Uptime:20:36:35
LAN Status
Primary DNS:8.8.8.8 Secondary DNS:8.8.4.4
IP Address:192.168.1.1 Tx Rate:12923 Rx Rate:8152
WAN 1 Status: Disconnected

Enable:Yes Line:xDSL Name:tcom
Mode:Static IP Up Time:0:00:00 IP:172.16.3.221 GW
IP:172.16.3.2
TX Packets:0 TX Rate:0 RX Packets:0 RX Rate:0
ADSL Information: ADSL Firmware Version:05-04-04-04-00-01

Mode: State:TRAINING TX Block:0 RX Block:0
Corrected Blocks:0 Uncorrected Blocks:0
UP Speed:0 Down Speed:0 SNR Margin:0 Loop Att.:0
Telnet Command: show statistic

This command displays statistics for WAN interface.
Syntax
show statistic
show statistic reset [interface]
Syntax Description
reset It means to reset the transmitted/received bytes to Zero.
interface It means to specify WAN1 ~WAN5 (including multi-PVC) interface for
displaying related statistics.
Example
> show statistic
WAN1 total TX: 0 Bytes ,RX: 0 Bytes
>
Telnet Command: srv dhcp public

This command allows users to configure DHCP server for second subnet.
Syntax
srv dhcp public start [IP address]
srv dhcp public cnt [IP counts]
srv dhcp public status
srv dhcp public add [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX]
srv dhcp public del [MAC Addr XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX/all/ALL]

Syntax Description
start It means the starting point of the IP address pool for the DHCP
server.
IP address It means to specify an IP address as the starting point in the IP
address pool.
cnt It means the IP count number.
IP counts It means to specify the number of IP addresses in the pool. The
maximum is 10.
status It means the execution result of this command.
add It means creating a list of hosts to be assigned.
del It means removing the selected MAC address.
MAC Addr It means to specify MAC Address of the host.
all/ALL It means all of the MAC addresses.
Example
Vigor> ip route add 192.168.1.56 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.12 3 default
Vigor> srv dhcp public status
Index MAC Address
Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns1

This command allows users to set Primary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
Syntax
srv dhcp dns1 [?]
srv dhcp dns1 [DNS IP address]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current IP address of DNS 1 for the DHCP server.
DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS1.
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet
DNS).
Example
> srv dhcp dns1 168.95.1.1
% srv dhcp dns1 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 168.95.1.1
(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)

Telnet Command: srv dhcp dns2
This command allows users to set Secondary IP Address for DNS Server in LAN.
Syntax
srv dhcp dns2 [?]
srv dhcp dns2 [DNS IP address]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current IP address of DNS 2 for the DHCP server.
DNS IP address It means the IP address that you want to use as DNS2.
Note: The IP Routed Subnet DNS must be the same as NAT Subnet
DNS).
Example
> srv dhcp dns2 10.1.1.1
% srv dhcp dns2 <DNS IP address>
% Now: 10.1.1.1
(IP Routed Subnet dns same as NAT Subnet dns)

Telnet Command: srv dhcp frcdnsmanl
This command can force the router to invoke DNS Server IP address.
Syntax
srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [on]
srv dhcp frcdnsmanl [off]
Syntax Description
? It means to display the current status.
on It means to use manual setting for DNS setting.
Off It means to use auto settings acquired from ISP.
Example
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl on
% Domain name server now is using manual settings!
> srv dhcp frcdnsmanl off
% Domain name server now is using auto settings!
Telnet Command: srv dhcp gateway

This command allows users to specify gateway address for DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp gateway [?]
srv dhcp gateway [Gateway IP]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current gateway that you can use.
Gateway IP It means to specify a gateway address used for DHCP server.
Example
> srv dhcp gateway 192.168.2.1

Telnet Command: srv dhcp ipcnt
This command allows users to specify IP counts for DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp ipcnt [?]
srv dhcp ipcnt [IP counts]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current used IP count number.
IP counts It means the number that you have to specify for the DHCP server.
Example
> srv dhcp ipcnt ?
% srv dhcp ipcnt <IP counts>
% Now: 150
Telnet Command: srv dhcp off

This function allows users to turn off DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp on

This function allows users to turn on DHCP server. It needs rebooting router, please type "sys
reboot" command to reboot router.
Telnet Command: srv dhcp relay

This command allows users to set DHCP relay setting.
Syntax
srv dhcp relay servip [server ip]
srv dhcp relay subnet [index]
Syntax Description
server ip It means the IP address that you want to used as DHCP server.
Index It means subnet 1 or 2. Please type 1 or 2. The router will invoke
this function according to the subnet 1 or 2 specified here.
Example
> srv dhcp relay servip 192.168.1.46
> srv dhcp relay subnet 2
> srv dhcp relay servip ?
% srv dhcp relay servip <server ip>
% Now: 192.168.1.46

Telnet Command: srv dhcp startip
Syntax
srv dhcp startip [?]
srv dhcp startip [IP address]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current used start IP address.
IP address It means the IP address that you can specify for the DHCP server as
the starting point.
Example
> srv dhcp startip 192.168.1.53
Telnet Command: srv dhcp status

This command can display general information for the DHCP server, such as IP address, MAC
address, leased time, host ID and so on.
Example
> srv dhcp status
DHCP server: Relay Agent
Default gateway: 192.168.1.1
Index IP Address MAC Address Leased Time HOST ID
1 192.168.1.113 00-05-5D-E4-D8-EE 17:20:08 A1000351

Telnet Command: srv dhcp leasetime
This command can set the lease time for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp leasetime [?]
srv dhcp leasetime [Lease Time (sec)]
Syntax Description
? It means to display current leasetime used for the DHCP server.
Lease Time (sec) It means the lease time that DHCP server can use. The unit is
second.
Example
> srv dhcp leasetime ?
% srv dhcp leasetime <Lease Time (sec.)>
% Now: 86400
>
Telnet Command: srv dhcp nodetype

This command can set the node type for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp nodetype <count>
Syntax Description
count It means to specify a type for node.
1. B-node
2. P-node
4. M-node
8. H-node
Example
> srv dhcp nodetype 1
> srv dhcp nodetype ?
%% srv dhcp nodetype <count>
%% 1. B-node 2. P-node 4. M-node 8. H-node
% Now: 1

Telnet Command: srv dhcp primWINS
This command can set the primary IP address for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp primWINS [WINS IP address]
srv dhcp primWINS clear
Syntax Description
WINS IP address It means the IP address of primary WINS server.
clear It means to remove the IP address settings of primary WINS server.
Example
> srv dhcp primWINS 192.168.1.88
> srv dhcp primWINS ?
%% srv dhcp primWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp primWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.88
Telnet Command: srv dhcp secWINS

This command can set the secondary IP address for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp secWINS [WINS IP address]
srv dhcp secWINS clear
Syntax Description
WINS IP address It means the IP address of secondary WINS server.
clear It means to remove the IP address settings of second WINS server.
Example
> srv dhcp secWINS 192.168.1.180
> srv dhcp secWINS ?
%% srv dhcp secWINS <WINS IP address>
%% srv dhcp secWINS clear
% Now: 192.168.1.180

Telnet Command: srv dhcp expired_RecycleIP
This command can set the time to check if the IP address can be assigned again by DHCP
server or not.
Syntax
srv dhcp expRecycleIP <sec time>
Syntax Description
sec time It means to set the time (5~300 seconds) for checking if the IP can be
assigned again or not.
Example
Vigor> srv dhcp expRecycleIP 250
% DHCP expired_RecycleIP = 250
Telnet Command: srv dhcp tftp

This command can set the TFTP server as the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
Syntax Description
TFTP server name It means to type the name of TFTP server.
Example
> srv dhcp tftp TF123
> srv dhcp tftp ?
%% srv dhcp tftp <TFTP server name>
% Now: TF123
Telnet Command: srv dhcp option

This command can set the custom option for the DHCP server.
Syntax
srv dhcp option -h
srv dhcp option -l
srv dhcp option -d [idx]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -v [option value]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -a [option value]
srv dhcp option -e [1 or 0] -c [option number] -x [option value]
srv dhcp option -u [idx unmber]
Syntax Description

-h It means to display usage of this command.
-l It means to display all the user defined DHCP options.
-d[idx] It means to delete the option number by specifying its index number.
-e [1 or 0] It means to enable/disable custom option feature.
1:enable
0:disable
-c It means to set option number. Available number ranges from 0 to 255.
-v It means to set option number by typing string.
-a It means to set the option value by specifying the IP address.
-x It means to set option number with the format of Hexadecimal characters.
-u It means to update the option value of the sepecified index.
idx number It means the index number of the option value.
Example
> srv dhcp option -e 1 -c 18 -v /path
> srv dhcp option -l
% state idx interface opt type data
% enable 1 ALL LAN 18 ASCII /path

Telnet Command: srv nat dmz
This command allows users to set DMZ host. Before using this command, please set WAN IP
Alias first.
Syntax
Srv nat dmz n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]
Syntax Description
n It means to map selected WAN IP to certain host.
1: wan1
2: wan2
m It means the index number of the DMZ host.
Default setting is “1” (WAN 1). It is only available for Static IP
mode. If you use other mode, you can set 1 ~ 8 in this field. If WAN
IP alias has been configured, then the number of DMZ host can be
added more.
-e It means to enable/disable such feature.
1:enable
0:disable
-i It means to specify the private IP address of the DMZ host.
-r It means to remove DMZ host setting.
-v It means to display current status.
Example
> srv nat dmz 1 1 -i 192.168.1.96
> srv nat dmz -v
% WAN1 DMZ mapping status:
Index Status WAN1 aux IP Private IP
----------------------------------------------------
1 Disable 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96
Telnet Command: srv nat ipsecpass

This command allows users to enable or disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source
port (500) preservation.
Syntax
Srv nat ipsecpass [options]
Syntax Description
[options] The available commands with parameters are listed below.
on It means to enable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source port
(500) preservation.
off It means to disable IPSec ESP tunnel passthrough and IKE source
port (500) preservation.

status It means to display current status for checking.
Example
> srv nat ipsecpass status
%% Status: IPsec ESP pass-thru and IKE src_port:500 preservation is
OFF.
Telnet Command: srv nat openport

This command allows users to set open port settings for NAT server.
Syntax
srv nat openport n m [-<command> <parameter> | … ]
Syntax Description
n It means the index number for the profiles. The range is from 1 to
20.
m It means to specify the sub-item number for this profile. The range
is from 1 to 10.
-a <enable> It means to enable or disable the open port rule profile.
0: disable
1:enable
-c <comment> It means to type the description (less than 23 characters) for the
defined network service.
-i <local ip> It means to set the IP address for local computer.
Local ip: Type an IP address in this field.
-w <idx> It means to specify the public IP.
1: WAN1 Default,
2: WAN1 Alias 1,
…and so on.
-p <protocol> Specify the transport layer protocol.
Available values are TCP, UDP and ALL.
-s<start port> It means to specify the starting port number of the service offered
by the local host. The range is from 0 to 65535.
-e<end port> It means to specify the ending port number of the service offered by
the local host.
-v It means to display current settings.
-r <remove> It means to delete the specified open port setting.
remove: Type the index number of the profile.
-f <flush> It means to return to factory settings for all the open ports profiles.
Example
> srv nat openport 1 1 -a 1 -c games -i 192.168.1.100 -w 1 -p TCP -s
23 -e 83
> srv nat openport -v

%% Status: Enable
%% Comment: games
%% Private IP address: 192.168.1.100
Index Protocal Start Port End Port
*****************************************************************
1. TCP 23 83
%% Status: Disable
%% Comment:
*****************************************************************
%% Status: Disable
%% Comment:
*****************************************************************
>
Telnet Command: srv nat portmap

This command allows users to set port redirection table for NAT server.
Syntax
srv nat portmap add [idx][serv name][proto][pub port][pri ip][pri port][wan1/wan2]
srv nat portmap del [idx]
srv nat portmap disable [idx]
srv nat portmap enable [idx] [proto]
srv nat portmap flush
srv nat portmap table
Syntax Description
Add[idx] It means to add a new port redirection table with an index number.
Available index number is from 1 to 10.
serv name It means to type one name as service name.
proto It means to specify TCP or UDP as the protocol.
pub port It means to specify which port can be redirected to the specified
Private IP and Port of the internal host.
pri ip It means to specify the private IP address of the internal host
providing the service.
pri port It means to specify the private port number of the service offered
by the internal host.
wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for the port redirection.
del [idx] It means to remove the selected port redirection setting.
disable [idx] It means to inactivate the selected port redirection setting.
enable [idx] It means to activate the selected port redirection setting.
flush It means to clear all the port mapping settings.

table It means to display Port Redirection Configuration Table.
Example
> srv nat portmap add 1 game tcp 80 192.168.1.11 100 wan1
> srv nat portmap table
NAT Port Redirection Configuration Table:
Index Service Name Protocol Public Port Private IP Private

Port ifno
1 game 6 80 192.168.1.11 100
-1
2 0 0 0 -2
3 0 0 0 -2
4 0 0 0 -2
5 0 0 0 -2
6 0 0 0 -2
7 0 0 0 -2
8 0 0 0 -2
9 0 0 0 -2
10 0 0 0 -2
11 0 0 0 -2
12 0 0 0 -2
13 0 0 0 -2
14 0 0 0 -2
15 0 0 0 -2
16 0 0 0 -2
17 0 0 0 -2
18 0 0 0 -2
19 0 0 0 -2
20 0 0 0 -2
Protocol: 0 = Disable, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP
Telnet Command: srv nat status

This command allows users to view NAT Port Redirection Running Table.
Example
> srv nat status
NAT Port Redirection Running Table:
Index Protocol Public Port Private IP Private Port

1 6 80 192.168.1.11 100
2 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
3 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
4 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
5 0 0 0.0.0.0 0

6 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
7 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
8 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
9 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
10 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
11 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
12 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
13 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
14 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
15 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
16 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
17 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
18 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
19 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
20 0 0 0.0.0.0 0
---
Telnet Command: srv nat showall

This command allows users to view a summary of NAT port redirection setting, open port and
DMZ settings.
Example
> srv nat showall ?
Index Proto WAN IP:Port Private IP:Port Act
*************************************************************************
****
R01 TCP 0.0.0.0:80 192.168.1.11:100 Y
O01 TCP 0.0.0.0:23~83 192.168.1.100:23~83 Y
D01 All 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.96 Y
R:Port Redirection, O:Open Ports, D:DMZ
Telnet Command: switch -i

This command is used to obtain the TX (transmitted) or RX (received) data for each connected
switch.
Syntax
switch -i [switch idx_no] [option]
Syntax Description
switch idx_no It means the index number of the switch profile.
option The available commands with parameters are listed below.
cmd
acc
traffic [on/off/status/tx/rx]

cmd It means to send command to the client.
acc It means to set the client authentication account and password.
traffic It means to turn on/off or display the data transmission from the
[on/off/status/tx/rx] client.
Example
> switch -i 1 traffic on
External Device NO. 1 traffic statistic function is enable
Telnet Command: switch on

This command is used to turn on the auto discovery for external devices.
Example
> switch on
Enable Extrnal Device auto discovery!
Telnet Command: switch off

This command is used to turn off the auto discovery for external devices.
Example
> switch off
Disable External Device auto discovery!
Telnet Command: switch list

This command is used to display the connection status of the switch.
Example
> switch list?
No. Mac IP status Dur Time Model_Name
------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
[1] 00-50-7f-cd-07-48 192.168.1.3 On-Line 00:01:01
Vigor2920 Series
Telnet Command: switch clear

This command is used to reset the switch table and reboot the router.
Syntax
switch clear [idx]
Syntax Description
idx It means the index number of each item shown on the table.
-f It means to clear all of the data.
Example

> switch clear 1
Switch Data clear successful
> switch clear -f

Switch Data clear successful
Telnet Command: switch query

This command is used to enable or disable the switch query.
Example
> switch query on
Extern Device status query is Enable
> switch query off
Extern Device status query is Disable
Telnet Command: sys admin

This command is used for RD engineer to access into test mode of Vigor router.
Telnet Command: sys adminuser

This command is used to create user account and specify LDAP server. The server will
authenticate the local user who wants to access into the web user interface of Vigor router.
Syntax
sys adminuser [option]
sys adminuser edit [index] username password
Syntax Description
option Available options includes:
Local [0-1]
LDAP [0-1]
edit [INDEX]
delete [INDEX]
view [INDEX]
Local [0-1] 0 – Disable the local user.
1 – Enable the local user.
LDAP [0-1] 0 – Disable the LDAP.
1 – Enable the LDAP.
edit [INDEX] username Edit an existed user account or create a new local user account.
password [INDEX] – 1 ~8. There are eight profiles to be added / edited.
Username – Type a new name for local user.
Password – Type a password for local user.
delete [INDEX] Delete a local user account.
view [INDEX] Show the user account/password detail information.
Example
> sys adminuser Local 1
Local User has enabled!

> sys adminuser LDAP 1
LDAP has enabled!
> sys adminuser edit 1 carrie test123
Updated!
> sys adminuser view 1
Index:1
User Name:carrie
User Password:test123
Telnet Command: sys bonjour

This command is used to disable/enable and configure the Bonjour service.
Syntax
sys bonjour [-<command> <parameter> | ... ]
Syntax Description
-e <enable> It is used to disable/enable bonjour service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-h <enable> It is used to disable/enable http (web) service (0: disable, 1:
enable).
-t <enable> It is used to disable/enable telnet service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-f <enable> It is used to disable/enable FTP service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-s <enable> It is used to disable/enable SSH service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-p <enable> It is used to disable/enable printer service (0: disable, 1: enable).
-6 <enable> It is used to disable/enable IPv6 (0: disable, 1: enable).
Example
> sys bonjour -s 1
>

Telnet Command: sys cfg
This command reset the router with factory default settings. When a user types this command,
all the configuration will be reset to default setting.
Syntax
sys cfg default
sys cfg status
Syntax Description
default It means to reset current settings with default values.
status It means to display current profile version and status.
Example
> sys cfg status
Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x491e5e6c)
> sys cfg default
>
Telnet Command: sys cmdlog

This command displays the history of the commands that you have typed.
Example
> sys cmdlog
% Commands Log: (The lowest index is the newest !!!)
[1] sys cmdlog
[2] sys cmdlog ?
[3] sys ?
[4] sys cfg status
[5] sys cfg ?
Telnet Command: sys ftpd

This command displays current status of FTP server.
Syntax
sys ftpd on
sys ftpd off
Syntax Description
on It means to turn on the FTP server of the system.
off It means to turn off the FTP server of the system.
Example
> sys ftpd on
% sys ftpd turn on !!!

Telnet Command: sys domainname
This command can set and remove the domain name of the system when DHCP mode is
selected for WAN.
Syntax
sys domainname [wan1/wan2] [Domain Name Suffix]
sys domainname [wan1/wan2] clear
Syntax Description
wan1/wan2 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.
Domain Name Suffix It means the name for the domain of the system. The maximum
number of characters that you can set is 40.
clear It means to remove the domain name of the system.
Example
> sys domainname wan1 clever
> sys domainname wan2 intellegent
> sys domainname ?
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> <Domain Name Suffix (max. 40 characters)>
% sys domainname <wan1/wan2> clear
% Now: wan1 == clever, wan2 ==intelligent
>
Telnet Command: sys iface

This command displays the current interface connection status (UP or Down) with IP address,
MAC address and Netmask for the router.
Example
> sys iface
Interface 0 Ethernet:
Status: UP
IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 0xFFFFFF00 (Private)
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0xFFFFFFFF
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-00
Status: DOWN
IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Netmask: 0x00000000
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-02
Status: DOWN
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-03
Status: DOWN
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-04

Status: DOWN
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-05
Status: DOWN
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-06
Status: DOWN
MAC: 00-50-7F-00-00-07
---
>

Telnet Command: sys name
This command can set and remove the name for the router when DHCP mode is selected for
WAN.
Syntax
sys name [wan1] [ASCII string]
sys name [wan1] clear
Syntax Description
wan1 It means to specify WAN interface for assigning a name for it.
ASCII string It means the name for router. The maximum character that you can
set is 20.
Example
> sys name wan1 drayrouter
> sys name ?
% sys name <wan1/wan2> <ASCII string (max. 20 characters)>
% sys name <wan1/wan2> clear
% Now: wan1 == drayrouter, wan2 ==
Note: Such name can be used to recognize router’s identification in SysLog dialog.
Telnet Command: sys passwd

This command allows users to set password for the administrator.
Syntax
sys passwd [ASCII string]
Syntax Description
ASCII string It means the password for administrator. The maximum character
that you can set is 23.
Example
> sys passwd admin123
>
Telnet Command: sys reboot

This command allows users to restart the router immediately.
Example
> sys reboot
>

Telnet Command: sys autoreboot
This command allows users to restart the router automatically within a certain time.
Syntax
sys autoreboot [on/off/hour(s)]
Syntax Description
on/off On – It means to enable the function of auto-reboot.
Off – It means to disable the function of auto-reboot.
hours It means to set the time schedule for router reboot.
For example, if you type “2” in this field, the router will reboot
with an interval of two hours.
Example
> sys autoreboot on
autoreboot is ON
> sys autoreboot 2
autoreboot is ON
autoreboot time is 2 hour(s)
Telnet Command: sys commit

This command allows users to save current settings to FLASH. Usually, current settings will be
saved in SRAM. Yet, this command will save the file to FLASH.
Example
> sys commit
>
Telnet Command: sys tftpd

This command can turn on TFTP server for upgrading the firmware.
Example
> sys tftpd
% TFTP server enabled !!!
Telnet Command: sys cc

This command can display current country code and wireless region of this device.
Example
> sys cc
Country Code : 0x 0 [International]
Wireless Region Code: 0x30
>
Telnet Command: sys version

This command can display current version for the system.
Example
> sys version
Router Model: Vigor3910Vn+ Version: 3.7.4.1 English
Profile version: 3.0.0 Status: 1 (0x49165e6c)
Router IP: 192.168.1.1 Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Firmware Build Date/Time: Mar 20 2014 14:09:50
Router Name: drayrouter
Revision: 40055 2860_374
VDSL2 Firmware Version: 05-04-08-00-00-06
Telnet Command: sys qrybuf

This command can display the system memory status and leakage list.
Example
> sys qrybuf
System Memory Status and Leakage List
Buf sk_buff ( 200B), used#: 1647, cached#: 30

Buf KMC4088 (4088B), used#: 0, cached#: 8
Buf KMC504 ( 504B), used#: 8, cached#: 8
Dynamic memory: 13107200B; 4573168B used; 190480B/0B in level 1/2
cache.
FLOWTRACK Memory Status

# of free = 12000
# of maximum = 0
# of flowstate = 12000
# of lost by siganture = 0
# of lost by list = 0
Telnet Command: sys pollbuf

This command can turn on or turn off polling buffer for the router.
Syntax
sys pollbuf [on]
sys pollbuf [off]
Syntax Description
on It means to turn on pulling buffer.

off It means to turn off pulling buffer.
Example
> sys pollbuf on
% Buffer polling is on!
> sys pollbuf off

% Buffer polling is off!
Telnet Command: sys tr069

This command can set CPE settings for applying in VigorACS.
Syntax
sys tr069 get [parm] [option]
sys tr069 set [parm] [value]
sys tr069 getnoti [parm]
sys tr069 setnoti [parm] [value]
sys tr069 log
sys tr069 debug [on/off]
sys tr069 save
sys tr069 inform [event code]
sys tr069 port [port num]
sys tr069 cert_auth [on/off]
Syntax Description
get [parm] [option] It means to get parameters for tr-069.
option=<nextlevel>: only gets nextlevel for GetParameterNames.
set [parm] [value] It means to set parameters for tr-069.
getnoti [parm] It means to get parameter notification value.
setnoti [parm] [value] It means to set parameter notification value.
log It means to display the TR-069 log.
debug [on/off] on: turn on the function of sending debug message to syslog.
off: turn off the function of sending debug message to syslog.
save It means to save the parameters to the flash memory of the router.
Inform [event code] It means to inform parameters for tr069 with different event codes.
[event code] includes:
0-"0 BOOTSTRAP",
1-"1 BOOT",
2-"2 PERIODIC",
3-"3 SCHEDULED",
4-"4 VALUE CHANGE",
5-"5 KICKED",
6-"6 CONNECTION REQUEST",
7-"7 TRANSFER COMPLETE",
8-"8 DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE",

9-"M Reboot"
port [port num] It means to change tr069 listen port number.
cert_auth [on/off] on: turn on certificate-based authentication.
off: turn off certificate-based authentication.
Example
> sys tr069 get Int. nextlevel
Total number of parameter is 24
Total content length of parameter is 915
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDeviceNumberOfEntries
InternetGatewayDevice.DeviceInfo.
InternetGatewayDevice.ManagementServer.
InternetGatewayDevice.Time.
InternetGatewayDevice.Layer3Forwarding.
InternetGatewayDevice.LANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.WANDevice.
InternetGatewayDevice.Services.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_InternetAcc.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_LAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_NAT.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Firewall.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Bandwidth.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Applications.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VPN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_VoIP.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_WirelessLAN.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_System.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Status.
InternetGatewayDevice.X_00507F_Diagnostics.
---
Telnet Command: sys sip_alg

This command can turn on/off SIP ALG (Application Layer Gateway) for traversal.
Syntax
sys sip_alg [1]
sys sip_alg [0]
Syntax Description
1 It means to turn on SIP ALG.
0 It means to turn off SIP ALG.
Example
> sys sip_alg ?

usage: sys sip_alg [value]
0 - disable SIP ALG
1 - enable SIP ALG
current SIP ALG is disabled
Telnet Command: sys license

This command can process the system license.
Syntax
sys license licmsg
sys license licauth
sys license regser
sys license licera
sys license licifno
sys license lic_wiz [set/reg/qry]
sys license dev_chg
sys license dev_key
Syntax Description
licmsg It means to display license message.
licauth It means the license authentication time setting.
regser It means the license register server setting.
licera It means to erase license setting.
licifno It means license and signature download interface setting.
lic_wiz [set/reg/qry] It means the license wizard setting.
qry: query service support status
set [idx] [trial] [service type] [sp_id] [start_date] [License Key]
reg: register service in portal
dev_chg It means to change the device key.
dev_key It means to show device key.
Example
> sys license licifno
License and Signature download interface setting:

licifno [AUTO/WAN#]
Ex: licifno wan1
Download interface is "auto-selected" now.
Telnet Command: testmail

This command is used to display current settings for sending test mail.

Example
> testmail
Send out test mail
Mail Alert:[Disable]
SMTP_Server:[0.0.0.0]
Mail to:[]
Return-Path:[]
Telnet Command: upnp off

This command can close UPnP function.
Example
>upnp off
UPNP say bye-bye
Telnet Command: upnp on

This command can enable UPnP function.
Example
>upnp on
UPNP start.
Telnet Command: upnp nat

This command can display IGD NAT status.
Example
> upnp nat ?
****************** IGD NAT Status ****************
((0))
InternalClient >>192.168.1.10<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>21<<, ExternalPort >>21<<
PortMapProtocol >>TCP<<
The tmpvirtual server index >>0<<
PortMapLeaseDuration >>0<<, PortMapEnabled >>0<<
Ftp Example [MICROSOFT]
((1))
InternalClient >>0.0.0.0<<, RemoteHost >>0.0.0.0<<
InternalPort >>0<<, ExternalPort >>0<<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
PortMapProtocol >><NULL><<
0<<
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---

Telnet Command: upnp service
This command can display the information of the UPnP service. UPnP service must be enabled
first.
Example
> upnp on
UPNP start.
> upnp service

>>>>> SERVICE TABLE1 <<<<<
serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
serviceId urn:microsoft-com:serviceId:OSInfo1
SCPDURL /upnp/OSInfo.xml
controlURL /OSInfo1
eventURL /OSInfoEvent1
UDN uuid:774e9bbe-7386-4128-b627-001daa843464
>>>>> SERVICE TABLE2 <<<<<

serviceType
urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
serviceId urn:upnp-org:serviceId:WANCommonIFC1
SCPDURL /upnp/WComIFCX.xml
controlURL /upnp?control=WANCommonIFC1
eventURL /upnp?event=WANCommonIFC1
UDN uuid:2608d902-03e2-46a5-9968-4a54ca499148
.
.
.
Telnet Command: upnp subscribe

This command can show all UPnP services subscribed.
Example
> upnp on
UPNP start.
> upnp subscribe
Vigor> upnp subscribe
>>>> (1) serviceType urn:schemas-microsoft-com:service:OSInfo:1
----- Subscribtion1 -------
sid = 7a2bbdd0-0047-4fc8-b870-4597b34da7fb
eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1
expireTime =6926
active =1
DeliveryURLs
=<http://192.168.1.113:2869/upnp/eventing/twtnpnsiun>

>>>> (2) serviceType
urn:schemas-upnp-org:service:WANCommonInterfaceConfig:1
----- Subscribtion1 -------
sid = d9cd47a5-d9c9-4d3d-8043-d03a82f27983
eventKey =1, ToSendEventKey = 1

.
.
.
Telnet Command: upnp tmpvs

This command can display current status of temp Virtual Server of your router.
Example
Vigor> upnp tmpvs
****************** Temp virtual server status ****************
((0))
real_addr >>192.168.1.10<<, pseudo_addr >>172.16.3.229<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>TCP<<
time >>0<<
((1))
real_addr >>0.0.0.0<<, pseudo_addr >>0.0.0.0<<
real_port >>0<<, pseudo_port >>0<<
hit_portmap_index >>0<<
The protocol >>0<<
time >>0<<
---
Telnet Command: upnp wan

This command is used to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
Syntax
upnp wan [n]
Syntax Description
n It means to specify WAN interface to apply UPnP.
n=0, it means to auto-select WAN interface.
n=1, WAN1
n=2, WAN2 ……….
Example

> upnp wan 1
use wan1 now.
Telnet Command: usb list

This command is use to display the information about the brand name and model name of the
USB modems which are supported by Vigor router.
Example
> usb list ?
Brand Module Standard
------------------------ --------
Aiko Aiko 83D 3.5G Y
BandRich Bandluxe C170 3.5G Y
Huawei Huawei E169u 3.5G Y
Huawei Huawei E220 3.5G Y
Huawei Huawei E303D 3.5G Y
Sony Erics Sony Ericsson MD30 3.5G Y
TP-LINK TP-LINK MA180 3.5G Y
TP-LINK TP-LINK MA260 3.5G Y
Vodafone Vodafone K3765-Z 3.5G Y
Vodafone Vodafone K4605 3.5G Y
ZTE ZTE MF626 3.5G Y
ZTE ZTE MF627 plus 3.5G Y
SpinCom SpinCom GPRS Modem 3.5G Y

- MORE - ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] -
Telnet Command: vigbrg on

This command can make the router to be regarded as a modem but not a router.
Example
> vigbrg on
%Enable Vigor Bridge Function!
Telnet Command: vigbrg off

This command can disable vigor bridge function.
Example

> vigbrg off
%Disable Vigor Bridge Function!
Telnet Command: vigbrg status

This command can show whether the Vigor Bridge Function is enabled or disabled.
Example
> vigbrg status
%Vigor Bridge Function is enable!
%Wan1 management is disable!

Telnet Command: vigbrg cfgip
This command allows users to transfer a bridge modem into ADSL router by accessing into and
adjusting specified IP address. Users can access into Web UI of the router to manage the
router through the IP address configured here.
Syntax
vigbrg cfgip [IP Address]
Syntax Description
IP Address It means to type an IP address for users to manage the router.
Example
> vigbrg cfgip 192.168.1.15
> vigbrg cfgip ?
% Vigor Bridge Config IP,
% Now: 192.168.1.15
Telnet Command: vpn l2lset

This command allows users to set advanced parameters for LAN to LAN function.
Syntax
vpn l2lset [list index] peerid [peerid]
vpn l2lset [list index] localid [localid]
vpn l2lset [list index]main [auto/proposal index]
vpn l2lset [list index] aggressive [g1/g2]
vpn l2lset [list index]pfs [on/off]
vpn l2lset [list index] phase1[lifetime]
vpn l2lset [list index] phase2[lifetime]
Syntax Description
list index It means the index number of L2L (LAN to LAN) profile.
peerid It means the peer identity for aggressive mode.
localid It means the local identity for aggressive mode.
main It means to choose proposal for main mode.
auto index It means to choose default proposals.
proposal index It means to choose specified proposal.
aggressive It means the chosen DH group for aggressive mode
pfs It means “perfect forward secrete”.
on/off It means to turn on or off the PFS function.
phase1 It means phase 1 of IKE.
lifetime It means the lifetime value (in second) for phase 1 and phase 2.
phase2 It means phase 2 of IKE.

Example
> VPN l2lset 1 peerid 10226
Telnet Command: vpn l2lDrop

This command allows users to terminate current LAN to LAN VPN connection.
Example
> vpn l2lDrop
>
Telnet Command: vpn dinset

This command allows users to configure setting for remote dial-in VPN profile.
Syntax
vpn dinset <list index>
vpn dinset <list index> <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> motp <on/off>
vpn dinset <list index> pin_secret <pin> <secret>
Syntax Description
<list index> It means the index number of the profile.
<on/off> It means to enable or disable the profile.
on – Enable.
off – Disable.
motp <on/off> It means to enable or disable the authentication with mOTP
function.
on – Enable.
off – Disable.
pin_secret<pin> <secret> It means to set PIN code with secret.
<pin> - Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).
<secret> - Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the
mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6)
Example
> vpn dinset 1
Dial-in profile index 1
Profile Name: ???

Status: Deactive
Mobile OTP: Disabled
Password:
Idle Timeout: 300 sec

> vpn dinset 1 on
% set profile active
> vpn dinset 1 motp on

% Enable Mobile OTP mode!>
> vpn dinset 1 pin_secret 1234 e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6
> vpn dinset 1
Dial-in profile index 1
Profile Name: ???

Status: Active
Mobile OTP: Enabled
PIN: 1234
Secret: e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6
Idle Timeout: 300 sec
Telnet Command: vpn subnet

This command allows users to specify a subnet selection for the specified remote dial-in VPN
profile.
Syntax
vpn subnet [index] [1/2/3/4/5/6]
Syntax Description
<index> It means the index number of the VPN profile.
<1/2/3/4/5/6> 1 – it means LAN1
2 – it means LAN2.
3 – it means LAN3
5 – it means LAN51
Example
> vpn subnet 1 2
>
Telnet Command: vpn setup

This command allows users to setup VPN for different types.
Syntax
Command of PPTP Dial-Out
vpn setup <index> <name> pptp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>

Command of IPSec Dial-Out
vpn setup <index> <name> ipsec_out <ip> <key> <nip> <nmask>
Command of L2Tp Dial-Out
vpn setup <index> <name> l2tp_out <ip> <usr> <pwd> <nip> <nmask>
Command of Dial-In
vpn setup <index> <name> dialin <ip> <usr> <pwd> <key> <nip> <nmask>
Syntax Description
For PPTP Dial-Out
<index> It means the index number of the profile.
<name> It means the name of the profile.
<ip> It means the IP address to dial to.
<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the PPTP
connection.
<nip> <nmask> It means the remote network IP and the mask.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 pptp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For IPsec Dial-Out
<key> It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.
e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 ipsec_out 1.2.3.4 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For L2TP Dial-Out
<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the L2TP
connection.
e.g.,,
vpn setup 1 name1 l2tp_out 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
For Dial-In
<ip> It means the IP address allowed to dial in.
<usr> <pwd> It means the user and the password required for the PPTP/L2TP
connection.
<key> It means the value of IPsec Pre-Shared Key.

e.g.,
vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
Example
> vpn setup 1 name1 dialin 1.2.3.4 vigor 1234 abc 192.168.1.0
255.255.255.0
% Profile Change Log ...
% Profile Index : 1
% Profile Name : name1
% Username : vigor
% Password : 1234
% Pre-share Key : abc
% Call Direction : Dial-In
% Type of Server : ISDN PPTP IPSec L2TP
% Dial from : 1.2.3.4
% Remote NEtwork IP : 192.168.1.0
% Remote NEtwork Mask : 255.255.255.0
>
Telnet Command: vpn option

This command allows users to configure settings for LAN to LAN profile.
Syntax
vpn option <index> <cmd1>=<param1> [<cmd2>=<para2> | ... ]
Syntax Description
Available index numbers:
1 ~ 32
For Common Settings
pname It means the name of the profile.
ena It means to enable or disable the profile.
on – Enable
off - Disable
thr It means the way that VPN connection passes through. Available
settings are wlf, wlo, w2f, and w2o.
w1f – WAN1 First.
w1o – WAN1 Only.
w2f – WAN2 First.
w2o – WAN2 Only.
nnpkt It means the NetBios Naming Packet.
on – Enable the function to pass the packet.
off – Disable the function to block the packet.

dir It means the call direction. Available settings are b, o and i.
b – Both
o – Dial-Out
i – Dial-In.
idle=[value] It means Always on and Idle Time out.
-1 – it means always on for dial-out.
0 – it means always on for dial-in.
Other numbers (e.g., idle=200, idle=300, idle=500) mean the router
will be idle after the interval (seconds) configured here.
palive It means to enable PING to keep alive.
-1 – disable the function.
1,2,3,4 – Enable the function and PING IP 1.2.3.4 to keep alive.
For Dial-Out Settings
ctype It means “Type of Server I am calling”.
“ctype=t” means PPTP.
“ctype=s” means IPSec.
“ctype= l” means L2TP(IPSec Policy None).
“ctype= l1” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Nice to Have).
“ctype= l2” means L2TP(IPSec Policy Must).
dialto It means Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as draytek.com or
123.45.67.89).
ltype It means Link Type.
“ltype=0” means “Disable”.
“ltype=1” means “64kbps”.
“ltype=2” means “128kbps”.
“ltype=3” means “BOD”.
oname It means Dial-Out Username.
“oname=admin” means to set Username = admin.
opwd It means Dial-Out Password
“opwd=1234” means to set Password = 1234.
pauth It means PPP Authentication.
“pauth=pc” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP&CHAP.
“pauth=p” means to set PPP Authentication = PAP Only
ovj It means VJ Compression.
“ovj=on/off” means to enable/disable VJ Compression.
okey It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.
“okey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.
ometh It means IPSec Security Method.
“ometh=ah/” means AH.
“ometh=espd/espda/” means ESP DES without/with
Authentication.
“ometh=esp3/esp3a/” means ESP 3DES without/with
Authentication.
“ometh=espa/espaa” means ESP AES without/with Authentication.
sch It means Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup.
sch=1,3,5,7 Set schedule 1->3->5->7
rcallb It means Require Remote to Callback.
“rcallb=on/off” means to enable/disable Set Require Remote to
Callback.

ikeid It means IKE Local ID.
“ikeid=vigor” means Set Local ID = vigor.
For Dial-In Settings
itype It means Allowed Dial-In Type. Available settings include:
“itype=t” means PPTP.
“itype=s” means IPSec.
“itype=L1”means L2TP (None).
“itype=L1” means L2TP(Nice to Have).
“itype=l2” means L2TP(Must).
peer It means specify Peer VPN Server IP for Remote VPN Gateway.
Type “203.12.23.48” means to allow VPN dial-in with IP address of
203.12.23.48.
Type “off” means any remote IP is allowed to dial in.
peerid It means the peer ID for Remote VPN Gateway.
Type “draytek” means the word is used as local ID.
iname It means Dial-in Username.
“iname=admin” means to set username as “admin”.
ipwd It means Dial-in Password.
“ipwd=1234” means to set password as “1234”.
ivj It means VJ Compression.
“ivj=on/off” means to enable /disable VJ Compression.
ikey It means IKE Pre-Shared Key.
“ikey=abcd” means to set IKE Pre-Shared Key = abcd.
imeth It means IPSec Security Method
“imeth=h” means “Allow AH”.
“imeth=d” means “Allow DES”.
“imeth=3” means “Allow 3DES”.
“imeth=a” means “Allow AES.
For TCP/IP Settings
mywip It means My WAN IP.

“mywip=1.2.3.4” means to set My WAN IP as “1.2.3.4”.
rgip It means Remote Gateway IP.
“rgip=1.2.3.4” means to set Remote Gateway IP as “1.2.3.4”.
rnip It means Remote Network IP.
“rnip=1.2.3.0” means to set Remote Network IP as “1.2.3.0”.
rnmask It means Remote Network Mask.
“rnmask=255.255.255.0” means to set Remote Network Mask as
“255.255.255.0”.
rip It means RIP Direction.
“rip=d” means to set RIP Direction as “Disable”.
“rip=t” means to set RIP Direction as “TX”.
“rip=r” means to set RIP Direction as “RX”.
“rip=b” means to set RIP Direction as “Both”.
mode It means the option of “From first subnet to remote network, you
have to do”.
“mode=r” means to set Route mode.
“mode=n” means to set NAT mode.
droute It means to Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single

WAN supports this).
droute=on/off means to enable/disable the function.
Example
> vpn option 1 idle=250
% Change Log..
% Idle Timeout = 250
Telnet Command: vpn mroute

This command allows users to list, add or delete static routes for a certain LAN to LAN VPN
profile.
Syntax
vpn mroute <index> list
vpn mroute <index> add <network ip>/<mask>
vpn mroute <index> del <network ip>/<mask>
Syntax Description
list It means to display all of the route settings.
add It means to add a new route.
del It means to delete specified route.
1 ~ 32
<network ip>/<mask> Type the IP address with the network mask address.
Example
> vpn mroute 1 add 192.168.5.0/24
% 192.168.5.0/24
% Add new route 192.168.5.0/24 to profile 1
Telnet Command: vpn list

This command allows users to view LAN to LAN VPN profiles.
Syntax
vpn list <index> all
vpn list <index>com
vpn list<index>out
vpn list <index> in
vpn list<index>net
Syntax Description

all It means to list configuration of the specified profile.
com It means to list common settings of the specified profile.
out It means to list dial-out settings of the specified profile.
in It means to list dial-in settings of the specified profile.
net It means to list Network Settings of the specified profile.
1 ~ 32
Example
> vpn list 32 all
% Common Settings
% Profile Name : ???

% Profile Status : Disable
% Netbios Naming Packet : Pass
% Call Direction : Both
% Idle Timeout : 300
% PING to keep alive : off
% Dial-out Settings
% Type of Server : PPTP

% Link Type: : 64k bps
% Username : ???
% Password :
% PPP Authentication : PAP/CHAP
% VJ Compression : on
% Pre-Shared Key :
% IPSec Security Method : AH
% Schedule : 0,0,0,0
% Remote Callback : off
% Provide ISDN Number : off
% IKE phase 1 mode : Main mode
% IKE Local ID :
% Dial-In Settings
--- MORE --- ['q': Quit, 'Enter': New Lines, 'Space Bar': Next Page] ---
> vpn list 1 com
% Common Settings
% Profile Name : ???

% Profile Status : Disable
% Netbios Naming Packet : Pass
% Call Direction : Both
% Idle Timeout : 300
% PING to keep alive : off
>
Telnet Command: vpn remote

This command allows users to enable or disable PPTP/IPSec/L2TP VPN service.
Syntax
vpn remote [PPTP/IPSec/L2TP] [on/off]
Syntax Description
PPTP/IPSec/L2TP There are four types to be selected.
on/off on – enable VPN remote setting.
off – disable VPN remote setting.
Example
> vpn remote PPTP on
Set PPTP VPN Service : On
Please restart the router!!
Telnet Command: vpn NetBios

This command allows users to enable or disable NetBios for Remote Access User Accounts or
LAN-to-LAN Profile.
Syntax
vpn NetBios set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>
Syntax Description
<H2l/L2l> H2l means Remote Access User Accounts.
L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.
Specify which one will be applied by NetBios.
<index> The index number of the profile.
<Block/Pass> Pass – Have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts
located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.
Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both
sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, set it block data transmission of
Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.
Example
> vpn NetBios set H2l 1 Pass
% Remote Dial In Profile Index [1] :
% NetBios Block/Pass: [PASS]
Telnet Command: vpn mss

This command allows users to configure the maximum segment size (MSS) for different TCP
types.
Syntax

vpn mss show
vpn mss default
vpn mss set <connection type> <TCP maximum segment size range>
Syntax Description
show It means to display current setting status.
default TCP maximum segment size for all the VPN connection will be set as
1360 bytes.
set Use it to specify the connection type and value of MSS.
<connection type> 1~4 represent various type.
1 – PPTP
2 – L2TP
3 – IPSec
4 – L2TP over IPSec
<TCP maximum segment size Each type has different segment size range.
range> PPTP – 1 ~ 1412
L2TP – 1 ~ 1408
IPSec – 1 ~ 1381
L2TP over IPSec – 1 ~ 1361
Example
>vpn mss set 1 1400
% VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) :
PPTP = 1400
L2TP = 1360
IPSec = 1360
L2TP over IPSec = 1360
>vpn mss show
VPN TCP maximum segment size (MSS) :
PPTP = 1400
L2TP = 1360
IPSec = 1360
L2TP over IPSec = 1360
Telnet Command: vpn ike

This command is used to display IKE memory status and leakage list.
Syntax
vpn ike -q
Example
> vpn ike -q
IKE Memory Status and Leakage List
# of free L-Buffer=95, minimum=94, leak=1

# of free M-Buffer=529, minimum=529 leak=3

# of free S-Buffer=1199, minimum=1198, leak=1
# of free Msgid-Buffer=1024, minimum=1024
Telnet Command: vpn Multicast

This command allows users to pass or block the multi-cast packet via VPN.
Syntax
vpn Multicast set <H2l/L2l> <index> <Block/Pass>
Syntax Description
<H2l/L2l> H2l means Host to LAN (Remote Access User Accounts).
L2l means LAN-to-LAN Profile.
<index> The index number of the profile.
<Block/Pass> Set Block/Pass the Multicast Packets.
The default is Block.
Example
> vpn Multicast set L2l 1 Pass
% Lan to Lan Profile Index [1] :
% Status Block/Pass: [PASS]
Telnet Command: vpn pass2nd

This command allows users to determine if the packets coming from the second subnet
passing through current used VPN tunnel.
Syntax
vpn pass2nd[on]
vpn pass2nd [off]
Syntax Description
on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT.
off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.
Example
> vpn pass2nd on
% 2nd subnet is allowed to pass VPN tunnel!
Telnet Command: vpn pass2nat

This command allows users to determine if the packets passing through by NAT or not when
the VPN tunnel disconnects.
Syntax
vpn pass2nat [on]
vpn pass2nat [off]

Syntax Description
on/off on – the packets can pass through NAT.
off – the packets cannot pass through NAT.
Example
> vpn pass2nat on
% Packets would go through by NAT when VPN disconnect!!
Telnet Command: wan ppp_mru

This command allows users to adjust the size of PPP LCP MRU. It is used for specific
network.
Syntax
wan ppp_mru <WAN interface number> <MRU size >
Syntax Description
<WAN interface number> Type a number to represent the physical interface. For Vigor130,
the number is 1 (which means WAN1).
<MRU size > It means the number of PPP LCP MRU. The available range is from
1400 to 1600.
Example
>wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1492
> wan ppp_mru 1 1490

>
> wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1490
> wan ppp_mru 1 1492

> wan ppp_mru 1 ?
% Now: 1492
Telnet Command: wan mtu / mtu2

This command allows users to adjust the size of MTU for WAN.
Syntax
wan mtu [value]
wan mtu2 [value]
Syntax Description
value It means the number of MTU for PPP. The available range is from
1000 to 1500.

For Static IP/DHCP, the maximum number will be 1500.
For PPPoE, the maximum number will be 1492.
For PPTP/L2TP, the maximum number will be 1460.
Example
> wan mtu 1100
> wan mtu ?
Static IP/DHCP (Max MSS: 1500)
PPPoE(Max MSS: 1492)
PPTP/L2TP(Max MSS: 1460)
% wan ppp_mss <MSS size: 1000 ~ 1500>
% Now: 1100
Telnet Command: wan DF_check

This command allows you to enable or disable the function of DF (Don’t fragment)
Syntax
wan DF_check [on]
wan DF_check [off]
Syntax Description
on/off It means to enable or disable DF.
Example
> wan DF_check on
%DF bit check enable!
Telnet Command: wan disable

This command allows you to disable WAN connection.
Example
> wan disable WAN
%WAN disabled.
Telnet Command: wan enable

This command allows you to disable wan connection.
Example
> wan enable WAN
%WAN1 enabled.
Telnet Command: wan forward

This command allows you to enable or disable the function of WAN forwarding. The packets
are allowed to be transmitted between different WANs.
Syntax

wan forward [on]
wan forward [off]
Syntax Description
on/off It means to enable or disable WAN forward.
Example
> wan forward ?
%WAN forwarding is Disable!
> wan forward on

%WAN forwarding is enable!
Telnet Command: wan status

This command allows you to display the status of WAN connection, including connection mode,
TX/RX packets, DNS settings and IP address.
Example
> wan status
WAN1: Offline, stall=N
Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
TX Packets=0, TX Rate(Bps)=0, RX Packets=0, RX Rate(Bps)=0
Primary DNS=0.0.0.0, Secondary DNS=0.0.0.0
PVC_WAN3: Offline, stall=N

Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---

Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---

Mode: ---, Up Time=00:00:00
IP=---, GW IP=---
Telnet Command: wan modem

This command, wan modem, allows you to configure 3G/4G USB Modem (PPP mode) of WAN5.
Syntax
wan modem [init/init2/dial/pin][string]
wan modem paponly [on/off]
wan modem backup_wait [value]
wan modem pipe [Int][Din][Dout]

wan modem wakeup [on/off/value]
wan modem vid [id]
wan modem pid [id]
wan modem status
Syntax Description
init Set initial modem AT command (default value is
“AT&FE0V1X1&D2&C1S0=0”).
Init2 Set the second initial modem AT command.
dial Set dial modem AT command (default value is “ATDT*99#”).
pin Set PIN code for SIM card.
“0”:disable
paponly It means PAP Only. Set the PPP authentication of the USB WAN.
on: None.
off: PAP or CHAP.
backup_wait Set waiting time after boot if USB WAN is in backup mode. This
waiting time is reserved for the dial of main WANs so that the
backup USB WAN will not go up first.
Available setting is from 1 to 255. Unit is second.
pipe It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice.
wakeup [on/off] It is for RD debug only. Please don’t use it without our advice.
vid Set VID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN
interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router
specifies WAN interface by USB port.
pid Set PID of VID/PID match to bind the USB modem to specify WAN
interface. By default, this match is not set (0x0/0x0) and the router
specifies WAN interface by USB port.
status Display current status of USB modem.
Example
> wan modem pin 0000
> wan modem status
Modem Link Speed=0
Current Signal Strength=0
Last Fail Message:
Current Connect Stage:
Telnet Command: wan detect

This command allows you to Ping a specified IP to detect the WAN connection (static IP or
PPPoE mode).
Syntax
wan detect [wan1][on/off/always_on]
wan detect [wan1]target [ip addr]
wan detect [wan1]ttl [1-255]
wan detect status

Syntax Description
on It means to enable ping detection. The IP address of the target shall
be set.
off It means to enable ARP detection (default).
always_on disable link detect, always connected(only support static IP)
target It means to set the ping target.
ip addr It means the IP address used for detection. Type an IP address in this
field.
ttl It means to set the ping TTL value (work as trace route)
If you do not set any value for ttl here or just type 0 here, the
system will use default setting (255) as the ttl value.
status It means to show the current status.
Example
> wan detect status
WAN1: always on
WAN2: off
WAN3: off
WAN4: off
WAN5: off
> wan detect wan1 target 192.168.1.78
Set OK
> wan detect wan1 on

Set OK
> wan detect status

WAN1: on, Target=192.168.1.78, TTL=255
WAN2: off
WAN3: off
WAN4: off
WAN5: off
>
Telnet Command: wan lb

This command allows you to Enable/Disable for each WAN to join auto load balance member.
Syntax
wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] on
wan lb [wan1/wan2/…] off
Syntax Description
wan1/wan2 It means to specify which WAN will be applied with load balance.
on It means to make WAN interface as the member of load balance.
off It means to cancel WAN interface as the member of load balance.

Example
> wan lb status
WAN1: on
WAN2: on
WAN3: on
WAN4: on
WAN5: on
WAN6: on
WAN7: on
Telnet Command: wan mvlan

This command allows you to configure multi-VLAN for WAN and LAN. It supports pure bridge
mode (modem mode) between Ethernet WAN and LAN port 2~4.
Syntax
wan mvlan [pvc_no/status/save/enable/disable] [on/off/clear/tag tag_no] [service
type/vlan priority] [px ... ][ Keep Tag]
Syntax Description
pvc_no It means index number of PVC. There are 10 PVC, 0(Channel-1) to
9(Channel-9) allowed to be configured.
However, only 2 to 9 are available for configuration.
status It means to display the whole Bridge status.
save It means to save the configuration into flash of Vigor router.
enable/disable It means to enable/disable the Multi-VLAN function.
on/off It means to turn on/off bridge mode for the specific channel.
clear It means to turn off/clear the port.
tag tag_no It means to tag a number for the VLAN.
-1: No need to add tag number.
1-4095: Available setting numbers used as tagged number.
service type It means to specify the service type for VLAN.
0: Normal.
1: IGMP.
vlan priority It means to specify the priority for the VALN setting.
Range is from 0 to 7.
px It means LAN port. Available setting number is from 2 to 4. Port
number 1 is locked for NAT usage.
Keep Tag It means Multi-VLAN packets will keep their VLAN headers to LAN.
Example
PVC 7 will map to LAN port 2/3/4 in bridge mode; service type is Normal. No tag added.
> > wan mvlan 7 on p2 p3 p4

PVC Bridge p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 Service Type Tag Priority Keep Tag
------------------------------------------------------------------
7 ON 0 0 1 1 0 0 Normal 0(OFF) 0 OFF

>
Telnet Command: wan multifno

This command allows you to specify a channel (in Multi-PVC/VLAN) to make bridge connection
to a specified WAN interface.
Syntax
wan multifno [channel #] [WAN interface #]
wan multifno status
Syntax Description
channel # There are 4 (?) channels including VLAN and PVC.
Available settings are:
1=Channel 1
3=Channel 3
4=Channel 4
5=Channel 5
WAN interface # Type a number to indicate the WAN interface.
1=WAN1
status It means to display current bridge status.
Example
> wan multifno 5 1
% Configured channel 5 uplink to WAN1
> wan multifno status
% Channel 3 uplink ifno: 3
>
Telnet Command: wan vlan

This command allows you to tag packets on WAN VLAN with specified number.
Syntax
wan vlan wan [#] tag [value]
wan vlan wan [#] [enable|disable]
wan vlan stat
Syntax Description
# It means the number of WAN interface.
1: means WAN1
2: means WAN2.
value It means the number to be tagged on packets.

The range of the value is between 32 ~ 4095.
enable|disable It means to enable or disable the WAN interface for VLAN.
stat It means to display the table of WAN VLAN status.
Example
> wan vlan stat
%Interface Pri Tag Enabled
%======================================
% WAN1 (ADSL) 0 0
% WAN1 (VDSL) 0 0
%WAN2 0 0
Telnet Command: wan detect_mtu

This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv4 target to
ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
Syntax
wan detect_mtu -w [number] -i [Host/IP address] -s [base_size] -d [decrease_size] (-c
[count])
Syntax Description
-w [number] Specify the WAN interface.
Value: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and
etc.
-I [Host/IP address] Specify the IPv4 target to detect. If can be an IPv4 address or
domain name.
Host/IP address: Type the IP address/domain name of the target.
-s [base_size] Set the MTU size base for Discovery.
base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.
-d [decrease size] Set the MTU size to decrease between detections.
decrease size: Available setting is 1 ~ 100.
-c [count] Set the maximum times of ping failure during a Discovery.
count: Available settings are 1 ~ 10. Default value is 3.
Example
> wan detect_mtu -w 2 -i 8.8.8.8 -s 1500 -d 30 -c 10
detecting mtu size:1500!!!
mtu size:1470!!!
Telnet Command: wan detect_mtu6

This command allows you to run a WAN MTU Discovery. The user can specify an IPv6 target to
ping and find the suitable MTU size of the WAN interface.
Syntax
wan detect_mtu6 –w [number] –i [IPv6 address] –s [base_size]
Syntax Description
-w [number] Specify the WAN interface
number: Type the number of WAN interface. 1: WAN1; 2:WAN2….and
etc.

-I [IPv6 address] Specify the IPv6 target to detect. It must be an IPv6 IP address.
IPv6 address: Type the IPv6 address of the target.
-s [base_size] Specify the size of MTU.
base_size: Available setting is 1000 ~ 1500.
Example
> wan detect_mtu6 -w 2 -i 2404:6800:4008:c06::5e -s 1500
>
Telnet Command: wol

This command allows Administrator to set the white list of WAN IP addresses/Subnets, that
the magic packet from these IP addresses/Subnets will be eligible to pass through NAT and
wake up the LAN client. You also need to set NAT rule for LAN client.
Syntax
wol up [MAC Address]/[IP Address]
wol fromWan [on/off/any]
wol fromWan_Setting [idx][ip address][mask]
Syntax Description
MAC Address It means the MAC address of the host.
IP address It means the LAN IP address of the host. If you want to wake up LAN
host by using IP address, be sure that that IP address has been
bound with the MAC address (IP BindMAC).
on/off/any It means to enable or disable the function of WOL from WAN.
on: enable
off: disable
any: It means any source IP address can pass through NAT and wake
up the LAN client.
This command will allow the user to choose whether WoL packets
can be passed from the Internet to the LAN network from a specific
WAN interface.
[idx][ip address] [mask] It means the index number (from 1 to 4).
These commands will allow the user to configure the LAN clients
that the user may wake up from the Internet through the use of the
WoL packet.
ip address - It means the WAN IP address.
mask - It means the mask of the IP address.
Example
> wol fromWan on
> wol fromWan_Setting 1 192.168.1.45 255.255.255.0
>
Telnet Command: user

The command is used to create new user account profiles.
Syntax
user set [-e|-d|-c|-l|-o|-a|-r|-b]

user edit [PROFILE_IDX] [-e|-d|-n|-p|-t|-u|-i|-q|-r|-w|-s|-m|-x|-v]
user account [USER_NAME] [-t|-d|-q|-r|-w]
Syntax Description
set It means to configure general setup for the user management.
edit It means to modify the selected user profile.
account It means to
User Set
-e Enable User management function.
-d Disable User management function.
-a[Profile idx][User It means to pass an IP Address.
name][IP_Address] Profile idx- type the index number of the selected profile.
User name- type the user name that you want it to pass.
IP_Address- type the IP address that you want it to pass.
-l all Show online user.
-l userl all – all of the users will be displayed on the screen.
-l ip user name – type the user name that you want to view on the
screen.
ip – type the IP address that you want to view on the screen.
-o It means to show user account information.
e.g.,-o
-c[user name] Clear the user record.
-c all user name – type the user name that you want to get clear
corresponding record.
all – all of the records will be removed.
-buser [user name] Block specifies user or IP address.
-b ip [ ip address] user name – type the user name that you want to block.
ip address –– type the IP address that you want to block.
-u user [user name] Unblock specifies user or IP address.
-u ip [ ip address] user name – type the user name that you want to unblock.
ip address –– type the IP address that you want to unblock.
-r [user name | all] Remove the user record.
user name – type the name of the user profile.
all – all of the user profile settings will be removed.
-q It means to trigger the alert tool to do authentication.
-s It means to set login service.
0:HTTPS
1:HTTP
e.g.,-s 1
User edit
PROFILE_IDX Type the index number of the profile that you want to edit.
-e Enable User profile function.
-d Disable User profile function.
-n It means to set a user name for a profile.
e.g.,-n fortest
-p It means to configure user password.

e.g., -p 60fortest
-t It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user profile
0:Disable
1:Enable
-u It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user profile
0:Disable
1:Enable
-i It means to set idle time.
e.g., -i 60
-q set time quota
It means to set time quota of the user profile.
e.g., -q 200
-r It means to set data quota.
e.g., -r 1000
-w It means to specify the data quota unit (MB/GB).
e.g., -w MB
-s It means to set schedule index. Available settings are”
sch_idx1,sch_idx2,sch_idx3, and sch_idx4.
-m It means to set the maximum login user number.
e.g., -m 200
-x It means to set external server authentication
0: None
1: LDAP
2: Radius
3: TACAS
e.g., -x 2
-v It means to view user profile(s).
User account
USER_NAME It means to type a name of the user account.
-t It means to enable /disable time quota limitation for user account.
0:Disable
1:Enable
-d It means to enable /disable data quota limitation for user account.
0:Disable
1:Enable
-q It means to set account time quota.
e.g., -q 200
-r It means to set account data quota.
e.g., -r 1000
-w It means to set data quota unit (MB/GB).
Example
> user account admin -d 1
Enable the [admin] data quota limited
Telnet Command: nand bad /nand usage

“NAND usage” is used to display NAND Flash usage; “nand bad” is used to display NAND Flash
bad blocks.
Syntax
nand bad
nand usage
Example
>nand usage
Show NAND Flash Usage:
Partition Total Used Available Use%
cfg 4194304 7920 4186384 0%
bin_web 33554432 11869493 21684939 35%
cfg-bak 4194304 7920 4186384 0%
bin_web-bak 33554432 11869493 21684939 35%
> nand bad
Show NAND Flash Bad Blocks:
Block Address Partition
1020 0x07f80000 unused
1021 0x07fa0000 unused
1022 0x07fc0000 unused
1023 0x07fe0000 unused
Telnet Command: ha set

This command can be used to configure HA settings for Vigor routers.
Syntax
ha set [-<command> <parameter>| ... ]
Syntax Description

<parameter>|…] […] means that you can type in several parameters in one line.
-e <1/0> 1: Enable the function of High Availability (HA).
0: Disable the function of High Availability (HA).
-l <1/0> 1: Enable the function of recording the operation record of HA in
Syslog.
0: Disable the function of recording the operation record of HA in
Syslog.
-M <1/0> Specify the Redundancy Method for HA.
1: Active-Standby
0: Hot-Standby
-v <1-255> Specify the group ID (VHID)
1- 255: Setting range.
-R Set HA settings to Factory Default.
-p <1-30> Specify the Priority ID.
1-30: Setting range.
-k <key> Specify the Authentication Key.
Key: Max. 31 Characters.
-u <1/0> Enable or disable the function of Update DDNS.
1: Enable. When a router changes HA status to primary, it will

update DDNS automatically.
0: Disable.
-m <interface> Specify the management interface.
Interface: LAN1 ~ LAN8, DMZ.
-s It means to get the newest status of other router (except the local
router).
-y It means sync local config to other router. Primary can executes this
command. Secondary can not execute this commad.
-c <1/0> Enable or disable the function of Config Sync.
1: Enable.
0: Disable.
-I -[M|H|D] <interval> Set the Config Sync Interval for HA. Minimum interval is 15 minutes.
-M: Minute. Setting range is 0/15/30/45. (e.g., ha set -I -M 30)
-H: Hour. Setting range is from 0 to 23. (e.g., ha set -I -H 12)
-D: Day. Setting range is from 0 to 30. (e.g., ha set -I -D 15)
-h <Subnet> [<Virtual IP>] Enable and set virtual IP to the subnet.
Subnet: LAN1 to LAN8, DMZ.
Virtual IP: The type format shall be “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. (e.g,
192.168.1.0)
For example, to enable a virtual IP to the sunet, simply type:
ha set –h LAN1 192.168.1.5
-d <Subnet> Disable a virtual IP to the subnet.
Subnet: LAN1 to LAN8, DMZ.
For example, to disable a virtual IP to the subnet, just type:
ha set –h LAN1
Example
> ha set -h LAN1 192.168.1.5
% Enable Virtual IP on LAN1
% Set Virtual IP 192.168.1.5 OK!!
>
Telnet Command: ha show

This command can be used to show the settings information about config sync and general
setup.
Syntax
ha show –c
ha show –g
Syntax Description
-c Show the settings of config sync.

-g Show the settings of general setup.
Example
> ha show -g
% High Availability : Disable
% Redundancy Method : Active-Standby
% Group ID : 1

% Priority ID : 10
% Preempt Mode : Enable
% Update DDNS : Disable
% Management Interface : LAN1
% Authentication Key : draytek
% Syslog : OFF
%
% [ Index | Enable | Virtual IP ]
% LAN1 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN2 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN3 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN4 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN5 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN6 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN7 - 0.0.0.0
% LAN8 - 0.0.0.0
% DMZ - 0.0.0.0
>
Telnet Command: ha status

This command is used to display HA status information.
Syntax
ha status –a [Detail Level]
ha status –m [Detail Level]
Syntax Description
-a Show the status for all of the routers in HA group.

-m Show the status of local router only.
Detail Level 0: Basic information.
1: Basic information with more data (e.g., firmware version, model,
HTTPs port. MAC address and etc).
2: Basic information with some HA settings.
Example
> ha status -m 2
% [Local Router] DrayTek
% IPv4 : 192.168.1.1
% Status : !
% High Availability : ! Disable
% Redundancy Method : Active-Standby
% Group ID : 1
% Priority ID : 10
% Preempt Mode : Enable
% Update DDNS : Disable
% Management Interface : LAN1
% Authentication Key : draytek
% Virtual IP: (Max. 7 Virtual IPs)
% ! OFF
% Config Sync : Disable
% Config Sync Interval : 0 Day 0 Hour 15 Minute
% Cached Time : 0 (s)
> ha status -m 0

% [Local Router] DrayTek
% IPv4 : 192.168.1.1
% Status : !
% State : Down
% Stable : ! No
% WAN : ! All WANs Down - Eth
% Config Sync Status : Not Ready
% Cached Time : 0 (s)
%
>

DrayTek UG Vigor3910 V1.0 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DrayTek UG Vigor3910 V1.0 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DrayTek UG Vigor3910 V1.0 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vigor3910 Series

Multi-WAN Security Router

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide iii

Part II Connectivity ..........................................................................................................31

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide v

Part III VPN .....................................................................................................................157

Part IV Security ..............................................................................................................213

Part V Management .......................................................................................................267

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide vii

Part VII Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................413

Part VIII DrayTek Tools ..................................................................................................445

Part IX Telnet Commands..............................................................................................451

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide ix

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 1

This is a generic International version of the user guide. Specification,

Vigor3910 Series, a broadband router, integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth

2 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

LED Status Explanation

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 3

Connecter for a power cord.

4 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

I-2-1 Installing Vigor Router

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 5

Desktop Type Installation

6 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

3. Click Add a printer.

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 7

8 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

7. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 9

9. Type a name for the chosen printer. Click Next.

10 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

11. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 11

12 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 13

1. Make sure your PC connects to the router correctly.

3. Please type “admin/admin” as the Username/Password and click Login.

14 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 15

16 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 17

18 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

Port Color Description

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 19

20 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

I-5-3 GUI Map

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 21

I-5-5 Config Backup

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 23

Click this icon to exit the web user interface.

24 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

I-5-8-1 Physical Connection

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 25

Detailed explanation (for IPv4) is shown below:

26 Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide

Detailed explanation (for IPv6) is shown below:

I-5-8-2 Virtual WAN

Vigor3910 Series User’s Guide 27